Brill Formulation: Instruction Manual

Brill Formulation®
Instruction Manual
Version: 2.2
Copyright © 2000-2009 Feed Management Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including without limitation, photocopy or recording, without written permission.
Feed Tags, Brill Formulation, Feed Management Systems, and the Feed Management Systems logo are registered trademarks and/or service marks of Feed Management Systems, Inc. All other marks
are trademarks and/or service marks of their respective owners, may be registered, and should be treated appropriately. Information in this document is believed to be accurate upon release. Information
may change without notice. An updated version of this document may be obtained, if available, through Feed Management Systems at (800) 701–5794.
Brill Formulation® Instruction Manual
Table of Contents
Overview..................................................................................................................................... 5
Using Brill Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 6
Part 1: Getting Started ................................................................................................................ 6
Selecting a Plant ...................................................................................................................... 6
Part 2: Edit Menu ........................................................................................................................ 8
Chapter 1: Plants ..................................................................................................................... 8
Chapter 2: Nutrients .............................................................................................................. 19
Chapter 3: Species Maintenance .............................................................................................. 22
Chapter 4: Ingredient Maintenance .......................................................................................... 25
Chapter 5: Prices and Add-On Cost .......................................................................................... 31
Chapter 6: Global and Ingredient Equations .............................................................................. 37
Chapter 7: Formula Specifications ............................................................................................ 39
Chapter 8: Stored Formulas .................................................................................................... 47
Chapter 9: Stored Formula Authorization .................................................................................. 49
Chapter 10: Edit Archive Comments ......................................................................................... 51
Chapter 11: Pellet Creation ..................................................................................................... 52
Chapter 12: Edit Margins ........................................................................................................ 54
Chapter 13: Log In As Another User ......................................................................................... 55
Chapter 14: Exit .................................................................................................................... 55
Part 3: Copy ............................................................................................................................. 56
Chapter 1: Ingredients ........................................................................................................... 56
Chapter 2: Prices ................................................................................................................... 57
Chapter 3: Ingredient Equation ............................................................................................... 58
Chapter 6: Copy Archived Formulas to Production ...................................................................... 60
Chapter 7: Copy Plant ............................................................................................................ 61
Part 4: Delete ........................................................................................................................... 62
Chapter 1: Ingredients ........................................................................................................... 62
Chapter 2: Prices ................................................................................................................... 63
Chapter 3: Ingredient Equations .............................................................................................. 64
Chapter 6: Delete Stored Formula Authorizations ....................................................................... 66
Chapter 7: Archived Formulas ................................................................................................. 67
Chapter 8: Plants ................................................................................................................... 68
Part 5: Reports ......................................................................................................................... 68
SmartLists ............................................................................................................................ 73
Printing a Report ................................................................................................................... 80
Part 6: Tools Menu .................................................................................................................... 83
Chapter 1: Quick Update ........................................................................................................ 83
Chapter 2: Special ................................................................................................................. 84
Chapter 3: System ............................................................................................................... 113
Chapter 4: Mill Mix ............................................................................................................... 132
Copyright © Feed Management Systems, Inc. All rights reserved | Ph. 800.701.5794 | www.feedsys.com
Confidential and Proprietary Page 2 of 279
Chapter 5: Interfaces ........................................................................................................... 139

Part 7: Shortcuts .................................................................................................................... 140
Chapter 1: Feed Tags ........................................................................................................... 140
Chapter 2: Optimization ....................................................................................................... 140
Chapter 3: Optimization (No Multi-Blend) ............................................................................... 140
Part 8: Help ........................................................................................................................... 140
Chapter 1: Display Help ........................................................................................................ 140
Chapter 2: Display User Manual ............................................................................................. 140
Chapter 3: Support .............................................................................................................. 140
Chapter 4: About ................................................................................................................. 141
Using Brill Optimization .......................................................................................................... 142
Overview ............................................................................................................................... 142
Part 1: Professional Nutritionist ................................................................................................ 142
Chapter 1: Professional Nutritionist ........................................................................................ 142
Chapter 2: Creating Premixes ................................................................................................ 157
Part 2: Batch Optimization ....................................................................................................... 160
Chapter 1: Creating a New Formula Set (*.MLS file)................................................................. 160
Chapter 2: Modifying a Formula Set ....................................................................................... 163
Chapter 3: Optimizing a Batch ............................................................................................... 163
Chapter 4: Using the Weekly Process ..................................................................................... 164
Part 3: Multi-Blend .................................................................................................................. 167
Chapter 1: Creating a Multi-Blend Set .................................................................................... 167
Chapter 2: Optimizing a Multi-Blend Set ................................................................................. 176
Part 4: Reports ....................................................................................................................... 194
Printing a Report ................................................................................................................. 195
Part 5: System Menu ............................................................................................................... 198
Chapter 1: Options .............................................................................................................. 198
Chapter 2: Startup Language ................................................................................................ 202
Chapter 3: Change Language ................................................................................................ 202
Part 6: Custom and Help .......................................................................................................... 203
Chapter 1: Custom Menu ...................................................................................................... 203
Chapter 2: Help Menu .......................................................................................................... 203
Part 7: Exit ............................................................................................................................ 205
Using Brill Foundation Utilities ................................................................................................ 206
Part 1: File ............................................................................................................................. 206
Chapter 1: Edit Database Configuration .................................................................................. 206
Chapter 3: Add/Remove Users .............................................................................................. 220
Chapter 4: Adjust Colors....................................................................................................... 226
Chapter 5: Restart and Re-Login............................................................................................ 227
Chapter 6: Exit .................................................................................................................... 227
Part 2: Security ...................................................................................................................... 228
Chapter 1: Display Current License ........................................................................................ 228
Chapter 2: New Activation .................................................................................................... 228
Chapter 3: Update Activation ................................................................................................ 230
Part 3: Reports ....................................................................................................................... 231
View Configuration ............................................................................................................... 231
Part 4: Rebuild ....................................................................................................................... 231
Chapter 1: Rebuild Data Files ................................................................................................ 231

Chapter 2: Translate Free Location Files ................................................................................. 234
Chapter 3: Archive Maintenance ............................................................................................ 235
Part 5: System ....................................................................................................................... 237
Part 6: Help ........................................................................................................................... 237
Chapter 1: View Help File...................................................................................................... 237
Chapter 2: View the Manual .................................................................................................. 237
Chapter 3: Register .............................................................................................................. 238
Chapter 4: Check for Formulation Updates .............................................................................. 238
Chapter 5: About ................................................................................................................. 238
Appendix ................................................................................................................................. 239
Chapter 1: Error – 103 Reply from Network Driver is Bad ............................................................ 239
Chapter 2: Rounding Codes ...................................................................................................... 239
Chapter 3: Special Nutrients and Ingredients ............................................................................. 240
Chapter 4: Entering Nutrient Values that are not Based on Weight ................................................ 247
Chapter 5: Import/Export File................................................................................................... 248
Chapter 6: Startup.ini File ........................................................................................................ 266
Chapter 7: Translation Files...................................................................................................... 267
File Format ......................................................................................................................... 268
Building Translation Tables.................................................................................................... 270
Transferring Report Data to Excel .......................................................................................... 270
Index ...................................................................................................................................... 273
Documentation Evaluation ...................................................................................................... 279
Overview
Brill Formulation Maintenance
Brill Formulation Maintenance allows you to set up and maintain your plant data, user data, nutrient data,
ingredient data, formulas, reports, and more.
For security purposes, you will need to contact a Brill Formulation customer support specialist if you plan
to change users, passwords, or if you need to change security to certain areas of the system.
Brill Formulation Optimization

Brill Formulation Optimization allows you to create a stored formula (also referred to as a production
formula) based on the formula specification created in Brill Formulation Maintenance. Whether your
customers run swine operations, dairy farms, poultry farms, or raise exotics, Brill Formulation allows you
to consistently prepare the right blends at the right times and for the right conditions.
Brill Formulation Optimization allows you to change feed formulas on a moment's notice, plus track orders,
formulas, and amounts. What's more, as costs for ingredients change, you can automatically adjust your
prices.
Foundation Utilities
FMS Foundation Utilities allows you to perform back-office and system maintenance functions for Brill
Formulation Maintenance and Optimization including the following:
Activating a new license or update an existing license.
Adding/changing user information.
Changing the configuration of Brill Formulation on a specific workstation.
Rebuild data files (to properly maintain your system).
View the security file for easier communication with a Brill Formulation customer support
specialist.
Using Brill Maintenance

Part 1: Getting Started
To open Brill Formulation Maintenance:
Click on the Windows Start button, point to All Programs, point to Feed Management Systems,
point to Brill Formulation, and click Brill Formulation Maintenance.
The main window of Brill Formulation Maintenance appears, allowing you access to all maintenance
functions within the system (see picture below).
These fields display the user ID,

system, and dataset currently being
These fields used. To change the information,
display the current click on the link. For example, to
and alternate change the user, click the User link.
plant. You can
type the plant
code, or click
to search for a
code. Refer to the
following sections
for step-by-step
instructions.
Selecting a Plant
Plants are used to store information that may be specific to a particular site or function. You may
have one plant or 100 plants in your company based on your needs. For example, you may have
one plant for each physical location of your company. In addition, you could have an
administrative plant that sets the commodity or ingredient costs daily, weekly, or monthly (even if
you don‘t have a specific site dedicated to administration).
Tip: For information on creating a plant, refer to ―Part 2: Edit Menu; Chapter 1: Plant
Maintenance.‖
Current Plant
To specify the current plant, you can either enter a plant code in the Current Plant field, or you
can look up a plant code by completing the following steps:
Tip: The Current Plant field will retain the plant code for the next time you log in to Brill
Formulation Maintenance as the current user. For example, if you‘re currently logged in
as ―JOHN1‖ and you set the plant to ―EAST‖, the next time you log in as ―JOHN1‖ the
Current Plant field will be set to ―EAST‖. (The system retains this information based on
user ID, so if you logged in using a different user name, the Current Plant field may be
set to a different plant code.)
1. On the main window, click (to the right of the Current Plant field). A new window
appears (see picture below).
You can also use the Range tab to search for a

plant. For example, if there are multiple plants set
up and you want to search for all plants between
―MA…‖ and ―MR…‖, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Range tab.
2. Enter MA in the top left field
3. Enter MR in the top right field.
4. Click . The Search window appears. All

plants within that alphabetical range (such as
MDC, MKT and MON) will be checked.
5. Uncheck those you decide not to use, leaving
one choice. (You can only see data from one
plant at a time.)
2. Click on the plant you want to select. A check mark appears in the Selected column,
indicating that the plant is selected.
Tip: Only one plant may be used. If you select more than one plant, the system will use
the first selected plant from the top of the list. For example, if you have selected two
plants from the list as in the example below, the system would use the ―East‖ plant.
3. Click  to return to the main window of Brill Formulation Maintenance. The plant you
selected is displayed in the Current Plant field.
Alternate Plant
The Alternate Plant field is used to identify which plant determines pricing. If this field blank,
the system uses the plant in the Current Plant field to determine pricing.
To specify the alternate plant, you can either enter a plant code in the Alternate Plant field, or
you can look up a plant code by completing the following steps:
1. On the main window, click (to the right of the Alternate Plant field). A new window
appears.
2. Click on the plant you want to select. A check mark appears in the Selected column (as
shown below), indicating that the plant is selected.
Tip: Only one plant may be used. If you select more than one plant, the system will use
the first selected plant from the top of the list. For example, if you have selected two
plants from the list as in the example below, the system would use the ―East‖ plant.
3. Click  to return to the main window of Brill Formulation Maintenance. The plant you
selected is displayed in the Alternate Plant field.
Part 2: Edit Menu

The edit menu allows you to change information for each of the following:
Plants Plant to Plant Add-On Maintenance
Nutrients Global Equations
Species Codes Ingredient Equations
Species Code Names Formula Specifications
Base Ingredients Stored Formulas
Overlay Ingredients Edit Archive Comments
Prices Pellet Creation
Add-On Cost Edit Margins
Chapter 1: Plants
Adding/Changing Plants
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Plants. The Plant Maintenance or
Plant Structure Maintenance window appears (see picture on the following page).
If you do not have the Multi-Level Overlays option, you will see the Plant Maintenance
window that displays a single Plant Code, Plant Name, Alternate Plant; and a check box
determining whether the plant contains formula specifications.
If you do have the Multi-Level Overlays option, Plant Structure Maintenance window shows
the plants and the hierarchy that you define in a tree-view mode.
Existing plants are displayed here.

If you do not have the Multi-Level Overlays option,
plants are displayed.
If you have the Multi-Level Overlays option, plants
are displayed in a tree structure. You can change
the hierarchy of plants (if necessary) by clicking
and dragging plants after they have been created.
You can even move entire branches of plants by
clicking on a parent plant and then dragging that
plant to a new location. The child plants are moved
with the parent plant.
2. To add a plant, click +. Or, to change a plant, click on the plant you want to change and
then click . The Plant Maintenance window appears (see picture below).
In a ―Plant Management‖ system,

the ―Check here if this plant
contains formula specifications‖
option is not available as shown in
this example because the formula
specifications are maintained in the
base plant set.
Tip: If you do not have a plant
management system, this
field is enabled after you
enter a new plant code in
the New Plant Code field and
press ENTER.
3. Enter information into each of the following fields as necessary:

Field: Description:
Plant Code If you are adding a plant, enter the plant code (up to 5
alphanumeric characters) and then press ENTER.
If you are changing a plant, this field displays the plant name (it
cannot be changed).
Tip: Plant names may include the following special characters if
necessary; however, they cannot be the first character of
the name:
# % & .
* - _
Plant Name Enter a plant name (up to 30 alphanumeric characters).
Virtual Base Name Enter a plant name (up to 30 alphanumeric characters).
Alternate Plant Select an alternate plant to assign as a default to this Plant Code.
Tip: To search for a plant:
1. Click .
2. Click on the plant you want to select.
3. Click 
to select the plant and return to the Plant
Maintenance window.
4. If the plant contains formula specifications, click the Check here if this plant contains
formula specifications option.
5. Click  to select the plant and return to the Plant Structure Maintenance window.
Tip: Once your new plant is set up with all the required nutrients, ingredients, and
formula specifications, you may want to use the plant as a template to create new
plants. Some companies have chosen to create a pricing plant for each month.
6. When all additions/changes have been made, click 

to save your changes and return to
the main window. (Click Cancel if you do not want to save your changes.)
Removing Plants
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Plants. The Plant Structure
Maintenance window appears.
2. Click on the plant you want to remove. Then, click . A message appears to confirm that
you want to delete the plant.
3. Click Yes to delete the plant and return to the Plant Structure Maintenance window.
Multi-Level Overlays
Multi-Level Overlays is an optional module of Brill Formulation. If you are

interested in purchasing this option, or to learn more, contact your sales
representative.
Multi-Level Overlays allows you to create multiple levels of plants. Multiple layers of plants
help you maintain the validity of information across your company and avoid the possibility of
using outdated information simply because a daily import has not taken place yet.
NOTE: Multi-Level Overlays only affects nutrient information and has no effect on pricing or
other plant information in the system.
The following picture offers an example of how Multi-Level Overlays might be set up within a
business structure.
Nutrient
information can be
changed at any
level of the
organization.
Changes flow
down to the
subsequent levels
without having to
conduct a series of
imports and
exports
(modification of
information occurs
instantaneously).
How Multi-Level Overlays Work

When you are developing a hierarchy, you start with a true ―base‖ plant from which you
draw your initial ingredient nutrient information and Formula Specifications. Then you add
plant overlays that alter some, none or all nutrient information in the overlay. You can
then add subsequent overlays that then alter some, none or all of those changes. When
you have completed adding overlay information (up to a maximum of 10 levels), then the
system utilizes the new ―virtual base‖ plant as the basis for the base plant in Brill
Formulation. Once that ―virtual base‖ plant is generated, other overlay information
(nutrient, pricing, etc.) is used as the system has typically been used. The Multi-Level
Overlays only affects what comprises the ―virtual base‖ plant used as the basis for the
Current Plant set in the footer of the main window.
The Brill Formulation system uses the Current Plant as the starting point at which the
system derives its initial values to be used by the system. The Current Plant may be
simply a stand-alone plant with no Multi-Level Overlays or it may be a plant that is the
fourth plant in a hierarchy of Multi-Level Overlays. What happens is that the ingredient
information and formula spec information is read in a top-down hierarchical format (as
layers change data, the information is stored at that level) until it reaches the plant set in
the Current Plant field. The ingredient and formula spec values at that point are the values
then used by the system. The use of Multi-Level Overlays simply allows you to select a
plant in the hierarchy and use the values at that point in the hierarchy of your overlay
plants to determine the starting point values for use in Brill Formulation.
Let‘s begin with first determining the hierarchy you want used for your Multi-Level
Overlays to arrive at your ―virtual base‖ plant. With the proper security file settings with
Multi-Level Overlays enabled, click the Edit menu and select Plants and the Plant
Structure Maintenance window appears (see picture below).
When the window initially appears, all plants are displayed at the Base Level. There is no
hierarchy assigned to the plants. It is in this window that you may add, delete, edit or
alter the hierarchy of the plant structure for Multi-Level Plants. The following graphic
displays a tree-view of a designed hierarchy to the Multi-Level Overlays.
As you can see in the preceding graphic, there is a plant with Plant Code ―BASE‖ and a
description of ―FMS Base Plant‖ that serves as the ―root level‖ of a hierarchy of plants. As an
example, this may serve as a corporate base from which all overlays are applied. In this
example, there are two regional plants ―EAST‖ (FMS Production Plant East) and ―EASTP‖
(FMS Pricing Plant East) where each of these plant‘s nutrient and formula specifications are
used as overlays of the ―BASE‖ plant. In this example, any modifications to nutrient
information that exists in the BASE plant also affects the EAST and EASTP plants. There may
be regional differences in nutrient information that your corporate entities may want to
include related to formula specifications and nutrient information. These modifications may
be made to the EAST and EASTP plants. This enables the core of your nutrient and formula
specification information to be defined at the BASE plant level and have regional variations
made without having to import and export nutrient and formula specification information
from plant to plant to achieve the regional differences desired.
Now, in this example there is another layer of information that allows modifications to
nutrient and formula specifications. There may be plants within a region that also have
differing nutrient and formula spec information at the plant level. These modifications may
also be maintained by creating another level, as demonstrated by the ―EAST‖ and ―EASTP‖
plants. If there are differences in nutrient and formula spec information between these two
plants, you may make these modifications in each of the plants that are built upon the
―BASE‖ plant, which is then modified by the ―EAST‖ plant and then is finally modified by the
―EAST‖ plant. This hierarchy allows you to make the modifications through the use of layers
instead of constantly importing and exporting these modifications from plant to plant.
Here is a graphical way to interpret how nutrient information is modified through the use
of the Multi-Level Overlays:
In the above example, the ―Base‖ plant is the ―starting point‖ of all nutrient and formula
specification information. Plant 1 and Plant 3 take the ―Base‖ plant information and if there
are modifications made in Plant 1 or Plant 3, then those changes are then made to the
new ―virtual base‖ plant and can then be used by Brill Formulation if you select Plant 1 or
Plant 3 as the Current Plant (defined on the main window).
However, you can take that new ―virtual base‖ plant information and apply another layer
of changes, as seen in Plant 2 and Plant 4. Plant 2 takes the new ―virtual base‖ plant
information of Plant 1 and applies any modifications in nutrient or formula specification
information and applies those changes and another new ―virtual base‖ plant is generated
as Plant 2. The same occurs for Plant 4.
Here is a table displaying how the information is managed:
Read Process of Plant 2 and Plant 4 (read process of plant 1 and plant 3 stay the same as current)
Nut1 Nut2 Nut3 Nut4
1 10.5 3 4.6  Base
- - 3.2 5.4  Plant 1 Overlay
1 10.5 3.2 5.4  Becomes Virtual Base for Plant 2
- 11 - 5.6  Plant 2 Overlay
1 11 3.2 5.6  Record Returned to User
Plant 2 overlay compare

Nut1 Virtual Base 1
Nut2 Virtual Base 1
Plant 2
Nut3 Virtual Base 1
Nut4 Virtual Base 1
Plant 2
Depending upon the ―virtual base‖ plant you select, different information is returned to the
user when the ―virtual base‖ plant is used. In the preceding graphic, the hierarchy is the
same as the graphic with the ―Base,‖ ―Plant 1,‖ Plant 2,‖ Plant 3,‖ ―Plant 4‖ plants
indicated. The base plant has four nutrients: Nut1, Nut2, Nut3, and Nut4. The values are
as indicated in the table.
Now, when you select Plant 1 as your ―virtual base‖ plant and set the Current Plant field on
the main window to the same plant, the values for the nutrients are as follow:
Nut1 = 1
Nut2 = 10.5
Nut3 = 3.2
Nut4 = 5.4
As you can see, the originating ―Base‖ plant‘s values for Nut3 and Nut4 are replaced with
the Plant1 values. Plant 1 did not change the values for Nut1 and Nut2, so they remain
unchanged in the new ―virtual base‖ plant when Plant 1 is selected as the Current Plant in
the footer of the main window.
Now, let‘s select Plant 2 as the ―virtual base‖ plant and set the Current Plant field on the
main window to ―Plant 2‖. The initial ―virtual base‖ nutrient values are:
Nut1 = 1
Nut2 = 11
Nut3 = 3.2
Nut4 = 5.6
As you can see, neither the Plant 1 overlay nor the Plant 2 overlay altered the nutrient
value for Nut1 and so it remained 1. The value for Nut2 started out as 10.5 in the Base
plant, it was not changed by the Plant 1 overlay, but was changed by the Plant 2 overlay
to 10.5. So, when the virtual plant returned its initial value, it was 11.
Nut3 was set at 3 in the Base plant but was changed to 3.2 in the Plant 1 overlay and was
not changed again in the Plant 2 overlay, so the value returned as the ―virtual base‖ plant
as defined in the footer of the main window was 3.2.
Nut4 was set at 4.6 in the Base plant and it was changed to 5.4 in the Plant 1 overlay. It
was changed a second time to 5.6 in the Plant 2 overlay. So, when the system returns the
value for Nut4 with the new ―virtual base‖ plant, Nut4 has the value of 5.6.
As you can see, it is the last changed value that is returned as the ―virtual base‖ value.
The hierarchy of the Multi-Level Overlays determines the order in which the changes are
applied to the values within the system. Now, please note that these changes are applied
when the plant is defined as the Current Plant in the footer of the main window. If you
select Plant 1 as the Current Plant, then the overlay values of Plant 2 do not come into
play, despite the changes being entered as overlays, but those overlays are defined to be
made after the changes for Plant 1. If you stop the layering of changes with Plant 1, then
those are the values returned.
Setting up Multi-Level Overlays

Once you have a good understanding of how Multi-Level Overlays operate, you can define
your system. The following details how to set up and define your hierarchy. Let‘s begin
with the operation of the Plant Structure Maintenance window that appears when you click
the Edit menu and select Plants. A window similar to the following graphic appears.
As described earlier in this manual, this is how the plant hierarchy should appear the first
time you enter the Plant Structure Maintenance window after you enable Multi-Level
Overlays. All existing plants are displayed at the Base Level as shown in the previous
graphic. The following functions of the window are: Add New Plant Under Selected Plant;
Edit/ View Selected Plant; Delete Selected Plant; Save Hierarchy Changes and Exit; and
Cancel the current operation.
The following instructions detail how to configure your Plant Structure Maintenance
window to any configuration of your choosing to develop your plant overlay hierarchy. The
hierarchy is the only manipulation that occurs in this first Plant Maintenance window. The
following graphic simply displays one configuration for the hierarchy of your plants of the
virtually unlimited possibilities.
You have the ability to configure your Multi-Level Overlays in many different configurations.
Use the following instructions about how to make changes to your system. Keep in mind
that you must first determine the hierarchy and then use this window to implement that
hierarchy.
Adding a New Plant Under an Existing Plant

To create a new plant and place it directly in its proper hierarchical place:
1. Click the plant under which you want the new plant created (for example, if
you want to create a new plant under the base level, click Base Level).
2. Click + . A blank Plant Maintenance window appears and the first available
field is the ―New Plant Code‖ field.
Tip: You can also right click on the window and select Add New Plant
Under Selected Plant to display the Plant Maintenance window.
3. Enter a new code and then press ENTER. The new plant is created.
4. Continue to fill out the remaining plant information (Plant Name, Virtual Base
Name, Alternate Plant, and formula spec. check box).
5. Once you have then created and saved the new plant information, click to 
save your changes and return to the Plant Structure Maintenance window.
Editing a Plant
To open the Plant Maintenance window for a specific plant:
1. Click on the plant you want to edit, and then click . The Plant
Maintenance window for the selected plant is displayed, which allows you to
change the Plant Code, Plant Name, Virtual Base Name, Alternate Plant Code,
or the check box for formula specifications.
2. Once you have completed any necessary changes in a plant, click . The
changes you made are saved and the window closes. You are then returned to
the Plant Structure Maintenance window with the hierarchy displayed.
Deleting a Plant
Only plants without ―child‖ plants may be deleted. To delete a plant:
1. Click on the plant you want to delete. The red ―Delete Selected Plant‖ button is
enabled.
NOTE: If the red ―Delete Selected Plant‖ button is not enabled when you click
on the plant, the plant cannot be deleted. If child plants exist, delete
the child plants. Then, you should be able to remove the plant.
2. Click . A confirmation window appears and identifies the plant you are
attempting to delete.
3. To continue to delete the plant, click Yes. The plant is then deleted and you
are then returned to the Plant Structure Maintenance window with the
hierarchy displayed. The previously selected plant has been deleted and
removed from the tree-view display of the plants.
Conversion to Multi-Level Overlays

When considering the use of Multi-Level Overlays from a multiple-system operation you
must consider the following information. The typical conversion is one in which users are
operating separate Brill Formulation systems and that each database is updated through the
use of exports and imports up and down the hierarchy of your corporate structure. Through
the use of Multi-Level Overlays you can bring each of these ―layers‖ of information into a
single database and manage the hierarchical modifications within a single data set.
The following process basically exports the necessary information from each of the
separate data sets at each of the desired levels into a single data set that allows the
modification of each level of your operations through the Multi-Level Overlays. To avoid
confusion, the following process details the export of information from two separate
systems that are at different hierarchical points in a given system and the import of that
information into a single system, but with hierarchical management of nutrient and
formula specification information. To create additional overlays and a more expanded
hierarchy, simply repeat the process for each additional system to be imported into the
Multi-Level Overlays system. With each additional export and import you may create an
additional Multi-Level Overlay plant.
CAUTION: As with any process involving manipulation of your data sets, please be sure to
make a backup of your data sets and verify the validity of those backups
before proceeding with the following procedures. It may seem time consuming
to make and validate your data sets, but this task is immeasurably beneficial if
a data set corruption occurs.
Overview
Briefly, the data merge process to create your new two-level two-plant system is:
1. Create new blank Brill Formulation system.
2. Create plants and plant hierarchy in new system.
3. Export necessary base plant information from existing stand-alone system.
4. Import base plant information into new base plant in new system. (Hierarchy
defined in Step 2.)
5. Export necessary regional plant information from existing stand-alone system.
6. Import regional plant information into new regional plant in new system.
(Hierarchy defined in Step 2.)
7. System is now ready for Multi-Level Overlay use.
Detailed Process
When you begin the process of converting from multiple data sets to a single data
set, you must first create a blank Brill Formulation data set. Once the blank data set
is generated, you then create additional blank plants in a hierarchical structure you
want used. The complete structure need not exist, but the plant must exist in the
new data set before you import an existing stand-alone system into your newly
created data set.
NOTE: All exports detailed here assume that the necessary translation tables are
selected. It is recommended that translations be done during the export
process. Another recommendation is to copy the Configuration.ini from one
regional data set to the new Multi-Level Overlay data set.
This process assumes that an empty data set has been created to build the
converted data set.
1. Export Nutrients from current base data set.
2. Export Plant Definitions from current base data set.
3. Export Species Codes from current base data set.

4. Export Miscellaneous System Level Items from base data set.
5. Import the above data into the new Multi-Level Overlay base data set.
6. Create new ―virtual base‖ plants in the Multi-Level Overlay base data set. (In
this example we are creating only one additional plant, however you may
create as many as needed for your other stand-alone data sets.)
7. Create the plant hierarchy for the Multi-Level Overlay data set.
8. Export Base Ingredients from stand-alone plant that will become the
―Overlay Plant.‖ When exporting Base Ingredients be sure to export to the
―Overlay Plant‖ defined in the new data set and use the ―Overlay Plant‖ code
defined in Step 6.
9. Import the data from Step 8 into the new Multi-Level Overlay data set.
10. Export Global Equations and Ingredient Equations from the stand-along plant
that will become the ―Overlay Plant.‖
12. Export the Base Spec Plant information. When exporting Base Spec Plant
information be sure to export to the ―Overlay Plant‖ defined in the new data
set and use the ―Overlay Plant‖ code defined in Step 6.
When doing this import please be sure to select the Do Not Overwrite
Existing Ings/Specs option.
14. Export All of The Plant for every plant. (This includes plants that are pricing
plants only.)
16. Export the Mill Mix Setup Data for each plant.
18. Export the Ingredient Linking Specifications.
Once you have completed the preceding exports and imports, you should then
verify the data set and inspect your new system to determine if all imports and
exports were performed as expected. Also, please be sure to validate that the
expected modifications to the various levels of your new Multi-Level Overlays
operate as expected.
If you have any difficulties in performing this merge of data, please contact your
Brill Formulation customer support specialist.
Chapter 2: Nutrients
The Nutrients option allows you to add, change, and remove nutrients.
Tips:
Before setting up Nutrients for the first time, we recommend that you spend some time
determining the order you want them to appear. For example, Nutrients could be
organized alphabetically or by order of appearance (moisture, dry matter, etc).
You may want to consider leaving 1 or 2 (or more) blank codes between codes that are
assigned a name and nutrient values so that if you need to add additional nutrients you do
not need to completely reorganize the list (which can be time consuming).
All reports are generated in code number order.
Adding/Changing Nutrients
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Nutrients. The Nutrient Maintenance
window appears (see picture below).
2. Enter information in each of the following columns as necessary:

Tips:
To add a nutrient, begin on a blank line and enter the nutrient information as
described in the following table.
To change a nutrient, change the information as described in the following table.
To remove a nutrient, remove the information from each column within the line.
Column: Description:
Number This column displays the nutrient code. This field cannot be changed.
Name Enter the nutrient name.
Short Name Enter the short name.
Abbr. Name Enter the abbreviated name.
Units Enter the applicable unit of measure. Nutrients are typically defined in
percent or some unit of measure per weight unit (ex. IU/gm or ppm).
Factor Click the cell and select one of the following options:
Actual
Percent
Ratio
Inverse (used for a bulk density value or other non-linear
nutrients)
NOTE: For medicated nutrients only: If the nutrient is measured in
units that are based upon percentages, the Factor must be set
to ―Actual‖. If this factor is not set to Actual, tags will not be
generated correctly.
Decimals Click this cell and select the number of places to the right of the decimal
point you want to display for this nutrient. The maximum is 4.
Ratio #1 These columns allow you to enter a ratio (for example: 7 parts calcium to
2 parts phosphorus).
Ratio #2
To enter a ratio, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that both nutrients involved in the ratio are using the
same units. For example, if you are creating a ratio between calcium
and phosphorus, and the Units column for Calcium is set to ―Percent‖
then Phosphorus must also be set to ―Percent‖.
2. Create a new nutrient to describe the ratio. Example: Cal:Phos
3. In the Ratio #1 column of the new nutrient, enter the nutrient
number of the first nutrient (in this example, you would enter the
nutrient number for calcium).
4. In the Ratio #2 column, enter the nutrient value for the second
nutrient (in this example, you would enter the nutrient number for
phosphorus).
The following picture shows how the calcium to phosphorus example
would look when entered on the Nutrient Maintenance window (the
highlighting has been added to help you find the applicable
nutrients):
The ratio has been set up and the new nutrient containing the ratio can
now be used in formula specifications where the actual ratio (7 to 2) is
assigned. To use the ratio in a formula specification:
1. Return to the main window. Then, click the Edit menu and select
Formula Specifications.
2. In the Code field, enter the code for the formula specification that
will use the new ratio (or, you can look up the code by clicking ).
3. Click to display nutrients.

4. Add the nutrient by completing the following steps:
a. Right-click on the table and select Add Row(s).
b. Click on the nutrient you want to add, and then click .

c. Divide the value of the first ingredient by the value of the second
ingredient and enter that value in both the Minimum and
Maximum columns. For example, if you want to create a ratio of
7 parts calcium to 2 parts phosphorus you would enter 3.5
(7÷2 = 3.5) in both the Minimum and Maximum columns.
d. When you‘ve finished making changes to the formula
specification click .
Removing Nutrients
CAUTION: We do not recommend removing nutrients unless absolutely necessary. Please
contact a Brill Formulation customer support specialist to discuss potential issues
before you attempt to remove nutrients.
If the nutrient has not been used in ingredients, formula specifications, or stored formulas,
you can remove nutrient information as follows:
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Nutrients. The Nutrient Maintenance
window appears.
2. For the nutrient you want to remove, clear the information in each column.
CAUTION:
The actual nutrient code cannot be removed.
If the nutrient you are removing is being used within ingredients, formulas, and
stored formulas, that nutrient code will still be available. While the information
remains cleared, it will have no affect on the actual formula; however, if the code
is reused at some point your ingredients, formula specifications, and stored

formulas may be inaccurate. You can remove the nutrient from formula
specifications entirely by using the Formula Bulk Change/Replace feature;
however, you cannot remove nutrients from ingredients. Please contact a Brill
Formulation customer support specialist for assistance.
3. When you have finished removing nutrient information, click  to save your changes and
return to the main window.
Chapter 3: Species Maintenance

Species Codes
Species codes allow you to gather only the nutrient data specific to the animal species for
which you are formulating.
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Species Codes. The Species Code
Maintenance window appears (see picture below).
Nutrient codes and nutrient names

are displayed in these two columns.
To add nutrients, use the Nutrients
option (under the Edit menu).
Species codes are displayed along the top.

Tip: To view the name of a species code, click
on a check box under the column
heading. For example, if you want to
view the name of species code 1, click on
a check box in column 1. The name is
displayed at the bottom of the window.
NOTE: If, when displaying the name,
you added or removed a check
mark and did not want to, click
the box again to add/remove
the check mark as necessary.
2. For each nutrient, assign the nutrient to the appropriate species code by clicking the box
in the species column. For example, if you want the first nutrient assigned to all species
codes, you would click the box in each column (as in the following example).
Species Code Names

The Species Code Names option allows you to set up names for species codes. These names are
displayed on reports as well as other areas in the system when you need to select a species code.
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Species Codes Names. The Species
Code Name Maintenance window appears (see picture below).
2. To add or change a name, click the Name cell next to the code you want to add/change.
Then enter the species code name.
To remove a name, highlight the name you want to remove and press the DELETE key.
3. When you have finished making changes, click .

Chapter 4: Ingredient Maintenance

The Base Ingredient and Overlay Ingredient options allow you to change the nutrient values within
ingredients.
Base vs. Overlay

Within Brill Formulation, there are two types of ingredients:
Base ingredients – Base ingredients contain the base nutrient values. They are
available for all plants.
Overlay ingredients – Overlay ingredients allow you to specify unique nutrient values
for each production site.
Refer to each of the following sections for more detailed information.
Base Ingredient Maintenance
Creating a New Base Ingredient

1. Click the Edit menu and select Base Ingredient. The Ingredient Maintenance window
2. In the Code field, enter a new ingredient code number and then press ENTER. A new
box appears to verify that you want to create the new base ingredient.
Tip: The cursor must remain in the Code field when you press ENTER, otherwise, the
system will not recognize your request.
3. Select Yes. A table appears in the lower portion of the window (see picture below).
4. Enter information into each of the following fields:

Field: Description:
Name Enter the name of the ingredient (up to 36 characters).
Rounding Enter a rounding value if necessary. For example, in a major
ingredient such as corn, you may choose to round to 5 lbs. In a
minor ingredient, you might choose to round to .1 lbs.
Production Min Enter the minimum production amount. For example, if the
minimum amount of corn that the production site can produce is 5
pounds, enter 5 in this field.
NOTE: You must have the ―Use Production Minimums‖ option in
Foundation Utilities must be selected in order for this
minimum to be enforced when optimizing formulas. To
select this option, open Foundation Utilities, click the File
menu, select Edit Database Configuration, and then
click the Options tab.
5. For each nutrient in the table, enter the appropriate nutrient values in the Value
column.
NOTE: If you are using nutrient factoring, when you change the Value column you will
see a message stating ―The nutrient has factoring activated. Do you want to
factor?‖ Click No. (The factor is the new nutrient value divided by the old
nutrient value. On a new ingredient, there is no ―old‖ nutrient value to divide
by so there is nothing to factor. If you happen to click the Yes button, the
system will not factor the nutrient anyway. After the ingredient has been
saved, any time changes are made to that nutrient, you can select Yes and
the system will factor appropriately.)
Tips:
If Stochastics is active, columns will be available to update the mean and standard
deviation/variance data.
If a nutrient is set up as a ratio, do not enter an amount in the Value column
because the system will automatically calculate the value. (If you enter a value for
a nutrient that is set up as a ratio, the value for that nutrient is cleared when you
go to the next nutrient. When this window is closed (by clicking 

), the value is
calculated so the next time you view the ingredient the Value column will display
the calculated value.)
6. When you‘ve finished entering information, click .
Changing an Existing Base Ingredient

NOTE: Making changes to a base ingredient will affect any overlay ingredients associated
with it; however, making changes to an overlay ingredient will not affect the base
ingredient.
1. Click the Edit menu and select Base Ingredient. The Ingredient Maintenance window
appears.
In the Code field, enter the code you want to change and then press
ENTER (or, you can look up the code by clicking ). A table appears in
the lower portion of the window (see picture below).
When an
ingredient is
modified, the Date
is automatically
updated and the
version number is
increased by 1.
2. For each nutrient in the table, enter the appropriate nutrient values in the Value column.
Tips:
If you are using nutrient factoring, when you change the Value column you will see
a message stating ―The nutrient has factoring activated. Do you want to factor?‖
Click Yes to factor or click No to continue without factoring.

), the value is

Ingredient Overlay Maintenance
Overlay ingredients are ingredients that have been slightly modified from the original. Using
overlay ingredients, you can specify unique nutrient values for each production site.
For example, if your Base plant has an ingredient named Corn (#159), you might have a South
American plant with an overlay ingredient named ―Maize‖. The Maize overlay ingredient would
have the same nutrient number (#159), but it would have different nutrient values than the
base ingredient Corn. You might also have a Canadian plant that required unique nutrient
values.
Base Plant: This diagram shows one base ingredient

Corn (#159) that has two overlay ingredients.
South American Plant: Canadian Plant:

Maize (#159) Corn (#159)
You can also create up to 10 levels of overlay ingredients, called multi-level overlays.
Base Plant:
Corn (#159)
This diagram shows one base ingredient

South America – North Plant:
with two levels of overlay ingredients.
Maize (#159)
In this scenario, the company has two
South American plants. Their
ingredients will have some similarities,
but they still require differences in
South America – South Plant: nutrient values because they get maize
Maize (#159) from different locations.
Creating/Changing an Overlay Ingredient

NOTE: Making changes to an overlay ingredient will not affect the base ingredient.
1. On the main window, in the Current Plant field, enter the plant you want the
ingredient to be available to (or, you can look up the code by clicking ).
2. Click the Edit menu and select Overlay Ingredient. The Ingredient Maintenance
This window is very

similar to the window
that is used to create
and change base
ingredients.
The quickest way to
tell the difference is to
look at the plant
description. When you
are creating or
changing an overlay
ingredient, the
description is displayed
as ―Overlay Plant‖
followed by the plant
code. When you are
creating or changing a
base ingredient, the
description is displayed
as ―Plant‖ followed by
the plant code.
3. In the Code field, enter the base ingredient code number and then press ENTER. A
table appears in the lower portion of the window (see picture on the following page).
Tips:
The cursor must remain in the Code field when you press ENTER, otherwise, the
system will not recognize your request.
Usually, when you create a new overlay ingredient for a base ingredient, the base
ingredient already exists. If a base ingredient does not already exist, you can still
create the overlay ingredient by entering a new ingredient code in the Code field and
pressing ENTER. A new box appears to verify that you want to create the new base
ingredient. Click Yes. The system will create the overlay ingredient as well as a base
ingredient with the same code and name.
When adding or changing

overlay ingredients, the
Value, Mean, and STD/Var
columns are used for the
overlay ingredient.
When the values of the base
ingredient and the overlay The other columns (Base
ingredients are different, the Value, Base Mean, and
information in the Base Value Base STD/Var) are used to
column appears in red and display the values of the
the Value column contains base ingredient.
a changed symbol ( ).
If you make a change to the
amount in the Value column,
that amount is also red.

Field: Description:
Name Enter the name of the overlay ingredient (up to 36 characters).
Rounding Enter a rounding value if necessary. For example, in a major
ingredient such as corn, you may choose to round to 5 lbs. In a
minor ingredient, you might choose to round to .1 lbs.
Production Min Enter the minimum production amount. For example, if the
minimum amount of corn that the production site can produce is 5
pounds, enter 5 in this field.
NOTE: You must have the ―Use Production Minimums‖ option in
Foundation Utilities must be selected in order for this
minimum to be enforced when optimizing formulas. To
select this option, open Foundation Utilities, click the File
menu, select Edit Database Configuration, and then
click the Options tab.
5. For each nutrient in the table, enter the appropriate nutrient values in the Value column.
Tips:

), the value is

Chapter 5: Prices and Add-On Cost

Price Units
In Brill Formulation, ―price‖ refers to ingredient or formula cost (what you pay for an item).
Before you can set the price, you must set up the price units for both formulas and
ingredients.
Setting Price Units for Formulas

1. On the main window, click the Tools menu, point to System, and select Options.
2. Click the Cost tab.
3. Select one of the following options:
Formula Cost per Ton/Tonne.
Formula Cost per Batch.
Formula Cost per Lb./Kg.
4. Enter a factor in the Factor field as necessary.
5. Click  to save your changes and return to the main window.
Setting Price Units for Ingredients

By default, all ingredients are in cost per hundredweight (cwt); however, you can change
the price units for ingredients if necessary by completing the following steps:
1. Open Foundation Utilities, and log in with a user ID that allows "Super Only" functions
(making sure to select the appropriate database if you have the option to select more
than one).
2. Click the File menu and select Edit Database Configuration. The Default Data
Properties window appears with the General tab selected.
3. Click the Ingredient Pricing Units field and select a pricing unit.
4. Click  to save your changes and return to the main Foundation Utilities window.
5. Close Foundation Utilities. If Brill Formulation is open, close Brill Formulation (both
Maintenance and Optimization). The price units for ingredients have been set.
Prices
To price ingredients:
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Prices. A search window appears.
Tip: Depending on your system‘s settings, you may get a box that asks if you want to
edit ingredients with zero prices. Click Yes if you want to edit ingredients with a
price of zero, or click No if you do not want to edit ingredients with a price of zero.
To change your system settings for zero price ingredients, click the Tools menu,
point to System, and select Options. On the Setup tab, select one of the following
options: Always Edit Zero Price Ingredients, Never Edit Zero Price
Ingredients, or Prompt to Edit Zero Price Ingredients. (When either the Always
Edit Zero Price Ingredients option or the Never Edit Zero Price Ingredients option is
selected you will not be prompted after selecting the Prices option.)
2. Click on the plant(s) for the ingredients you want to edit. (You may choose up to 7 plants.)
3. Click . A new search window appears.

4. Click on each of the ingredients you want to price (or re-price).
Tips:
To select all ingredients, click .

Need to edit a category of items? Click the Range tab to use the range search. For
example, you may only want to edit your vitamin and mineral prices. If you have a
scheme to your ingredient code list, you could enter the range (such as 201- 299
for minerals and 151-199 for vitamins).
To save the list of selected plants, click . A new window appears, allowing you
to enter a name for this list of ingredients. Click the Save button. To recall this list
later, click .
5. Click . The Price Maintenance window appears (see picture on the following page).
Tip: You can add new ingredients to this list (without closing the window). Right-click on
the list and select Add New Ingredients.
Ingredients appear in a list with a

column for each plant selected.
To change the price of an ingredient,
click the Price column and enter a new
price. (Prices that have been changed
appear in red.) If your system is set to
force out of stock ingredients to
become infeasible, an ingredient will be
considered out of stock if the Price
column is blank and it will no longer be
available for formulations.
The S column allows you to indicate
whether the ingredient is in stock. To
change an ingredient from an in stock
status to an out of stock status, click
on the check mark to remove it. If your
system is set to force out of stock
ingredients to become infeasible, the
out of stock item will no longer be
available for formulations.
The fields in this area of the window display information about the currently selected
ingredient. (To select an ingredient, click on the Price column.)
The first row displays the following information:
First field (starting from the left): Displays the current base price of the
ingredient.
Second field: Displays the current add-on costs.
Third field: Displays the current total price.
Fourth field: Displays the difference from the previous price.
Fifth field: Displays the difference (as a percentage) from the previous price.
The second row displays the following information:
First field: Displays the previous base price of the ingredient.
Second field: Displays the previous add-on costs.
Third field: Displays the previous total price.
Fourth field: Displays the old previous total price.
The third row displays the following information:
First field: Displays the date of the last price modification.
Second field: Displays the units (To change price units: On the main window,
click the System menu and select Options. Then, click the Cost tab.)
Refer to the next section for more information about add-on costs.
Add-On Cost
The Add-On Cost Maintenance window allows you to enter add-on costs to ingredients (for
example, adding a processing charge to grains). Add-On Costs are plant and ingredient specific.
To add or change add-on costs:
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Add-On Cost. The Add-On Cost
Maintenance window appears, where you can enter additional charges for delivery,
bagging, processing, etc.
2. The plant that is currently selected is displayed in the Plant field. If necessary, enter a new
plant code, or click to select a code from a list.
3. In the Code field, enter the ingredient code (or, click to select a code from a list). The Add-
On Cost Maintenance list appears (see picture below). The first five rows in the list allow you
to add actual costs to your ingredient, such as $20 flat delivery fee per cwt. The sixth through
tenth lines allow you to add a percentage. The last five lines are reserved for percentage add-
on values (see picture below for examples).
4. In the Description column, enter a description of the add-on cost.
5. In the Value column, enter the value per ingredient unit.
NOTES:
Values are in units of cost as defined in the Ingredient Pricing Units field in Foundation
Utilities, Edit Database Configuration option (available under the File menu). Refer to
the ―Setting Price Units for Ingredients‖ section for more information.
Add-on values are calculated one at a time against the ingredient price and then
added. Shrinkage is measured as a percentage.
You may use multiple lines of Add-On Costs per ingredient.
Lines 1 through 5 are used for dollar values. For example:

Ingredient cost: $200.00
Add-On value: $5.00
Total cost: $200.00 + $5.00 = $205.00
Lines 6 through 10 are used for percentages. For example:

Add-On value: 1.00%
Add-On Dollars: (200 * (1.00/100)) = 2.00
Total cost: 200.00 + (200.00 * (1.00/100)) = $202.00
Lines 11 through 15 are used for percentage add-on values.

For example:
Add-On value: 1.00%
Add-On dollars: (200 / (1 – (1.00 / 100))) – 200 = 2.02
Total cost: 200.00 + 2.02 = $202.02
Tip: The following sample Ingredient Price report shows how multiple Add-On Costs are
calculated to determine the total cost for the ingredient.
6. When you've finished defining add-on costs, click  to save your changes and return to
the main window.
Plant to Plant Add-On Maintenance

You can use the Plant to Plant Add-on Maintenance option in combination with Ingredient
Linking to add the freight cost for shipping an ingredient from one plant to another.
To add or change plant-to-plant add-on maintenance costs:
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Plant to Plant Add-on
Maintenance. The Plant to Plant Add-On Maintenance window appears.
2. In the From Plant field, enter the plant code for the plant that will be the origination point
of the shipment and press ENTER (or, click to select a code from a list).
3. In the To Plant field, enter the plant code for the plant that will be the destination point of
the shipment and press ENTER (or, click to select a code from a list).
In the Code field, enter the ingredient code (or, click to select a code from a list). The
Add-On Cost Maintenance list appears. The first five rows in the list allow you to add
actual costs to your ingredient, such as $20 flat delivery fee per cwt. The sixth through
tenth lines allow you to add a percentage. The last five lines are reserved for percentage
add-on values (see picture on the next page for examples).
4. In the Description column, enter a description of the add-on cost.
5. In the Value column, enter the value per ingredient unit.
NOTES:
Values are in units of cost as defined in the Ingredient Pricing Units field in
Foundation Utilities, Edit Database Configuration option (available under the File
menu). Refer to the ―Setting Price Units for Ingredients‖ section for more
information.
Add-on values are calculated one at a time against the ingredient price and then
added. Shrinkage is measured as a percentage.
You may use multiple lines of Add-On Costs per plant.
Lines 1 through 5 are used for dollar values. For example:

Add-On value: $5.00
Total cost: $200.00 + $5.00 = $205.00
Lines 6 through 10 are used for percentages. For example:

Add-On value: 1.00%
Add-On Dollars: (200 * (1.00/100)) = 2.00
Total cost: 200.00 + (200.00 * (1.00/100)) = $202.00
Lines 11 through 15 are used for percentage add-on values.

For example:
Add-On value: 1.00%
Add-On dollars: (200 / (1 – (1.00 / 100))) – 200 = 2.02
Total cost: 200.00 + 2.02 = $202.02
6. When you've finished defining plant-to-plant add-on costs, click 

to save your changes
and return to the main window. The values are stored for any plant to plant transfers of
ingredients for which this amount is indicated.
Chapter 6: Global and Ingredient Equations
Global Equation
A global equation is a nutrient value that applies in all cases. For example: 100-
These are the N28 is the global equation for determining moisture percentage in an ingredient.
mathematical equivalents The equation means: 100 (or 100%) minus the value of nutrient code number 28
for writing equations: (which is dry matter). The resulting value is the moisture content. This value is
* = multiply calculated and displayed for nutrient code 76 Moisture based on this global
/ = divide equation.
- = subtract
+ = add Tips:
^2 = square
A nutrient calculated by a Global Equation cannot be used in an Ingredient
N = Nutrient
1/^2 = inverse square Equation.
^3 = cube There is a hierarchy for all equation calculations. Here is the sequence:
^4 = quad
^.5 = square root 1. Ingredient Equations calculate first. The results are stored in the data file.
() = parenthesis
2. Global Equations calculate next. The result of a Global Equation is not
You may use the following stored in the data file.
(singly or in combination)
when comparing nutrients 3. Ratio Nutrients calculate last. These are nutrients defined as ratios.
to values:
< (less than)
> (greater than)
= (equals)
<> (not equals)
For practice, you might want to try another equation. NFE equals 100 minus
(protein, fat, fiber, ash, and moisture). The steps would be:
1. Create nutrient NFE as a percent.
2. Create equation (up to 60 characters).
3. If you want to enter a condition, try protein is greater than zero.
Tips:
As you enter data into each field a drop-down button appears. Click on a
button when you need assistance entering the criteria for your equations.
Be sure the equation result is in the correct units for the nutrient being
calculated. If the nutrient is defined as actual, the result must be in units
per pound or kg. If the calculated nutrient is defined as a percentage, the
result must be also be a percentage.
Equation Order
The order of equations is extremely important because equations are calculated from the
top down. When you add an equation and want to move the equation between two
different equations, you simply change the Order number to a value that is after an
equation you want this one to follow and before an equation you want this one to precede.
Once you change the Order number, simply click the Re-Order Equations button located
at the bottom of the window. The equations are displayed in their new order and the Order
numbers are altered to reflect the proper order using whole numbers.
Ingredient Equation
An ingredient equation works similar to a global equation, except that it pertains only to one
ingredient. For example, some nutritionists prefer to calculate the amino acids from protein.
Conditions
Conditions may be placed on Ingredients. Most commonly, however, they are global. In
the following example, we will find the undigestible protein in an ingredient.
1. Create the nutrient ―Undigestible Protein‖. Since the other nutrients in the equation
will be percentages, this one must be as well.
2. Create the nutrient ―Equation‖.
Tips:
The Units column should either be blank or set to ―unit‖.
Set the factor field to Actual.
As you create equations, keep in mind that equations calculate from the top down.
3. Create the equation under Global equation and make it Conditional: this means only
ingredients with a value of 1 in nutrient number 74 will have the Undigestible Protein
calculated. To do this:
a. Enter the nutrient code 74 under Nutrient No.
b. Check the Conditional box.
c. In the Nutrient 1 field, enter the number of the nutrient to be conditional.
d. Enter the condition, and then the value. In this example, the condition is Equal,
and the value is 1.
e. Enter the equation to be performed in the equation field. In this example, we want
the difference between Crude Protein (nutrient code 10) and Digestible Protein
(nutrient code 11.)
f. Click .
Tips:
As you create equations, keep in mind that equations calculate from the top down.
Equations cannot be longer than 60 characters.
If your ingredient shows the value for the conditional equation without the condition
having been met, delete the values of the equation and the condition in the Ingredient
Maintenance window and then click .
Equation Order
The order of equations is extremely important because equations are calculated from the
top down. When you add an equation and want to move the equation between two
different equations, you simply change the Order number to a value that is after an
equation you want this one to follow and before an equation you want this one to precede
once you change the Order number, simply click the Re-Order Equations button located
at the bottom of the window. The equations are displayed in their new order and the Order
numbers are altered to reflect the proper order using whole numbers.
Chapter 7: Formula Specifications

Formula specifications are similar to the blue prints for a house. They are used to identify which
ingredients and nutrients should be used in a formula, define minimum and maximum amounts for
the ingredients and nutrients, allow you to set up swing constraints, etc. Then, the formula
specifications are used in Brill Formulation Optimization as a set of guidelines to create the actual
stored formula for production. (That is how the system can optimize a formula and create it at the
least cost and still maintain the quality and criteria determined within the specification.)
There are two ways to create a new formula specification.
Create a new formula specification
Copy an existing formula specification that is similar to the one you want to create, and
then modify it as necessary. (See Part 3, Chapter 4: Copy Formula Specification.)
NOTES:
For non-plant management systems: Before creating a formula specification, make
certain that the current plant (displayed in the Current Plant field on the main window) is
where you want the formula specification to reside. The plant must be set up to contain
formula specifications. Use the Plant Report (click the Plant menu and select Plant Report)
if you are unsure of the specification status of the plant. If you do not have the formula
specification in the correct plant, it will not be available when using the lookup list.
For plant management systems: All formula specifications are stored in the Base plant. Be
sure the current plant is set to the Base plant code before creating a new formula
specification. All formulas in the Base plant are available to all production plants.
Creating a New Formula Specification

To create a new formula specification:
1. On the main window click the Edit menu and select Formula Specifications. The
Formula Specification Maintenance window appears.
2. In the Code field, enter a code for the new formula (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) and
press ENTER. A message box appears.
3. Click Yes to create a new formula specification.
Field: Description:
Description Enter a description of the specification (up to 36 characters).
Batch Enter the batch weight (in pounds or kilos).
Species Click this field and select a species code from the list. This code will
determine which nutrients are available.
Tip: The Species Codes option (under the Edit menu) determines
which nutrients are assigned to each species code.
5. Add ingredients as follows:

a. In the Code column, enter the ingredient code you want to add (or, place your
cursor in the Code cell and click to select a code from the list).
b. In the Minimum and Maximum columns, enter the percentage of the ingredient
allowable per batch size.
When all ingredients have been added, your specification will look similar to the
following:
Tips:
If you want to add a special ingredient that doesn‘t exist in your ingredient
list, you must save your formula specification as is and go create your base
or overlay ingredient.
If you need to remove an ingredient, right-click on the ingredient you want
to remove and click Delete Selected Row(s).
If you need to change the formula specification pricing unit, see the ―Part
8: System, Chapter 2: Options section‖ for more information.)
Click this button to
toggle between
ingredients, nutrients,
and swing.
Or, click to view

ingredients and nutrients
on the same window.
NOTE: Swing is an
additional Use the last column
option that may to quickly identify
be purchased. out-of-stock
See the ―Swing‖ ingredients
section for (indicated by an ―O‖
additional in the column) or
information. ingredients that are
part of an ingredient
combination
(indicated by a ―C‖ in
the column.
Click this button to edit ingredient

combinations.
NOTE: In is an additional option
that may be purchased.
See the ―Ingredient
Combinations‖ for
additional information.
6. Add nutrients as follows:
a. If you are not already displaying the nutrients list, click to display nutrients.
b. In the Code column, enter the nutrient code you want to add (or, place your
cursor in the Code cell and click to select a code from the list).
c. In the Minimum and Maximum columns, enter the percentage of the nutrient
allowable per batch size.
7. Define swing and global swing as follows:

Swing is an additional option that may be purchased, which allows you to control how
quickly ingredients enter or leave formulas without violating the restrictions on the
formula specification. Swing can be defined at the formula level or at a system level.
Defining Swing at the Formula Level

To define swing for a formula specification:
a. Click to display swing.

b. For each ingredient, enter the low and high values as necessary. (The units are
the same as ingredient restrictions on the formula specification.)
Defining Swing at the Ingredient Level (Global swing)

Setting swing at the ingredient level will affect all formula specifications that use an
ingredient.
To define swing for an ingredient:
a. Open FMS Foundation Utilities.
b. Click the File menu and select Edit Database Configuration. The Database
Properties window appears.
c. Click the Swing tab.
d. Click the Swing Type field and click Default to Ingredient Restrictions. (This
means the swing limits are in the same units as ingredient restrictions on formula
specifications.)
e. In the Global Swing Low Nutrient field, enter the nutrient number you want to use.
f. In the Global Swing High Nutrient field, enter the nutrient number you want to use.
NOTE: These nutrients must have been previously defined in the Brill Formulation
Maintenance using the Nutrients option under the Edit menu.
g. Click  to save your changes.

h. Open Brill Formulation Maintenance. Then, click the Edit menu and select Base
Ingredients.
i. Enter the value for the Swing Low and Swing High nutrients on the selected
ingredients. These limits will apply to all formulas. If a formula specification has
swing limits for an ingredient, those limits will have priority over the Global swing
limits.
Ingredient Combinations
Ingredient Combinations is an optional module of Brill Formulation. If you are

interested in purchasing this option, or to learn more, contact your sales
representative.
The Ingredient Combinations option allows you to define another set of constraints in formula
specifications, whether they are in Formula Specifications Maintenance or in the Professional
Nutritionist option in Brill Formulation Optimization.
The following types of constraints may be defined:
Two ingredients are added according to a set ratio.
Example: For every 3 pounds of corn, you need 2 pounds of barley.
A combination of ingredients must make up a certain percentage of the ration.
Example: The amount of corn and barley together must be no less than 50 percent of
the ration.
Ingredient Combinations are described by algebraic equations that are created from the
desired ratios. Here are a few examples of how to set up ingredient combination groups:
Example 1:
For every 3 pounds of corn, you want 2 pounds of barley. You could set up the following ratio:
2 barley:3 corn or 1 barley:3/2 corn
In other words,
2 corn = 3 barley
Notice that the number in front of corn is switched with the number in front of barley. Think
about it this way: There is more corn than barley, so you'll have to multiply barley by the
higher number since the amount of barley is smaller to make it equal to corn. Two times the
amount of corn is the same as three times the amount of barley.
Since we don't care how much of the formula that the sum of barley and corn takes up, we
want both sides of this equation to equal zero. To do this, subtract the amount of barley from
both sides:
2 corn - 3 barley = 3 barley - 3 barley
2 corn - 3 barley = 0
values: corn: 2, barley: -3
Now that this equation is set up, we can fill in the values on the ingredient combinations
window:
Group 1
CORN 2
BARLEY -3
Fixed 0
NOTE: The Fixed cell must be set to zero.
Example 2:
You want 3 pounds of corn to 2 pounds of barley, but you want the corn and the barley
together to make up a minimum of 20 percent of the ration.
The ratio of corn to barley is the same as in Example 1, so we can still use 2 corn - 3 barley.
However, now we care about how much of the ration has these 2 ingredients. They must add
up to at least 20 percent of the ration. We would express this in this way:
2 corn - 3 barley 20
We would fill in the group values on the ingredient combinations window this way:
Group 1 Group 2
CORN 2 1
BARLEY -3 1
Minimum percent 20
Maximum percent
Fixed percent 0
Example 3:
You want the amount of dynamate to be at least twice as much as the amount of salt but no
more than five times the amount of salt. In other words:
2 salt <or= dynamate
5 salt >or= dynamate
This condition may be expressed with two different Groups:

Group 1: 2 salt - 1 dynamate <or= 0
Group 2: 5 salt - 1 dynamate >or= 0
Now fill in the ingredient combination fields:

Group 1 Group 2
SALT 2 5
DYNAMATE -1 -1
Minimum percent 0
Maximum percent 0
Fixed percent
Example 4:
You want an equal amount of wheat midds and rice mill feed, and the combination should be
at least 10 percent of the ration.
Group 1 Group 2
WHEAT MIDDS 1 1
RICE MILL FEED 1 -1
Minimum percent 10
Maximum percent
Fixed percent 0
Example 5:
You want an equal amount of wheat midds and rice mill feed, and the combination should be
no more than 20 percent of the ration.
Group 1 Group 2
WHEAT MIDDS 1 1
RICE MILL FEED 1 -1
Minimum percent
Maximum percent 20
Fixed percent 0
Entering Ingredient Combinations – Formula Specification

Maintenance
After you‘ve calculated the ingredient combination values, you can enter those values to a
formula specification by completing the following steps:
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Formula Specifications.
2. In the Code field, enter the formula specification code (or, click to select a code
from the list).
3. Click . The Ingredient Combinations window appears (see picture below).
All of the ingredients on

the previous window
appear in the left
column.
The three rows at the
bottom of the list are:
Minimum Percent,
Maximum Percent, and
Fixed Percent. They
describe what part of the
ration the group should
be. For example, if the
group should be at least
20 percent of the ration, There are 10 ―groups‖ that
the value 20 should go in may be defined. Each group
the minimum field for represents one restriction.
that group. However, if
the group describes a
ratio of one ingredient to
another, then there is a
possibility that such a
value could be zero.
4. Define the first group by completing the following steps:

a. In the ―1‖ column for the first ingredient enter the calculated value for the
ingredient. (To enter a negative value, enter a dash ( - ) before the number.)
b. Move the cursor to the next ingredient in this group and enter the calculated
value. Then, repeat the process for each ingredient in this group.
c. Move the cursor to the Minimum, Maximum, or Fixed cell and enter the
appropriate value.
5. Continue to define each additional group as necessary by completing the same process
you used to create the first group.
6. When all information is complete, click 

to save your changes and return to the
Formula Specification Maintenance window.
Entering Ingredient Combinations – Professional Nutritionist

After you‘ve calculated the ingredient combination values, you can enter those in
Professional Nutrition (within Brill Formulation Optimization) by completing the following
steps:
1. On the main window, click (on the toolbar). The Professional Nutritionist box
appears (see picture below):

Field: Description:
Plant Displays the plant. To change the plant, click to select a plant from
the list.
Tips:
This field cannot be blank – you must enter a plant code. The
Spec Plant and Pricing Plant fields may be left blank.
When both the Spec Plant and Pricing Plant fields are blank, this
field determines the source of the formula specification,
ingredient nutrients, and ingredient prices.
When the Spec Plant field contains a plant code and the Pricing
Plant field is blank, this field determines the source of ingredient
nutrients and ingredient prices. The Spec Plant field determines
the source of the formula specification.
When the Spec Plant field is blank and the Pricing Plant field
Field: Description:
contains a code, this field determines the source of the formula
specification and ingredient nutrients. The Pricing Plant is the
source of ingredient prices.
When all three plant fields (Plant, Spec Plant, and Pricing Plant)
contain a plant code, the Plant Code field determines the source
of ingredient nutrients. The Spec Plant field determines the
source of the formula specification. The Pricing Plant field
determines the source of ingredient prices.
Formula Displays the formula code. (See the ―Tips‖ in the Plant field description
Code for additional information.)
To change the formula code, click to select a code from the list.
Spec Displays the spec plant. (See the ―Tips‖ in the Plant field description for
Plant additional information.)
To change the plant, click to select a plant from the list.
Pricing Displays the pricing plant. (See the ―Tips‖ in the Plant field description
Plant for additional information.)
Formula Click this field and select one of the following options:
Source Formula Specifications
Stored Formulas
Combine formula specs into new formula
Archived Formula Specifications
Archived Formula with Archived Prices
3. Right-click on the table and select Edit Ingredient Combinations. The Ingredient
Combinations window appears (see picture below).
All of the ingredients on the

previous window appear in
the left column.
The three rows at the
bottom of the list are:
Minimum Percent, Maximum
Percent, and Fixed Percent.
They describe what part of
the ration the group should
be. For example, if the
group should be at least 20
percent of the ration, the
value 20 should go in the
minimum field for that There are 10 ―groups‖ that
group. However, if the group may be defined. Each group
describes a ratio of one represents one restriction.
ingredient to another, then
there is a possibility that
such a value could be zero.
4. Define the first group by completing the following steps:

a. In the ―1‖ column for the first ingredient enter the calculated value for the
ingredient. (To enter a negative value, enter a dash ( - ) before the number.)
b. Move the cursor to the next ingredient in this group and enter the calculated
value. Then, repeat the process for each ingredient in this group.
c. Move the cursor to the Minimum, Maximum or Fixed cell and enter the
appropriate value.
5. Continue to define each additional group as necessary by completing the same process
you used to create the first group.
6. When all information is complete, click  to save your changes.
Chapter 8: Stored Formulas

A stored formula (sometimes referred to as a production formula) is a formula specification that
has been optimized and saved. Stored formulas are unique to each plant.
To add/change stored formulas, complete the following steps:
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Stored Formulas. The Stored Formula
Maintenance window appears (see picture below), which can be used as a ―back door‖ to
entering known formulas into the system. Here, you also may change known formulas and
store the results simply by changing the actual amounts.
Tip: You can maximize or ―stretch‖ the window and use all available space as follows:
o To maximize the window, click (in the upper right corner of the window).
o To stretch the window to a desired size, place the cursor on any corner of the
window. When the cursor changes to an arrow, click and drag the window to the
desired size.
o To display more columns of information, click on the bar between ingredients and
nutrients and move it to the desired location
These fields display the
Cost When Stored, the
Current Cost, the Current
Batch Weight, and the
Dry Matter Factor. The
Dry Matter Factor can be
changed as follows:
1. Highlight the current
information.
2. Enter the new
information as
necessary, and then
press the TAB key.
Toggle to Dry Matter After entering a formula

When nutrients are displayed, code in the Code field,
the Toggle to Dry Matter the ingredient/nutrient
button allows you to display information is displayed
Stored Formula Report in this area.
values in the Value column as
Click this button to either As Fed or Dry Matter.
view/print a Stored
Formula report. (You can
select any template to
print the report.)

Field: Description:
Code This field contains the formula code.
Enter the formula code, or click to select a code from a list.
Description Displays a description of the formula (up to 36 characters).
To enter a new description, click this field and enter the new description.
Date Displays the date the formula was added/changed.
Version Displays the version number of the formula.
Batch Displays the batch size.
To change the batch size proportionally, click . Then, enter the new
batch size. The amounts are changed accordingly. (Amounts that are
changed appear in red.)
NOTE: You may change the batch size, however, if you edit batch amounts
and then need to restore the original values, you must close
without saving (click ) and then open the stored formula again.
Plant Displays the plant this formula is associated with.
Species Displays the species code and description. To change the code, click this
field and select a new code from the list.
After entering a code, the list of ingredients is displayed in a table with the following columns:
Tip: To view nutrient information for an ingredient, right-click on an ingredient and select
Ingredient Maintenance.
Code Displays the ingredient code.
To add an ingredient:
1. Click .
2. Right-click on the table and select Add Row(s).
3. Select a row from the list and then click 

. The ingredient is
added to the end of the list. (Use the up arrow key on your
keyboard to view scroll back up the list of ingredients.)
To delete an ingredient:
1. Select the row(s) you want to remove.
Tips:
To select a row, click to the left of the Code column.
To select multiple rows, press and hold the CTRL key and then
select each of the rows you want to delete.
2. Right-click on the table and select Delete Selected Row(s). The
Brill Formulation Maintenance window appears.
3. Click OK to delete the rows.
Description Displays a description of the ingredient. This field cannot be changed.
Actual Displays the actual amount of ingredient in the formula.
If you change the amount and then press the ENTER or TAB key, the
Percent column for the ingredient is automatically recalculated. The Cost
When Stored, Current Cost, and Current Batch Weight fields (displayed
above the list of ingredients) are also updated as necessary.
NOTE: The total amount of all ingredients should equal the amount in
the Batch Size field. Therefore, you may need to adjust
additional ingredients. If the formula is ordered when the total
amount of all ingredients does not equal the batch size, the
batch size remains the same, but the formula would be
proportionally reduced.
Percent Displays the percentage of ingredient in the formula.
If you change the percentage and then press the ENTER or TAB key, the
Amount column for the ingredient is automatically recalculated. The
Cost When Stored, Current Cost, and Current Batch Weight fields
(displayed above the list of ingredients) are also updated as necessary.
NOTE: The total amount of all ingredients should equal the amount in
the Batch Size field. Therefore, you may need to adjust
additional ingredients. If the formula is ordered when the total
percentage of all ingredients does not equal the batch size, the
batch size remains the same, but the formula would be
proportionally reduced.
Price Displays the price.
3. To add comments to the formula:
a. Click . The Formula Comments window appears.
b.  to save your changes and close the window.

Type your comments. Then, click
4. When you‘ve finished viewing/changing information, click  to save your changes and return
to the main window. (Click to close the window without saving changes.) You are
prompted to increment the version number when saving if the system options are set
correctly.
Chapter 9: Stored Formula Authorization

Formula Authorization allows you to manage stored formulas and prevent unauthorized changes
from being sent to production by granting or denying access to stored formulas.
Authorization is granted at the formula specification level. When a formula specification is authorized,
users can view formula specifications, make changes, optimize, save solutions, and save stored
formulas. If a formula specification is not authorized, users can still view formula specifications,
optimize formulas, and save solutions, but they will not be able to save the stored formula.
NOTE: Formula authorization is not determined by individual user IDs. If a formula is authorized,
it is authorized for all users who have access to the stored formulas.
Enabling the Stored Formula Authorization option

NOTE: For planning purposes keep in mind that when this option is enabled, all formulas are
defaulted to an unauthorized status. Therefore, you will need to authorize the formula
specifications before stored formulas can be saved.
To enable Stored Formula Authorization:

1. Open Foundation Utilities (click the Windows Start button, point to Programs, point to
Feed Management Systems, point to Brill Formulation, and click FMS Foundation
Utilities).
2. Log in with your user ID and password (making sure to select the appropriate database if
you have the option to select more than one).
3. Click the File menu and select Edit Database Configuration. The Properties window
appears.
4. Click the Options tab of the Properties window.
5. Scroll down the list until you locate the ―Enable Stored Formula Authorization‖ option.
6. Place a check mark in the check box next to this option.
7. Click  and the window closes.

8. You are returned to the FMS Foundation Utilities window.
9. Click the File menu and select Exit. The window closes.
10. Open Brill Formulation Maintenance, log into the altered database, and the feature is now
enabled. Three additional menu selections are added to the main window: Stored Formula
Authorization (under the Edit menu), Delete Stored Formula Authorizations (under the
Delete menu), and Stored Formula Authorizations Report (under the Reports menu).
To authorize formulas:
1. Click the Edit menu and select Stored Formula Authorization. The Stored Formula
Authorization window appears.
Field: Description:
Plant Displays the current plant. To change the plant, enter a new plant
code (or, click to select a plant from the list).
Effective Date Displays the current date.
If you want to automatically authorize the formulas on a date in the
future, enter the date in MM/DD/YYYY format. (Formulas will be
automatically authorized on this date.)
Expiration Date If you want the authorization to expire on a specific date, enter the
date in MM/DD/YYYY format. (Formulas will automatically be
unauthorized after this date unless changes are made to re-authorize
them.)
3. Click . A new window appears.

4. Select each of the formulas you want to authorize. Then, click 
. A Brill Formulation
Maintenance box appears to indicate that the formulas have been authorized.
5. Click OK to return to the Stored Formula Authorization window.
6. When you‘ve finished authorizing formulas, click to close the window.
Chapter 10: Edit Archive Comments

There may be times when you want to make changes to comments regarding your archived
versions of formulas. To change archive comments:
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Edit Archive Comments. The ―Select
formulas to change archiving comments‖ window appears (see picture below).
2. Click on each archived formula you want to change.
3. Once you have selected all of the formulas you want to change, click . The Change Desired
Archive Comments window appears (see picture below).
The formula code

is displayed to the
right of the title.
4. Change each of the following columns as necessary:

Ver Displays the version number for each archive of this particular formula.
Version numbers cannot be changed (the system automatically assigns
a version number when the formula is archived).
Description Displays a description for each archive of this particular formula. To
change the description, highlight the description you want to change
and enter a new description as necessary.
Date Displays the date and time the archived formula was created. This field
cannot be changed.
5. After you have made the desired changes, click  to save the changes.
If you selected only one archived formula, the window closes and you are returned to the main
Brill Formulation window.
If you selected more than one archived formula at the start of this process, the next Change
Desired Archive Comments window appears.
Tips:
If you selected a formula that does not have an archived formula version, a box
appears with a message to indicate that the formula does not have any archived
versions. Select OK. If multiple archived formulas were selected, the next window
appears. If you only selected one archived formula, or if there are no more, you are
returned to the main Brill Formulation window.
To cancel without saving changes, click . The window closes and no changes are
made to the archived formula‘s record. If multiple archived formulas were selected,
the next window appears. If you only selected one archived formula, or if there are no
more, you are returned to the main Brill Formulation window.
Chapter 11: Pellet Creation
Pellet Creation is an optional module of Brill Formulation. If you are interested in

purchasing this option, or to learn more, contact your sales representative.
Pellet Creation allows you to create a pellet formula from a group of ingredients within a stored
formula. The pellet, once mixed, is a package of ingredients that can be easily added to other
formula ingredients to create a final ration.
Creating a Pellet Formula

Pellet formulas are created by starting with a stored formula and then excluding ingredients
(in part or in whole) until you have the exact formula you want.
NOTE: The Pellet Creation option only sets up the codes for the base pellet formula, the base
pellet ingredient, and the production formula. The actual formulas are not created until
the original formula is optimized and stored. If the original optimized formula is not
stored, then these pellet formulas are not created. However, each time this formula is
optimized and stored, the pellet formulas are recreated to match the optimized
formula. Once these pellet formulas are created, they can be accessed with the codes
defined on the Pellet Creation window. The base pellet ingredient may be accessed
through the Base Ingredient Maintenance/Update option.
To create a pellet formula:

1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Pellet Creation. The Pellet Creation
window appears.
2. Click . The ―Select 1 or more Pellet records to be edited‖ window appears.
3. Click on each formula you want to select. Then, click .

Field: Description:
Base Pellet Enter a code for the base pellet formula (or, click to select a
Formula Code code from the list).
Tip: This code is for the pellet formula (the current formula
with the ―excluded‖ ingredients left out). You may want
to use the original formula code with the word ―BASE‖
attached to it so that it is easier to remember. For
example, formula 11 could have the Base Pellet Formula
Code of 11BASE.
Production Enter a code for the production pellet formula (or, click to
Formula Code select a code from the list).
Tip: This code is for the formula that includes both the pellet
formula and the excluded ingredients. It has the same
nutritional values as the original formula, but the
ingredients are listed as the pellet plus whatever was left
out of the pellet. The nutritional values are the same as
the original formula.
Alt Plant for If you want to save the cost information at a different plant,
Ingred. Cost enter the plant code (or, click to select a code from the list).
B.P. Ingredient Code Enter a code for the base pellet ingredient (or, click to select
a code from the list).
Tip: This code is for the pellet when it is stored as an
ingredient. You may want to use the original formula code
with an ―I‖ added to it. For example, formula 11 would
have a Base Pellet Ingredient Code of 11I.
Processing Charge If you want to specify an additional cost for the creation of the
pellet, enter that amount.
Plant for If you want to save the sum of the processing charge and the
Cost+Charge cost at a different plant, enter the plant code (or, click to
select a code from the list).
Save Ing. If you want to save the base pellet ingredient code as a base
To Base ingredient, click the Save Ing To Base option.
If you want to save the base pellet ingredient code as an overlay
ingredient, leave this option unselected.
Ingredients This list determines which ingredients (or what amount of
Excluded List specific ingredients) will be excluded from the pellet formula.
For each ingredient that needs to be excluded, enter the amount
you want to exclude as follows:
To exclude an ingredient, right-click on the Excluded
Amount column next to the ingredient you want to exclude.
Then, select Exclude All From Pellet.
To exclude a portion of an ingredient, enter the actual
amount you want to exclude (not a percentage) in the
Field: Description:
Excluded Amount column. For example, if you have 10 units
of limestone in your original formula and you want to have
eight units appear in your pellet formula, you would exclude
two units of limestone
Tips:
If you previously excluded an ingredient from the pellet
formula, and you decide want to include it, right-click on
the Excluded Amount column and select Do Not
Exclude from the Pellet, Put in the Pellet. The
ingredient will be included in the pellet formula.
If you have changed the exclusion amount on a
particular ingredient and you want it restored to its
original value, right-click on the Excluded Amount
column and select Restore Original Value. The original
amount is restored.
Tip: To copy pellet setup from another specification, click . The Select Formula Spec
window appears where you can select the formula specification code and plant you
want to copy the pellet setup from.
5. When you‘ve configured this set of pellet formulas in the manner you desire, and you are
ready to proceed to the next step of creating another set of pellet formulas, click . Or,
click to close the window.
Deleting a Pellet Creation Record

1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Pellet Creation. The Pellet Creation
window appears.
2. Click . The ―Select 1 or more Pellet records to be edited‖ window appears.
3. Click on the formula that contains the records you want to delete. Then, click .
4. Click . The Brill Formulation Maintenance window appears.
5. To delete the record, click Yes. (Clicking No or Cancel will close the window without
deleting the record.)
Chapter 12: Edit Margins

Information to be added at a later date.
Chapter 13: Log In As Another User

The Log In As Another User option allows you to log in using a different user name without having
to leave the system.
1. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Login as another user. The Brill
Formulation Login window appears (see picture below).

Field: Description:
User ID Enter your user ID (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) and press ENTER.
Tip: User IDs and passwords may be set up using FMS Foundation
Utilities.
Password Enter the password (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) and press ENTER.
The main window of Brill Formulation Maintenance appears.
Chapter 14: Exit

To close Brill Formulation Maintenance: On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Exit.
Part 3: Copy
The Copy menu on the main window of Brill Formulation allows you to copy ingredients, prices,
ingredient equations, formula specifications, stored formulas, archived formulas to production and
plants.
Tip: To copy several of these options (ingredients, prices, formula specifications, etc.) at once, use
the Copy Plant option.
Chapter 1: Ingredients
If you need to create a new ingredient that is identical or similar to another, you can save time by
using the Copy Ingredients option to copy information from one ingredient to another (rather than
creating one from scratch).
To copy an ingredient:
1. On the main window, click the Copy menu and select Ingredients.
2. In the ―Copy From‖ area, select either the Copy from base or Copy from overlay option.
The selected option appears in green.
Tip: Do not enter a code until all other selections have been made. Otherwise, the cursor will
move to the ―Copy To‖ area and you may have to cancel (click ) in order to enter the
information and make all selections as you intended.
3. If you selected the ―Copy from overlay‖ option and you want to copy the ingredient to a
different plant, click the Copy Plant to Plant option. A check mark appears to indicate the
option is selected.
4. Enter the ingredient code (or, click to select a code from a list). The information in the
―Copy From‖ area is disabled.
Tips:
To copy several ingredients at once, click . Then, click on each of the ingredients
you want to select and click .

To copy a range of ingredients (such as all minerals): Click . Click the Range tab
and enter the range of ingredients you want to copy. Then, click .
5. In the ―Copy To‖ area, enter information into each of the following fields:
Field/Option: Description:
Plant Code This field displays the plant to which information will be copied.
To select a different code, click . Click on the plant you want
to select and then click .

Ingredient Code Enter a new ingredient code (up to 8 characters).
New Name Enter a new name to distinguish it from the original.
New Rounding Factor Enter the rounding factor.
Copy Rounding Factor Select this option if you want to copy the rounding factor from
the original.
NOTE: This option is only available when the ―Copy from
overlay‖ option (in the ―Copy From‖ area) is selected.
New Production Minimum Enter the new production minimum amount.
Copy Production Mins Select this option if you want to copy the production minimums
from the original.
NOTE: This option is only available when the ―Copy from
overlay‖ option (in the ―Copy From‖ area) is selected.
Copy to Base Select this option if you want to make the new ingredient a base
ingredient.
NOTE: This option is not available when the ―Copy Plant to
Plant‖ option (in the ―Copy From‖ area) is selected.
Copy to Overlay Select this option if you want to make the new ingredient an
overlay.
Copy all overlays If the new ingredient is being copied to an overlay, select this
option if you want it copied to all overlays at all plants. (If you
do not select this option, it will copy to the overlays at the plant
specified in the Plant Code field.
6. When all information is complete click 

. If you selected more than one code, the
information is saved, and the ―Copy To‖ area is cleared. Complete the information in the ―Copy
To‖ area for the next code and repeat the process until all codes have been copied. (When all
codes have been copied, the cursor returns to the Code in the ―Copy From‖ area.)
7. When you‘ve finished copying information, click to close the window.
Chapter 2: Prices
The Prices option allows you to copy ingredient prices from one ingredient to another or from one
ingredient at a plant to the same ingredient at another plant. You may also copy the stock status
and price add-ons at the same time.
To copy prices:
1. On the main window, click the Copy menu and select Prices.
2. In the ―Copy From‖ area, click the Copy Plant to Plant option if you want to copy the
ingredient price to a different plant. A check mark appears to indicate the option is selected.
NOTE: You cannot copy a price from one ingredient to a different ingredient if the Copy Plant
to Plant option is selected.
Tip: If you want to copy to a different plant, do not enter a code until this selection has been
made. Otherwise, the cursor will move to the ―Copy To‖ area and you will need to cancel
(click ) in order to select this option.
3. Enter the ingredient code or click to select a code from the list. The information in the
―Copy From‖ area is disabled.
Tips:
To copy several ingredient prices at once, click . Then, click on each of the
ingredients you want to select and click .
To copy a range of ingredient prices (such as prices for all minerals): Click . Click
the Range tab and enter the range of ingredients you want to copy. Then, click .
Plant Code This field displays the plant to which information will be copied. To
select a different code, click . Click on the plant you want to select
and then click .

Ingredient Code This field contains the ingredient code to which the information will be
copied. If the ―Copy Plant to Plant‖ option is not selected, you may
enter an ingredient code in this field.
Copy Prices When selected, this option allows you to copy prices. This option is
selected by default. If you do not want to copy prices, click this option
to remove the check mark.
Copy stock status When selected, this option allows you to copy stock status. This option
is selected by default. If you do not want to copy stock status, click
this option to remove the check mark.
Copy price add-ons When selected, this option allows you to copy price add-ons. This
option is selected by default. If you do not want to copy stock status,
click this option to remove the check mark.

information is copied, and the ―Copy To‖ area is cleared. Complete the information in the
―Copy To‖ area for the next code and repeat the process until all codes have been copied.
(When all codes have been copied, the cursor returns to the Code in the ―Copy From‖ area.)
Chapter 3: Ingredient Equation

The Ingredient Equation option allows you to copy ingredient equations from one ingredient to
another. (Equations are stored at the root of an ingredient and are available at all plants.)
To copy equations:
1. On the main window, click the Copy menu and select Ingredient Equations.
2. In the ―Copy From‖ area, enter the ingredient code you want to copy from.
Tip: To search for a code, click . Then, click on each of the ingredients you want to select
and click .
3. In the ―Copy To‖ area, enter the ingredient code you to copy the equation code to.
4. Click  . If you selected more than one code, the information is copied, and the ―Copy To‖
area is cleared. Complete the information in the ―Copy To‖ area for the next code and repeat
the process until all codes have been copied. (When all codes have been copied, the cursor
returns to the Code in the ―Copy From‖ area.)

Copying a formula specification is similar to copying an ingredient. You are, in effect, using one
formula specification as a template for a new one.
To copy formula specifications:
1. On the main window, click the Copy menu and select Formula Specifications.
2. In the ―Copy From‖ area, select each of the following options as follows:
Option: Description:
Copy Plant to Plant Select this option if you want to copy the formula specification to a
different plant. A check mark appears to indicate the option is
selected.
Expand Includes Select this option if you want to copy formula includes with the
specification.
3. Enter the formula code you want to copy.
Tip: To search for a code, click . Then, click on each of the formula codes you want to
select and click .

Plant Code This field displays the plant to which information will be copied. If
necessary, enter a new code.
Formula Code Enter a new formula code (up to 8 characters).
New Batch Size Enter the batch size.
New Species Code Enter the species code.
Copy Comments Select this option if you want to copy the comments from the original.
Copy Ingredients Select this option if you want to copy the ingredients from the original.
Copy Nutrients Select this option if you want to copy the nutrients from the original.
Copy all overlays Select this option if you want to copy the production minimums from
the original.


You may copy a stored formula to another formula code in the same plant, or to a different plant.
To copy stored formulas:
1. On the main window, click the Copy menu and select Stored Formulas.
2. In the ―Copy From‖ area, click the Copy Plant to Plant option if you want to copy the stored
formula to a different plant. A check mark appears to indicate the option is selected.
3. Enter the formula code you want to copy.
Tip: To search for a code, click . Then, click on each of the stored formulas you want to
select and click .

Plant Code This field displays the plant to which information will be copied. If
Formula Code Enter a new formula code (up to 8 characters).
Copy Comments Select this option if you want to copy the comments from the original.

Chapter 6: Copy Archived Formulas to Production

To copy archived formulas to production:
1. On the main window, click the Copy menu and select Copy Archived Formulas to
Production. The Copy Archived Formulas to Production window appears.
2. Click on each formula that contains archived versions you want to copy, and then click .
The Select Archived Version window appears.
Tips:
To copy a range of archived formulas, click the Range tab and enter the range of
formula codes. Then, click .

To select all versions of the archived formula, click .
To remove all selections, click .
3. Click on each archived version you want to copy.
4. When all archived versions have been selected, click  to copy the archived formulas and
close the window.
Chapter 7: Copy Plant

The Copy Plant option allows you to copy prices, ingredients, specifications and/or stored formulas
from one plant to another in a single transfer.
To copy plant information:
1. On the main window, click the Copy menu and select Copy Plant.
2. Enter information as follows:
Source Plant This field displays the plant to which information will be copied. If
Destination Plant Enter the plant code you want to copy to.
Check to clear Select this option if you want to clear the destination plant
destination plant information before the information is copied.
before copy
Copy Prices Select this option if you want to copy ingredient prices.
Copy price Add-ons Select this option if you want to copy add-on costs.
Copy Ingredients Select this option if you want to copy ingredients.
Copy Specifications Select this option if you want to copy specifications.
Copy Stored Formulas Select this option if you want to copy stored formulas.
3. When all information is complete click .

4. If you selected the ―Check to clear destination plant before copy‖ option, a box appears to
confirm that you want to clear the destination plant. Click Yes to continue. (Clicking No
returns you to the Copy Plant window without clearing the destination plant or copying the
information.)
The copy is complete, the Copy Plant window is closed and you‘re returned to the main Brill
Formulation window.
Part 4: Delete
The Delete menu on the main Brill Formulation window allows you to delete ingredients, prices,
ingredient equations, formula specifications, stored formulas, stored formula authorizations, archived
formulas and plants.
This area is typically restricted by security access on User ID.
Chapter 1: Ingredients
To delete ingredients:
1. On the main window, verify that the correct plant is displayed in the Current Plant field.
(Select another plant if necessary.)
2. Click the Delete menu and select Ingredients.
3. Select each of the following options as follows:
NOTE: Do not enter an ingredient code until you‘ve considered whether these options should
be selected.
Prompt before Select this option if you want to be notified (with a message box)
each delete before each ingredient is deleted.
NOTE: If you do not select this option, the ingredients will be deleted
as soon as you enter a code and press ENTER, or as soon as
you select the ingredient(s) from the list and click 

. You
will not have the option to confirm whether you want to
delete the ingredient.
Base Ingredients Select this option if you are deleting a base ingredient and not an
overlay ingredient.
CAUTION: Do not delete a Base Ingredient until it has been
removed from all formula specifications and stored
formulas.
4. In the ―Code to delete‖ field, enter the code for the ingredient you want to delete, or click
to select a code from a list.
NOTES:
If you selected the ―Prompt before each delete‖ option:
A box appears to confirm that you want to delete the first selected ingredient. To
delete the ingredient and continue, click Yes.
If you selected more than one ingredient, a message box is displayed for each
ingredient you selected (to confirm that you want to delete the ingredient). Respond
to each message accordingly. When all ingredients have been deleted, the cursor
returns to the ―Code to delete‖ field.
If you did not select the ―Prompt before each delete‖ option, the ingredients are
deleted and the cursor returns to the ―Code to delete‖ field.
Tips:
To delete several ingredients at once, click . Then, click on each of the ingredients
you want to select and click .
To delete a range of ingredients (such as all minerals): Click . Click the Range tab
and enter the range of ingredients you want to delete. Then, click .
5. When you‘ve finished deleting ingredients, click to close the window.
Chapter 2: Prices
To delete prices:
2. Click the Delete menu and select Prices.
3. If you want to be notified (with a message box) before each ingredient price is deleted, click
the Prompt before each delete option.
NOTES:
Do not enter an ingredient code until you‘ve considered whether this option should be
selected.
If you do not select this option, the ingredient prices will be deleted as soon as you
enter a code and press ENTER, or as soon as you select the ingredient(s) from the list
and click . You will not have the option to confirm whether you want to delete the
ingredient prices.
4. In the ―Code to delete‖ field, enter the ingredient code, or click to select a code from a list.
NOTES:
A box appears to confirm that you want to delete prices for the first selected
ingredient. To delete the prices and continue, click Yes.
ingredient you selected (to confirm that you want to delete the prices). Respond to
each message accordingly. When prices for all ingredients have been deleted, the
cursor returns to the ―Code to delete‖ field.
If you did not select the ―Prompt before each delete‖ option, the prices are deleted and
the cursor returns to the ―Code to delete‖ field.
Tips:
To delete prices for several ingredients at once, click . Then, click on each of the

To delete prices for a range of ingredients (such as all minerals): Click . Click the
Range tab and enter the range of ingredients you want to delete. Then, click .
5. When you‘ve finished deleting ingredient prices, click to close the window.
Chapter 3: Ingredient Equations

To delete ingredient equations:
1. On the main window, click the Delete menu and select Ingredient Equations.
2. If you want to be notified (with a message box) before each ingredient equation is deleted,
click the Prompt before each delete option.
NOTES:
Do not enter an ingredient code until you‘ve considered whether this option should be
selected.
If you do not select this option, the ingredient equations will be deleted as soon as you
enter a code and press ENTER, or as soon as you select the ingredient(s) from the list
and click . You will not have the option to confirm whether you want to delete the
ingredient equations.
3. In the ―Code to delete‖ field, enter the ingredient code, or click to select a code from a list.
NOTES:
A box appears to confirm that you want to delete equations for the first selected
ingredient. To delete the equations and continue, click Yes.
ingredient you selected (to confirm that you want to delete the equations). Respond to
each message accordingly. When equations for all ingredients have been deleted, the
cursor returns to the ―Code to delete‖ field.
If you did not select the ―Prompt before each delete‖ option, the equations are deleted
and the cursor returns to the ―Code to delete‖ field.
Tips:
To delete equations for several ingredients at once, click . Then, click on each of the

To delete equations for a range of ingredients (such as all minerals): Click . Click
the Range tab and enter the range of ingredients you want to delete. Then, click .
4. When you‘ve finished deleting ingredient equations, click to close the window.

To delete formula specifications:
2. Click the Delete menu and select Formula Specifications.
3. If you want to be notified (with a message box) before each formula specification is deleted,
click the Prompt before each delete option.
NOTES:
Do not enter a code until you‘ve considered whether this option should be selected.
If you do not select this option, the formula specifications will be deleted as soon as
you enter a code and press ENTER, or as soon as you select the specifications from the
list and click . You will not have the option to confirm whether you want to delete
the spec.
4. In the ―Code to delete‖ field, enter the formula specification code, or click to select a code
from a list.
NOTES:
A box appears to confirm that you want to delete the first selected formula
specification. To delete the spec and continue, click Yes.
If you selected more than one code, a message box is displayed for each code you
selected (to confirm that you want to delete the specifications). Respond to each
message accordingly. When all formula specifications have been deleted, the cursor
returns to the ―Code to delete‖ field.
If you did not select the ―Prompt before each delete‖ option, the formula specifications
are deleted and the cursor returns to the ―Code to delete‖ field.
Tips:
To delete several formula specifications at once, click . Then, click on each of the
formula specifications you want to select and click .

To delete a range of formula specifications: Click . Click the Range tab and enter
the range of formula specifications you want to delete. Then, click .

5. When you‘ve finished deleting formula specifications, click to close the window.

To delete stored formulas:
2. Click the Delete menu and select Stored Formulas.
3. If you want to be notified (with a message box) before each stored formula is deleted, click
the Prompt before each delete option.
NOTES:
If you do not select this option, the stored formulas will be deleted as soon as you
enter a code and press ENTER, or as soon as you select the stored formulas from the
list and click 

. You will not have the option to confirm whether you want to delete
the stored formulas.
4. If you want to delete the archived versions of this formula, click the Delete Archived Formulas
option.
NOTE: The Delete Archived Formulas option will only delete the archived versions that are in the
current archive file - it will not delete archived versions from backup files.
5. In the ―Code to delete‖ field, enter the stored formula code, or click to select a code from a list.
NOTES:
A box appears to confirm that you want to delete the first selected stored formula. To
delete the stored formula and continue, click Yes.
selected (to confirm that you want to delete the stored formulas). Respond to each
message accordingly. When all stored formulas have been deleted, the cursor returns
to the ―Code to delete‖ field.
If you did not select the ―Prompt before each delete‖ option, the stored formulas are
deleted and the cursor returns to the ―Code to delete‖ field.
Tips:
To delete several stored formulas at once, click . Then, click on each of the stored
formulas you want to select and click .

To delete a range of stored formulas: Click . Click the Range tab and enter the
range of stored formulas you want to delete. Then, click .

6. When you‘ve finished deleting stored formulas, click to close the window.
Chapter 6: Delete Stored Formula Authorizations

When deleting stored formula authorizations, you have two options – you can delete all
authorizations that expire on a specific date, or you can select the authorizations you want to delete.
Refer to the following sections for instructions.
Deleting Authorizations That Expire on a Specific Date

NOTE: When you delete formula authorizations that expire on a specific date you will not
have the option to select specific formulas. Any formula authorization that expires on
the date you specify will be deleted.
1. On the main window, click the Delete menu and select Delete Stored Formula
Authorizations. The Delete Stored Formula Authorizations window appears.
2. The Plant field displays the currently selected plant. If you want to delete stored formula
authorizations from a different plant, enter the plant code or click to select a code from
a list.
3. Enter the date the authorization expires in the Expiration Date field.
4. Click  . The Brill Formulation Maintenance box appears to indicate that the formula
authorizations have been removed.
5. Click OK to return to the Delete Stored Formula Authorizations window.
6. When you‘ve finished deleting stored formula authorizations, click to close the window.
Deleting Specific Formula Authorizations

1. On the main window, click the Delete menu and select Delete Stored Formula
Authorizations. The Delete Stored Formula Authorizations window appears.
2. The Plant field displays the currently selected plant. If you want to delete stored formula
authorizations from a different plant, enter the plant code or click to select a code from
a list.
3. Leave the Expiration Date field blank, and click .

4. Select each of the formulas you want to remove authorization from. Then, click 
. A Brill
Formulation Maintenance box appears to indicate that the authorization for the selected
formulas has been removed.
5. Click OK to return to the Delete Stored Formula Authorizations window.
6. When you‘ve finished deleting stored formula authorizations, click to close the window.
Chapter 7: Archived Formulas

To delete archived formulas:
1. On the main window, click the Delete menu and select Delete Archived Formulas. The
Delete Archived Formula window appears.
2. Click on each formula that contains archived versions you want to delete, and then click .
The Select Archived Version window appears.
Tip: To delete a range of archived formulas, click the Range tab and enter the range of
formula codes. Then, click .

3. Click on each archived version you want to delete.
Tips:
To select all versions of the archived formula, click .
To remove all selections, click .
4. When all archived versions have been selected, click  to delete the archived formulas and
close the window.
Chapter 8: Plants
To delete plants:
1. On the main window, click the Delete menu and select Delete Plants.
2. If you want to be notified (with a message box) before each plant is deleted, click the Prompt
before each delete option.
NOTES:
If you do not select this option, the plants will be deleted as soon as you enter a code
and press ENTER, or as soon as you select the plants from the list and click . You
will not have the option to confirm whether you want to delete the plants.
3. In the ―Code to delete‖ field, enter the plant code, or click to select a code from a list.
NOTES:
A box appears to confirm that you want to delete the first plant. To delete the plant
and continue, click Yes.
selected (to confirm that you want to delete the plants). Respond to each message
accordingly. When all plants have been deleted, the cursor returns to the ―Code to
delete‖ field.
If you did not select the ―Prompt before each delete‖ option, the plants are deleted
and the cursor returns to the ―Code to delete‖ field.
Tips:
To delete several plants at once: Click . Then, click on each of the plants you want
to select and click .

To delete a range of plants: Click . Click the Range tab and enter the range of plant
codes you want to delete. Then, click .

4. When you‘ve finished deleting plants, click to close the window.
Part 5: Reports
This menu allows you to print reports.
Tip: Many of these options are available on the Reports toolbar on the main Brill Formulation window
(see picture below). To display the Reports toolbar, right-click anywhere on the toolbar or menu
bar areas and then select Reports.
Report: Description:
SmartLists SmartLists is an inquiry tool that allows you to view, export, and
print the data within Brill Formulation quickly and easily. You can
change the way the information is displayed to best suit your
needs, and then save your inquiry to use again later.
Plant Report This report gives you a list of plant codes and their associated
names. It also identifies whether the plant contains formula
specifications or whether an alternate plant is specified for pricing.
Nutrient Report This report gives you a quick snapshot of the settings for each
nutrient.
Tips:
The Type column on the report refers to Actual, Percent,
Ratio or Inverse.
The Ratio column displays any ratios you have created in a
nutrient.
Species Code Report This report shows which nutrients are assigned to a species code.
A list of species codes/descriptions are displayed for quick
reference at the top of the report. The body of the report displays
nutrients in a table indicating which species codes the nutrient is
assigned to.
Ingredient Report This report allows you to view a list of ingredients. You have the
option of viewing individual ingredients or an analysis of several
ingredients in a comparison format.
Ingredient Analysis Report This report allows you to see a nutrient analysis of the ingredients.
Ingredient Overlay This report provides various ways to compare the base ingredient
Compare Report nutrient values to overlay nutrients in different plants.
Equation Report This report allows you to view the equations associated with a
selected list of ingredients.
Ingredient Price Report This report provides various ways to view ingredients and prices.
Ingredient Price This report provides various ways to view ingredients and prices.
Comparison Report
Using the Previous Price Change Date field, you can create a
report as of a specific date (such as the date of the last price
change).
By default, the system automatically detects the date of the last
price change and enters that date in this field. If the price hasn't
changed since the date entered or selected, the Previous Price
Change Date field is set to the current date. If you do not want to
use this option, click this field and select None.
Tip: You can save the option you selected for the Previous Price
Change Date field in the template. (If you‘ve selected a
date, the date will not be saved with the template.)
NOTES:
Both Logging and Price Logging must be turned on to use
the Previous Price Change Date feature. (Logging options
may be set up in Foundation Utilities – click the File menu
and select Edit Database Configuration. Then, click the
Options tab. Both the ―Enable Logging‖ and ―Enable Price
Logging‖ options must be selected. A check mark next to
the option indicates that the option is selected.)
If an ingredient has a previous price, but no information
can be found in the log, the Previous Price Change Date
field will be set to the current price by default.
Formula Specifications This report allows you to view formula specifications information
Report including code, description, batch weight, issue date, control
number, a list of ingredients, and a list of nutrients.
Formula Specifications This report provides various ways to view and compare formula
Compare Report specifications.
Pellet Creation Record Report This report displays information for each pellet formula assigned
to the current plant.
Formula Locator Report This report may be used to search for formula specifications and
stored formulas.
If you are searching for a specific formula specification or stored
formula and you know the formula code, enter the code in the
Quick Code field. Then, click . If you don‘t know the specific
code, just click  to select the code(s) from a list.
The report is displayed – listing each of the plants associated with
the selected formula specifications/stored formulas, the version
and date stored.
Stored Formula Report This report allows you to print either of the following reports (by
clicking the drop-down field to the left of the Override Species
report on the Stored Formula Report window):
Stored Formula Report – This report displays a complete
breakdown of a given formula in the current plant. The Stored
Formula Report supports the exploding of premixes.
For formulas that are linked to other formulas and you have
formula comments activated the message: ―This formula is
linked to‖ is printed. The message then includes the plant and
code of the source formula.
Archived Report – This report displays a complete
breakdown for an archived version of the formula(s) you
select. This report can be generated based on your current
archive file, or a backed up version of the archive file.
To base the report on a backed-up version of the archive file:
1. Click to display the Report Template Properties

window.
2. Click the Sections/Options tab.
3. Click the Use Backup Archive File check box.
Stored Formula This report provides various options for determining where a
Authorization Report particular stored formula is authorized.
Click the Report Options field and select one of the following
options:
Plants where formula is authorized – This option
allows you to view a list of plants in which the selected
formula(s) may be used.
All formulas authorized at plant – This option allows
you to view a list of stored formulas that are authorized at
each selected plant.
Formulas that have or will expire – This option allows
you to display a list of formulas that either have expired or
will expire as of a specific date (entered in the Expiration
Date field).
For more detailed information about Stored Formula Authorization,
refer to ―Part 9 – Stored Formula Authorization.‖
Archive Compare Report This report allows you to compare archived versions of a formula.
View archived versions of a formula between several different
plants/formulas/versions as necessary.
This report is unique in that the standard Report window is not
displayed. Instead, the Formula Compare/Combine window allows
you to select the plant code, formula code, and version. When all
information has been selected, click  to view the report.
Formula Set Report This report displays the amount (in tons) of each formula in one or
two formula sets (MLS files). The "Amount 1" column displays the
amounts in file #1; "Amount 2" column displays the amounts in
file #2. If you choose the option to "Compare two formula sets"
then the Difference column will display the difference between the
two amounts (file 1 vs file 2). If the formula does not appear in
both files or the difference between the two amounts is zero, the
Difference will be displayed as blank.
Where Used Report This report allows you to display a list of stored formulas or
formula specifications that contain a particular ingredient.
For example: The protein for soybean meal has been changed at a
plant, and you want to find all the formulas that have more than a
selected level of soy meal to optimize. To do that you could create
a formula list in Brill Formulation Optimization, and then
view/print the Where Used Report. (The Create Formula List
creates an MLS file – formula set – of the formulas that meet the
user selection criteria. This formula set then can be optimized. )
In addition to the standard report options, this report contains
many additional options within the Sections/Options tab:
Tip: To view the Sections/Options tab, click .

All Formulas in All/ Select Plants – This option allows
you to search through all the formulas in any or all plants.
This is particularly useful when searching stored formulas.
Explode Premixes – This option allows you to include
ingredients that went into the premixes.
Linking Report This report allows you to view all plant-to-plant add on options at
each plant, as well as linked ingredient and linked formula
information (if applicable).
SmartLists
SmartLists Overview
SmartLists is an inquiry tool that allows you to view, export, and print the data within Brill
Formulation quickly and easily. You can change the way the information is displayed to best
suit your needs, and then save your search (as a Favorite) to use again later.
To open SmartLists, click the Reports menu and select SmartLists. The SmartList window
Each folder
represents a
category of
Favorites.
To display the list
favorites within the
category, click .
To hide the
favorites within a
category, click .
These are
Favorites. Search results are displayed in this area of the window.
Click on a Favorite Tip: Some categories have ―Go To‖ options that allow
to display the you to view additional information. For example,
results in the right if you click on a Favorite within the Ingredients
side of the window. category, you can double-click on a row to view
details within the Ingredient Maintenance
Favorites named window. Or you can select a row and then click
with an asterisk (*)
are default to see additional Go To options.
Favorites that
display all the
information
available within the
Favorite category.
Default Favorites
cannot be changed,
but they can be
used to instantly
create your own
customized
Favorite.
Tips:
You can adjust the width of a column by moving the pointer over the right border of
the column heading. When the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow, drag the
border to the desired position. You also can double-click the right border to
automatically adjust the column to fit its contents.
To sort the list based on a field, click the column heading you want to sort by. The list is
sorted in ascending order (indicated by an up arrow ). Clicking on the column heading
a second time will sort the list in descending order (indicated by a down arrow ).
Adding/Changing Favorites
To create a new Favorite, complete the following steps:
1. Start by creating a new set of search criteria (refer to the "Searching for information"
section for complete instructions).
2. Click the Favorites button. The Add or Remove Favorites window appears.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the new Favorite.
4. Click the Visible To field and select one of the following options:
System Select this option if you want the Favorite made available to all
system users.
<current user> This option displays the user ID that is currently logged in to the
system. Select this option if you want the Favorite made available
to only the current user ID.
5. Click the Add button to save the new favorite and return to the SmartList window. The
new Favorite is displayed in the list.
To change the search criteria of a Favorite, complete the following steps:

1. Click on the Favorite you want to change. Then, click the Search button and change the
search criteria as necessary (refer to the "Searching for information" section for complete
instructions).
2. Click the Favorites button. The Add or Remove Favorites window appears and the name
of the Favorite appears in the Name field.
3. Click the Visible To field and select one of the following options:
System Select this option if you want the Favorite made available to all
system users.
<current user> This option displays the user ID that is currently logged in to the
system. Select this option if you want the Favorite made available
to only the current user ID.
4. Click the Modify button to save the changes and return to the SmartList window.
Changing the Columns Displayed in Favorites

To change the columns displayed in the search results of a favorite, complete the following
steps:
1. On the SmartList window, select a Favorite. The search results are displayed on the right.
2. Click the Columns button.
The Change Columns Display window appears, which allows you to define which columns
of information are displayed in your search results.
Tip: There are many columns available; however, you do not need to display all columns
in the results. In fact, we recommend using as few columns as necessary to make
the results easier to read and understand. (You can always add additional columns, if
necessary.)
3. Remove any columns you do not want displayed in the search results by completing the
following steps:
a. Click on the column you want to remove.
b. Click the Remove button.
4. For any columns that remain, you can change the name (if necessary) by clicking on the
display name and entering a new name.
5. Add additional columns as necessary by completing the following steps:
a. Click the Add button. The Columns window appears.
b. Click on the column you want to add, or locate the column you want to search by
completing the following steps:
i. In the Find field, enter the name of the column you want to find.
ii. Click the Find button. The first column containing the words you entered is
highlighted. If the column you were searching for is highlighted, continue with
the next step. Otherwise, repeat steps a-b until you locate the column you
want to add.
Tips:
To select all columns, click the Select All button.
By default, all columns are displayed. To view only the available columns,
click the All Columns column heading and then select Available
Columns. The available columns are displayed.
c. Click OK.
6. When the columns you want to display in the final results appear in the list, move them
into the proper order using the arrow buttons on the right. (The order they appear here
will be the order of the columns when the results are displayed.)
7. When the columns appear as you want them to appear in the final results, click OK to
close the Change Column Display window.
Deleting Favorites
To delete favorites, complete the following steps:
1. On the SmartList window, in the left pane, select a favorite you want to delete.
2. Click the Favorites button. The Add or Remove Favorites window appears.
3. Click Remove. The FMS SmartLists window appears.
4. To delete the favorite, click Yes. The favorite is removed and the SmartList window
appears.
Searching for Information

To search for information, complete the following steps:
1. On the SmartList window, in the left pane, select the category (folder) of information you
want to search.
2. If you want to create a new search, click on the Favorite you want to use as a starting
point for the new search. Or, if you want to change the search criteria of a Favorite, click
on the Favorite you want to change. The search results are displayed in the right pane of
the window.
3. Click the Search button.
4. The Search window appears.
5. Enter information into each of the following fields to define your search criteria:
"Search Definition" Areas (1-4)
The "Search Definition" areas allow you to specify the criteria of your search. The system
will search by the criteria in the "Search Definition 1" area first, then the criteria in the
"Search Definition 2" area second, and so on.
Column Name Enter the column of information you want to search by:
1. Click . The Columns window appears.
2. Click on the column you want to search by, or locate the column
you want to search by completing the following steps:
a. In the Find field, enter the name of the column you want to
find.
b. Click the Find button. The first column containing the words
you entered is highlighted. If the column you were searching
for is highlighted, continue with the next step. Otherwise,
repeat steps a-b until you locate the column you want to
search by.
Tips:
To select all columns, click the Select All button.
By default, all columns are displayed. To view only
the available columns, click the All Columns column
heading and then select Available Columns. The
available columns are displayed.
3. Click OK.
Filter Click this field and select one of the following options:
Contains
Is Equal to
Begins with
Is between
Is not equal to
Is greater than
Is less than
Value Enter the value you are searching for within the selected column.
NOTE: When the Field Comparison option is selected, enter the
information you want to search for in both Value fields.
Field Comparison Select this option if you want to generate search results based on
comparisons of similar types of fields. For example, you can use field
comparisons to create searches that lists items for which the order
quantity available is smaller than the quantity that‘s been back
ordered.
Match Case Select this option if you want the search to be case-sensitive. For
example, if you are searching for "Corn Meal" and the Match Case
option is selected, any ingredients entered as "corn meal" or "Corn
meal" and so on, will not be considered a match.
"Search Options" Area

The "Search Options" area allows you to choose other searching options.
Field: Description:
Maximum Records This field allows you to limit the number of items returned by the
search.
Enter the maximum number of records you want the search to
return. When you view the results of the search, SmartList
compares the search criteria entered on this window to items in
work files, open files, and history files, and then returns the records
that most closely match the search criteria that you selected.
Plant Click this field to select a plant.
Search Type This field allows you to specify whether all or some of the search
definitions must be matched before matching result can be
displayed.
Click this field and select one of the following options:
Match All Select this option if you want to display only the
matches that meet all criteria (entered in the
Search Definition areas).
Match 1 or More Select this option if you want display matches
that meet at least one of the search criteria.
Pricing Plant(s) Click this field to select a pricing plant.
Tips:
To clear all fields in the "Search Definition" areas, click the Clear All button.
To change the columns that appear in the search results, click the Columns
button.
6. When all search criteria has been entered, click OK. The search results are displayed in
the right pane of the SmartList window.
7. SmartList will display only the records it found up to the maximum number of records you
specified in the Search window. If you stop a search before all records have been
displayed, SmartList will display only the records it found before the search was stopped.
Tips:
If you created a search that you will want to use often you can save it as a Favorite
(making it easily available for future use). Refer to the "Adding/Changing Favorites"
section for instructions.
The taskbar (at the bottom of the SmartList window) displays the status of the search
(Exploring or Complete) as well as the total number of records returned.
Creating Export Solutions

Export Solutions are basically a set of options that you can apply to your search results when
exporting to Excel. For example, if you've created an Excel template that you like to use for
reports, you can use that template when exporting search criteria to Excel. In addition, if
you've created macros, those macros can be run automatically before or after the search
results are exported to Excel.
To create export solutions:
1. On the SmartList window, click the Options button and select Export Solutions.
The Export Solutions window appears, which allows you to add, change and remove export
solutions (see picture below)
This area displays a list of

Export Solutions that have
already been created.
This area allows you to make the

Export Solution available to
Favorites.
You can select can select
individual Favorites or you can
select an entire category of
Favorites (making the Export
Solution available to all Favorites
within the category).

Field: Description:
Name Enter a name for the export solution.
Document Enter the path to the file containing the template that you want to use,
or click to locate the file.
Preparation Macro Enter the name of the preparation macro—that is, the macro that you
want to run before exporting to Excel. For example, you could use a
preparation macro to clear data out of a pivot table in Excel before
exporting.
Completion Macro Enter the name of the completion macro—that is, the macro that you
want to run after exporting to Excel.
Visible To Select the user that this export solution should be visible to.
Field: Description:
Application This field displays the application to export to (currently set to Excel
and cannot be changed).
Categories list Click the box next to each category and/or favorite that this export
solution is available to.
For example, if you want to use this export solution with all favorites in
the Solution Ingredients category, click the box next to the Solution
Ingredients category. When you select a favorite on the main window,
this solution is available by clicking on the Excel button.
3. Click the Save button to save the export solution. (The saved export solution appears in
the left pane.)
Tip: To create another solution, click the New button. All fields are cleared allowing you
to create a new solution.
4. To return to the main Brill Formulation window, click .
Deleting Export Solutions

To delete export solutions:
1. On the SmartList window, click the Options button and select Export Solutions.
The Export Solutions window appears, which allows you to add and remove export
solutions.
2. In the left pane, select the solution you want to delete.
Tip: You can select more than one solution by holding down the Ctrl key while you select
the solutions you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete button. The solution is removed from the left pane.
4. To return to the main Brill Formulation window, click .
Exporting Search Results to Excel

To export search results to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet:
1. Be sure that the results you want to export are displayed in the SmartList window. (You
can do this by either creating a new search or by clicking on a Favorite to display the
results in the right pane.)
2. If you have created an export solution to format your search results, click the Excel
button and select an export solution from the list. (The Quick Export option allows you to
generate a spreadsheet without using a specific export solution.)
3. If you have not created an export solution, click the Excel button to generate a
spreadsheet automatically using the standard Microsoft Excel template. Column names in
the spreadsheet or table correspond to column names in SmartList.
Tip: If you are not able to see the export solution you want to use, it may be because
that specific export solution has not been assigned to this category or Favorite.
Printing a Report
The process for printing any of the available reports is similar:
1. Click the Report menu and select the report you want to print. A new window appears similar
to the following:
If you want to This area allows you to print

preview the any messages, notes, or
report before comments you want to appear
printing it, on the report.
click the View Comments entered here will
Report On print just below the header and
The Screen above the report information.
option box.
To have the
window close
after the
report is
printed, click
the Close
after printing
option box.
Tips:
You can make additional changes to the report by clicking . The Report Template
Properties window appears, allowing you to change the report template settings. Prior
to printing a report, you may want to review options available on the Sections/Options
tab. The Sections/Options tab often contains several different options that allow you to
customize the information displayed on the report.
Additional options may be available depending on the report you selected. For more
information about a specific report, click here.
2. When all settings have been specified, click .
3. If you selected the ―View Report On the Screen‖ option, the report is displayed in a window
similar to the following:
Use the toolbar to view additional

pages, print the report, and
more. Refer to the following table
for more information.
Button: Description:
Printer Setup Brill Formulation uses the default printer setting in your
system. When you first open a report selection, the center of
the window will show a small yellow printer icon behind the
Current Printer heading. Select this to change your printer
setup. Your printer selection is displayed in the field below the
printer icon.
Close This button allows you to close the preview window and return
to the previous window.
Show/Hide Report Click this button to alternate between showing and hiding the
Guides report guides displayed on the screen. The guides display the
separate sections of the report, guide you to differing types of
data available in the report, and identify margins.
First Page Click this button to view the first page of a report that has
multiple pages. (If you are currently viewing the first page,
this button is disabled and cannot be used.)
Previous Page Click this button to view to the previous page of a multiple-
page report. (If you are currently viewing the first page, this
button is disabled and cannot be used.)
Next Page Click this button to view the next page of a multiple-page
report. (If you are currently viewing the last page, this button
is disabled and cannot be used.)
Last Page Click this button to view the last page of a multiple-page
report. If you are at the last page, this button appears gray on
the screen and cannot be used.
Magnify Report This button allows you to make the report appear larger or
smaller. Click this button and then select an option from the
list or select the percentage of enlargement or reduction.
Print Click this button to print the report. The standard Windows
Print window appears where you can select the number of
copies you want to print, specify whether to collate the copies,
determine whether you want to print all pages or a range of
pages, specify printer settings, and more.
Find Item in Report These two buttons allow you to search for a specific item of
information within the report.
Find The Next
Click to begin searching. The FMSReport window appears.
Occurrence Of The
Item In the Search For field, enter the string of characters you want
to search for, and then click OK. The system searches the
report and locates the page with the first instance of the string
you entered. To find the next page containing the information
you entered, click .
Copy Text in The This button allows you to copy text in the report and save it to
Report To The the ―clipboard‖ (making it available to be pasted in other
Clipboard applications such as Excel, Word, etc.)
Save Text In This button allows you to create a text file directly from the
Report To A File report as it is displayed.
To create a text file:
1. Click . The Select Text File To Save window appears.
2. Select the folder you want to save the file to, and then
click Save. The file is created and saved as a text file.
Copy Page To The This button allows you to save the current page of the report
Clipboard As A Picture in a picture format, allowing you to use it into another
program such as Word or a graphics program such as Paint.
To save a page as a picture:
1. Display the page of the report you want to copy.
2. Click . The Select BMP file to save window appears.
3. Select the folder you want to save the file to.
4. In the File name field, enter a name for the file.
5. Click Save. The file is created and saved in *.bmp format,
and the FMSReport box appears, displaying the location of
the file.
Save The Document This button allows you to save the report as a PDF (Portable
As A PDF File Document Format) file. (This allows others to view the file
using PDF readers such as Acrobat Reader.)
To save the report as a PDF file:
1. Click . The Select PDF file to save window appears.
4. Click Save. The file is created and saved in *.pdf format.
Convert Document This button allows you to create a PDF file and immediately
To PDF And Email email it.
To create a PDF file and email it to someone:
1. Click . The PDF file is created and your email program
opens a new email window with the file already attached.
2. Add the subject and body information of the email, enter
the recipient‘s email address, and send the email as usual.
Part 6: Tools Menu

Chapter 1: Quick Update
Base Ingredients and Ingredients
The process for updating base ingredients and overlay ingredients is the same. To update base
or overlay ingredients, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Quick Update, and select one of the following options:
Base Ingredients – Select this option if you want to edit all ingredients in the system.
Ingredients – Select this option to edit only the ingredients at the current plant.
The Brill Formulation Maintenance box appears.
2. If you want to change the name of the ingredients or change the Rounding or Production
Minimum values, click Yes. (Otherwise, click No.)
3. Select each of the ingredients you want to change/update. Then, click .

If you chose not to edit descriptors in the previous step, a new window appears, allowing
you to select up to 20 nutrients to update. Select the nutrients you want to update and
click .
The Quick Update window appears, allowing you to update information as necessary.
4. When you‘ve finished making changes, click  to save the changes and return to the
main window.
Formula Specifications
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Quick Update, and select Formula Specifications. The
Brill Formulation Maintenance box appears.
2. If you want to change the name of the name of the formula, the batch weight or the
species code, click Yes. (Otherwise, click No.)
3. Select each of the formulas you want to change/update. Then, click .

If you chose not to edit descriptors in the previous step, a new window appears, allowing
you to select up to 20 ingredients to update. Select the ingredients you want to update
and click .
A new window appears allowing you to select up to 19 nutrients you want to update.
4. Select the nutrients you want to update and click . The Quick Update window appears,
allowing you to update information as necessary.
main window.
Stored Formulas
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Quick Update, and select Stored Formulas.
2. Select each of the stored formulas you want to change/update. Then, click . The Quick
Update window appears, allowing you to update information as necessary.
main window.
Chapter 2: Special
Formula Bulk Change/Replace
The Formula Bulk Change/Replace option is a fast way to change or replace one ingredient (or
nutrient) for another throughout a multitude of formulas.
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Formula Bulk Change/Replace.
2. Click either the Formula Specifications or Stored Formulas option (depending on what
you want to change). The selected option appears in green.
3. Verify the report template property settings:
a. Click . The Report Template Properties window appears.

b. Click the Sections/Options tab.
c. Verify each of the selected options and select/unselect each option as necessary.
Tips:
If the Increment Formula Version option is selected the version number and
date is saved each time a formula specification is updated and saved. (The
version number and date information is printed on reports and is also
displayed on certain windows.)
The Verify Changes option allows you to verify changes and modify the
minimum and maximum restrictions for each formula as necessary.
d. When you‘ve finished verifying options, click  to return to the Verify Formulas window.
4. Click . The Bulk Change/Replace window appears.
5. Enter information into each of the following columns as necessary:
Tips:
You can save the current layout of the grid by clicking the Grid Layout menu and
select Save Current Layout as the Custom Default (see picture below).
You can save or open the Bulk Change file using the Save Bulk/Change File and Open
Bulk/Change file buttons at the bottom of the window (see picture below).
When a grid layout as been saved using

the Save Current Layout as the Custom
Default option, it can be applied by
clicking the Apply Custom Layout option.
NOTE: Only one Custom Layout can
exist at a time.
Click this button Click this button

to save the Bulk to recall the Bulk
Change setup. Change setup.
Code Enter the ingredient code (or, click to select the ingredient from a list).
Type Click this field and select a type: Ingredient (Ing) or Nutrient (Nut)
Description Displays the description – this field cannot be changed.
Action Click this field and select the action you want to occur.
Combos The Combos column is for ingredient combinations, a separate module.
Minimum Click this field and select one of the following options:
No change – Select this option if you want to leave them the same.
Manual – Select this option if you want to change the values
manually.
Maximum Click this field and select one of the following options:
No change – Select this option if you want to leave them the same.
Manual – Select this option if you want to change the values
manually.
New Code If replacing or adding a code, enter the code number of the item you want
to use as a replacement.
Swing Low If the Swing option is enabled, these two fields allow you to specify swing
amounts for ingredients being added or replaced across multiple formulas.
Swing High
6. When your selections are made, click 

. A new window appears, allowing you to select
the formulas in which you want changes made.
7. Click on each formula you want to change, and then click .

8. If you did not select the Verify Changes option (on the Report Template Properties window
of the Sections/Options tab), the Bulk Change/Replace Log Report preview window
appears.
If you selected the Verify Changes option (on the Report Template Properties window of
the Sections/Options tab), a new window appears allowing you to verify each change that
the system wants to make based on the information entered. Review each formula
specification or stored formula for changes, change the information as necessary, and then
click . The Bulk Change/Replace Log Report preview window appears.

Tips:
Click on the left to skip changing one item within a formula.
Click on the right to skip to the next formula without making any changes.
9. To print the report, click . Then, click the Close button to return to the main window of
Brill Formulation Maintenance.
One Ingredient Replaced with Many

Brill Formulation allows you to replace one ingredient in a stored formula with multiple
ingredients. When you are replacing a single ingredient with multiple ingredients you can
specify the percentage of each of the ingredients that will be used to replace the current
amount of a single ingredient.
This option only works for stored formulas. To access this option, select Stored Formulas
when you have the Formula Spec Bulk Change/Replace window open. Click . The
Stored Formula Bulk Change/Replace window appears.
Code Click in the Code field and enter the code of the ingredient you want
replaced with multiple other ingredients. If you do not know the code, click
and a lookup window appears. Select the ingredient from the lookup
window and it is displayed in the field.
Action Click this field and select Replace With Many.
New Code 1. Click . The Replace With Many window appears.
2. Enter the code of the first ingredient you want used to replace the
previous ingredient. If you do not know the code, click located at
the bottom of the window. The lookup window appears and you can
then select the ingredient you desire.
3. Once the ingredient code is entered the Description is displayed. This
field cannot be edited and is for display purposes only.
4. Click the Percentages field and enter the amount (in percentage) you
want to use of this ingredient. (This ingredient will replace the
ingredient selected in the Stored Formula Bulk Change/ Replace
window.)
5. Repeat steps 2-4 to add additional ingredients and their percentages
for inclusion in this function.
Tips:
After you click on the Percentages field a ―100‖ button appears.
The ―100‖ button allows you to click on this button and the
program totals the other percentages defined in the window
and calculates what the remainder is to make the total
percentage 100 percent. The program then automatically
enters the remainder amount in this field.
In the lower left corner of the window is a display of Percentage
Total. This running total displays what you have defined so far.
This is for display purposes only. If you do not have 100
percent allocated you cannot save the values in this window. If
you attempt to save the values when the total is incorrect a
warning dialog box appears. Click OK to return to the Replace
With Many window to resolve the problem. Once you have 100
percent defined and want to save these settings, click to 

return to the Stored Formula Bulk Change/Replace window.
NOTE: When you are returned to the Stored Formula Bulk
Change/Replace window no Code is displayed in the New Code
field. However, the Description field displays the number of codes
used in the Replace With Many window. This indicates that there
is more than one code being used to replace the ingredient you
are replacing.
Description Displays the description of the code selected in the New Code field of this
window. However, if multiple ingredients are being used to replace the
defined ingredient, no Code is displayed in the New Code field and the
Description field simply displays ―Item Count‖ and the number of
ingredient codes defined in the Replace With Many window.
Amount Click this field and select No Change or Manual Change for adjusting the
amount used.
Once you have defined the changes you desire, click 

to save your changes. You are
then returned to the main window of Brill Formulation Maintenance.
Store Premix as Ingredient

This option allows you to save a premix or concentrate as an ingredient making it available to
formulas in other plants.
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Store Premix as Ingredient. The
Store Premix as Ingredient window appears (see picture below).
2. Enter the number of the formula code you want to save as a premix.
3. In Plant Code, enter the name of the plant that will use this premix as an ingredient.
4. In the Pricing Plant field you enter the plant from which you use the cost of the premix in
determining the prices from this plant.
5. In the Save as Ingredient field, enter a new code number for the premix.
Tip: Click to check your ingredient list (this will not to write over an existing
ingredient). Although you may rename your premix, it is initially named after the
original formula with ―Premix‖ added to the end.
6. Enter a rounding factor for the ingredient.
7. Click either the Save to Base option or Save to Overlay option (depending on whether
you want to save this premix ingredient as a base ingredient or an overlay).
8. To identify this ingredient as an in-stock ingredient, select the Place ingredient in-stock
option. (A check mark is displayed when the option is selected.)
9. If the purchaser has some of the ingredients on-hand and wants to purchase only part of a
premix, you can save this as a partial premix. Refer to the ―Partial Premix Specification‖
section for more information.
10. When all information is complete, click  to save your changes.

Partial Premix Specification
If the purchaser has some of the ingredients on-hand and wants to purchase only part of a
premix. You can save this as a partial premix.
This function may also be used to create a formula where part of the ingredients are blended
in a premix, then used to produce the finished product. This procedure will create a stored
formula for the partial premix and for the finished product using the partial premix.
To save this as a partial premix:
1. On the Store Premix as Ingredient window, click . The Store Premix as Ing –
Partial Premix Specifications window appears. Enter information in each field as
follows:
Field: Description:
Original Displays the formula code and description (from the Formula Code
Formula field on the previous window).
Premix Enter the premix formula code that you want to replace with the
Formula new combined formula.
Tip: If necessary, click to check your formula list so that you
do not write over an existing formula.
Production Enter the modified production formula a code number.
Formula Tip: If necessary, click to check your formula list so that you
do not write over an existing formula.

Include When selected, this column indicates that the item is used in
creating the premix formula. If you do not want the ingredient
added to the premix, select this column to remove the check
mark.
Code Displays the ingredient code. This field cannot be changed.
Description Displays the description. This field cannot be changed.
Premix Amount Displays the premix amount. This field may be changed, if
necessary.
Formula Displays the formula amount. This field cannot be changed.
Amount
Tips:
Click (at the bottom of the window) to clear all changes and revert to the
original formula.
Click (at the bottom of the window) to switch between ingredients and
nutrients.
3. When you have defined all of the parameters needed in creating this premix, click . 
Your settings are saved and you are returned to the Store Premix as Ingredient window.
If you have selected a formula that already exists a dialog box appears and offers you
a decision of whether you want to replace the previously stored formula with the one
you are creating. Select one of the following options:
No – Click this button if you want to return to the Store Premix as Ing – Partial
Premix Specifications window and select a different formula code.
Yes – Click this button if you want to replace the previously stored formula with
the one you are creating here.
After you have completed making all of your settings in the Store Premix as Ing –
Partial Premix Specifications window you return to the Store Premix as Ingredient
window.
If you want to proceed with the process of storing your premix as an ingredient,
click  . If an ingredient already exists with the code you have used a dialog box
appears. Select one of the following options:
No – Click this button if you do not want to replace the ingredient with the one
you are creating here.
Yes – Click this button if you want to replace the ingredient with the one you are
creating here.
Mark Ingredient as Include

The Mark Ingredient as Include option allows you to include one formula specification in
another formula specification as if it were an ingredient. By using the formula specification as
an ingredient, you essentially create a ―base‖ formula specification (marked as an Include
ingredient) that you can use in another formula specification. Then, you can add additional
ingredients to create different variations of the base. For example, you may want to create a
―base‖ formula and then use that to create multiple variations with different drugs and/or drug
combinations.
When changes are made the ―base‖ formula specification, those changes are applied to any
other formula specification that uses the Include ingredient when they are optimized.
NOTE: Include ingredients cannot be edited using the Base Ingredients option like other
ingredients. To make changes to an Include ingredient, you must change the original
formula specification using the Formula Specifications option (under the Edit menu).
To set up a formula that can be used as an Include ingredient:
1. Create a formula specification that you want to use as a base.
2. Mark the formula specification as an Include ingredient by completing the following steps:
a. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Mark Ingredient as Include.
The Mark/UnMark Ingredient as Include window appears.
b. Click the search button ( ) on the right. The Select 1 or more Specs to Mark
Formula as Includes window appears.
c. Click on the formula specification created in step 1. (This is the formula that will be
marked as an Include ingredient to be used in other formula specifications.)
d. Click . A box appears indicating that the ingredient does not currently exist.
e. Click Yes to create a new ingredient and return to the Mark/UnMark Ingredient As
Include window. (The new ingredient will be created with the exact same code as
the formula specification, which is necessary for the Include ingredients option to
work properly. For example, if the formula specification had a code of 12345, an
ingredient will be created with a code of 12345. )
f. On the row that displays the new ingredient, enter information into each of the
following columns as necessary:
Code Displays the selected ingredient or formula specifications code.
This field cannot be changed.
Name Displays the name.
To change the name, click on the field and enter a new name.
Then, press the TAB key. The new name is displayed in red,
indicating the name has been changed.
Is Include Click this column to indicate that the ingredient is an Include
ingredient. A check mark appears, indicating that the ingredient
has been marked.
g. When all information has been entered, click  to save your changes. (Clicking
allows you to return to the main window of Brill Formulation Maintenance without
saving changes.)
3. Once the formula specification has been marked as an Include ingredient, you can add it
to another formula specification or you can modify nutrients in the formula specification.
Refer to the following sections for additional information:
Adding an Include Ingredient to a Formula Specification

To add the Include ingredient to a formula specification:
a. On the main window, click the Edit menu and select Formula Specifications. The
Formula Specification Maintenance window appears.
b. In the Code field, enter a code (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) and press ENTER.
Tip: If you enter the code for a new formula specification, a message box appears.
Click Yes to create the new formula specification and continue.
c. Right-click on the last row of the table and select Add Row(s).
d. Click on the Include ingredient you want to add and then click 
. The Include
ingredient is added to the formula specification. Both the Minimum and Maximum
columns display *Include* and cannot be changed.
Tips:
If the new Include ingredient does not appear in the list, click to refresh
the list.
To change the minimum and maximum amounts, you need to change the
original formula specification.
e. Continue to add/change the formula specification as necessary.
f. When you‘ve finished making changes to the formula specification, click  to save
the changes.
g. Click to return to the main window.
Changing an Include Ingredient

When changes are made the ―base‖ formula specification, those changes are applied to
any other formula specification that uses the Include ingredient when they are optimized.
1. On the main window, then click the Edit menu and select Formula Specifications.
2. Click on the formula that was marked as an Include ingredient and then click .
3. Edit the formula as necessary. Then, click  to save your changes.
4. Click to return to the main window. The changes you made to the original formula
will affect any formula specification or stored formula uses
Clear Premix Flag

To eliminate the premix designation from an ingredient:
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Clear Premix Flag. The Clear Premix
Flag window appears.
2. In the Code field, enter the code for the ingredient you want to change and press ENTER.
Tip: To select a code from a list, or to clear the premix flag for more than one ingredient:
a. Click . The Select 1 or more ingredients… window appears where you can
select multiple ingredients.
b. Click on each ingredient you want to select, and then click .

3. If you want to be prompted before the premix flag is cleared on an ingredient, leave the
―Prompt before changing‖ option selected. (If you do not want to be prompted, click this
option to remove the check mark.)
4. When the ―Prompt before changing‖ option is selected, the system will display a
verification message for each ingredient that will be cleared. When prompted, click one of
the following options:
Yes – Clears the premix flag.
No – Skips to the next ingredient without clearing the flag for the existing one.
Cancel – Cancels the entire request and returns you to the Clear Premix Flag
window without making any changes.
When the ―Prompt before changing‖ option is not selected, the system will display a
message indicating that the ―Operation has been completed.‖ Click Ok to return to the
Clear Premix Flag window.
5. Click to return to the main window.
Force Update
If you use the Weekly process, you can use the Force Update option to ensure that new formulas
are issued even when none of the normal criteria are met. Using the Force Update option, you can
specify formulas will be issued at the current plant (each plant must be set individually).
Setting a Formula to Force Update

NOTE: Formulas must be set to force update before each Weekly process is run. (When
the Weekly process is run, the force update flags are cleared so they must be
reset before the Weekly process is run again.)
To force an update, complete the following steps:

1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Force Update. The Force Update
window is displayed.
2. In the Code to Force Update field, enter the code for the formula that you want to
force update and press ENTER. The formula is set to be updated.
NOTE: If the formula was previously set to be force updated, a message box appears
asking if you want to clear the force update flag. If you want to clear the force
update flag (meaning you do not want the formula to be force updated), click
Yes. If you want the formula to be force updated, click No.
Tip: To select a code from a list, or to select more than one formula code:
a. Click . The Select Specification to Force Update window appears where

you can select multiple formula specification codes.
b. Click on each formula you want to select, and then click . The formulas
are set to be updated.
3. When you are finished setting formulas to force update, click to return to the main
window.
Stopping a Formula from Force Updating

When the Weekly process is run, the force update flags are cleared for all formulas. If you
need to clear the force update flag before the Weekly process is run, complete the
following steps:
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Force Update. The Force Update
window is displayed.
2. In the Code to Force Update field, enter the code for the formula that you do not want
to force update and press ENTER. A message box appears asking if you want to clear
the force update flag.
Tip: To select a code from a list, or to select more than one formula code:
a. Click . The Select Specification to Force Update window appears where

you can select multiple formula specification codes.
b. Click on each formula you want to select, and then click 

. A message
box appears asking if you want to clear the force update flag.
3. Click Yes to clear the force update flag. (If you selected more than one formula code,
a message box appears for each formula. Click Yes to clear the flag and continue to
the next formula.)
Verify Formulas
Verification is a means of testing a formula to ensure it meets the formula specification. For
example, you may choose to run verification for the stored formulas in a plant, and create a
formula set for formulas that do not meet the specification. The set of formulas then may be
optimized and a new version stored.
It may be run at any time; however, the system will verify formulas automatically as follows:
When using Professional Nutritionist (in Brill Formulation Optimization), verification
tests the nutrient values for the rounded formula against the formula specification and
then displays a warning if any nutrient is out of tolerance.
When optimizing formula sets, verification tests the rounded solutions against each
formula specification. A warning statement is printed on the Solution report for any
formula with nutrients out of tolerance.
When the Weekly process is run, the stored formula for each formula in the set is
tested for nutrients that are out of tolerance. These formulas are flagged to be issued.
NOTE: If you have never verified formulas before, you must use Verification Maintenance to
define the verification records.
To verify formulas:
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Verify Formulas. The Verify
Formulas window appears.
If you want to This area allows you to print

preview the any messages, notes, or
report before comments you want to appear
printing it, on the report.
click the View Comments entered here will
Report On print just below the header and
The Screen above the report information.
option box.
To have the
window close
after the
report is
printed, click
the Close
after printing
option box.
2. Verify the report template property settings:
a. Click . The Report Template Properties window appears.

b. Click the Sections/Options tab.
c. Verify each of the selected options and select/unselect each option as necessary.
Tip: To verify formulas at multiple plants, make sure the Select Plants option is
selected (a check mark appears in the box to indicate the option is selected. If
this option is not selected, you will not be given the option of selecting plants –
you will only be able to verify formulas at the plant that‘s currently selected.
d. When you‘ve finished verifying options, click  to return to the Verify Formulas
window.
3. Click  to display/print the report.

4. If the Select Plants option was selected (in step c above) a new window appears, allowing
you to select plants. Select the plants you want printed on the verification report and then
click . A new window appears.

5. Select each of the stored formulas you want printed on the verification report. Then, click .
The Verification report shows two things:
The asterisk ( * ) denotes that the formula now fails to meet the minimum deviation
tolerances.
The pound symbol ( # ) flags the nutrient as out of tolerance for the absolute
minimum or maximum.
Verification Maintenance
There are two types of verification records you can create. The first is by formula; the second
is by species code. If verification records apply on both a formula and on the species code, the
formula record will take precedence.
To create a formula verification:
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Verification Maintenance.
2. In the Code field, enter the formula code and press ENTER. (The  is not available.)
Tips:
To select a formula code from a list, click . A list is displayed. Click on the formula
you want to select and then click .

To set a verification record on an entire species code, leave the Code field empty and
instead select a species code number from the drop down list in the second box.
The formula nutrients are displayed in a table, allowing you to set the verification
absolutes and deviations.
Code Displays the nutrient code. To add a new code, right-click on the table
and select Add Row. A new window appears, allowing you to select a
nutrient.
Min Dev Minimum and Maximum Deviation are tolerance values used to set a
Max Dev warning flag on nutrients that are below the minimum deviation or
above the maximum deviation, but still within the absolute
minimum/maximum limit. Enter an amount just inside the safe
Absolute Maximum or Minimum value you plan to enter.
Nutrients that fall within this warning zone are marked in the
verification record and are defined as a percentage of the restriction.
Positive numbers are used as percentages. Negative numbers
represent actual amounts. Nutrients that violate these tolerances are
marked in the verification report with an asterisk (*).
Abs Min Enter the minimum safe actual amount of that nutrient in that
formula.
Abs Max Enter the highest actual safe amount of that nutrient in that formula.
Nutrients that violate these amounts are marked in verification reports
with a pound (#) sign.
Dev Above Min Deviation above a minimum can be a percentage or an actual. It is the
allowable deviation above the nutrient minimum listed on the formula
specification.
3. When you‘ve finished making changes, click  to save your changes.

Price Threshold Maintenance

Brill Formulation can compare the difference between the formula cost for a new solution and
the stored formula. This can be used to set a range and issue new formulas that meet or
exceed the set thresholds. When optimizing a list of formula specifications, a warning
statement prints on the Solution report.
Price thresholds may be set as actual amounts or as percentages. The system uses actual
amounts by default. (To enable percentages, please refer to the FMS Foundation Utilities in
Brill formulation section of this manual, and then select the File menu, point to Edit
Database Configuration and select Swing.)
Price thresholds may be set by plant, formulas within a plant, or by formulas across plants.
Two types of thresholds may be set. The inner price threshold is used to test cost decreases or
increases to issue new formulas. The outer price threshold is used to detect extreme price
changes and print warnings so the user may review the formula and determine the cause of
the extreme price change.
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Price Threshold Maintenance.
2. If you want to switch to Extended Price Difference, click the Formula Cost field and select
Extended Price Difference.
Tip: Make sure to make this change prior to entering a code or selecting a plant because
this field will become disabled after you make a code or plant selection.
3. To create a price threshold for a formula across plants, enter a formula code in the first
field and press ENTER, or click to select a formula code.
To set a threshold by plant, click the drop-down field (below the Code field) and select a
plant.
4. Enter the Low/Ton, High/Ton, Outer Low/Ton and Outer High/Ton limits you want to
trigger a threshold warning. These values will apply to all formulas within the plant, unless
you specify formulas in the table.
To specify a single formula, enter the same formula code in Low Range and High Range.
To specify a range of formulas, enter the lowest code number and the highest code
number of that range in the Range fields. Then, continue to specify the Low Price Per Ton,
High Price Per Ton, Outer Low Price Per Ton and Outer High Price Per Ton on those specific
formulas.
Formula Compare/Combine
When you select formula compare, you need to choose which formulas to compare. Then, the
a window appears and lists your choices. Each of the columns (except Description and Date)
contains a hidden . In the Price Plant column, for example, this allows you to look up a
pricing plant.
Once your selections are made, click . The Formula Compare window appears.
In the Display Mode drop down list, choose to display Ingredients, Nutrients or Prices. Each
choice has a different set of Options.
When you select the Ingredients mode, you are allowed to compare by batch, by ton or by
percentage. The Nutrients mode allows you to select a species code only. The Prices mode
allows you to display price control per batch, percent of total formula price, or ingredient unit
prices.
The printer icon allows you to send this report directly to the printer.
The Combine icon allows you to combine the formulas into a new formula. The following
window shows a combination in process.
You need to give the combined formula a new code number, a description, a species code and
a batch size. In the last column of the grid, enter the percentage of the finished formula you
want each formula to comprise. The final percentage entry requires you to select a small 100
icon to figure the final percentage.
When you are satisfied with the makeup of the formula to be created, click  and the
formula is created using the makeup you desire.
Automated Premix Update

The Automated Premix Update option allows you to update the nutrient and price information
for your premix ingredients within a batch process that is fast and easy.
This process is helpful because Brill Formulation allows you to take a premix formula, which
can be any formula in the system, and create a premix ingredient connected to that premix
formula. Now, when you want to use that premix, you include the premix ingredient for that
premix formula. However, the ingredient nutrient values for the formula may change, so the
ingredient premix must be updated when nutrient and price information on the individual
ingredients are altered. Without updating your premix ingredients, changes in the individual
ingredients that make up your premix ingredient are not reflected in the premix ingredient.
You must update your premix ingredients when you want the new individual ingredient
information updated in your premixes.
An example of a premix ingredient is when a company makes a pellet and they put it up in a
bin and then they mix that pellet with other ingredients to make one or more different horse
feeds. By creating a premix ingredient (the pellet formula) we are able then to update the
nutrient and pricing information of the premix ingredient when the individual ingredients of the
premix formula are changed.
When you only have a few premix ingredients, updating each premix ingredient is not a work-
intensive process. However, if you have many premix ingredients the management of
updating those premix ingredients becomes more taxing, thus the use of the Automated
Premix Update window.
In the Automated Premix Update window we make a list of these premixes that you store as
ingredients, then you open a particular list or multiple lists and then tell the program to
execute and update each line that you have in this list. The need for this process is when you
change an individual ingredients nutrient value, such as protein on soybean meal, That change
is made only in the soybean meal ingredient, not the premix ingredient that includes the
soybean meal. You must run the premix update process to have that change in soybean meal
flow all the way to your premix ingredient. The pricing information is affected in the same
manner, so when prices change for individual ingredients you must run the premix update to
have the pricing change flow through to the premix ingredients.
The Automated Premix Update window allows you to control the updating of nutrient
information, pricing information or both. You have the ability to select the information you
want updated when performing a premix update.
In many companies a premix is manufactured in Plant A and shipped to Plant B. The
Automated Premix Update Editing window allows you to have the information updated to the
destination plant as well as the originating plant. This provides a type of plant-to-plant premix
update.
This functionality also fits in with additional pricing information such as offered through
ingredient linking and add-on freight that includes plant-to-plant add-ons. When used in
conjunction with each other you can manage the changes in premix costs with freight costs
that can be added through the use of plant-to-plant add-ons and ingredient linking
functionality described in other sections of this manual.
The Automated Premix Update allows you to also generate several APU files that can be
generated to allow you to separate and manage different groups of premixes that you may
want to update at different times. You could create an APU that contains your swine premixes
and another APU that contains your dairy premixes, etc. This allows you to manage your
updates in any manner you desire. You may select to process any one, any combination or all
APUs at one time. The handling and processing of your updates is totally determined by you.
NOTE: When you plan to optimize or update or modify your formulas in the system it is highly
recommended that you first update the premixes. Without updating your premixes,
when you go to optimize or manage your formulas new information that may be
available for your individual ingredients is not included in the premix ingredients. So, if
you optimize a formula that includes a premix, the nutrient and pricing information
used by the system for the premix ingredient may be out of date. Please be sure you
update your premixes before managing your formulas within the system or at the least
be aware of the effect this has on your optimizations.
Getting Started - Creating a New Control File

1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Automated Premix Update. The
Automated Premix Update window appears (see picture below).
This area displays the control files

after they‘ve been set up.
To process a file, click on the file you
want to process and then click .

To select multiple files, press and
hold the CTRL key and then click
each file you want to process.
2. Click . The Automated Premix Update – Editing Control File window appears.
You can rearrange the order of the rows by right-

clicking on the row you want to move and
This column displays the selecting Move Row. (This is important
line number. It is especially when you use premixes inside other
automatically filled in as premixes. Premixes must be updated in order so
you add premix that any premixes that are used inside other
ingredients. This field premixes are updated before the final premix is
cannot be changed. updated.)
You can also delete a row by right-clicking on the
row you want to remove and then selecting
Delete Selected Row(s).
3. For each formula you want to add to the control file, enter the following information
into the fields of a new row (each formula has its own row):
Field: Description:
Control Enter the name of the file (up to 120 characters).
File Name NOTE: Do not add an extension (such as .APU) to the file
name. The APU extension is automatically added for
you.
Field: Description:
Control File Click on this field and enter a description (up to 120 characters).
Description
Plant Displays the current plant (from the Current Plant field on the
main window).
To change the plant, click the plant cell and enter a new code
(or, click to select the plant from a list).
Formula Enter the code for the formula that was used as the source of
the premix ingredient you are going to update (or, click to
select the plant from a list).
Formula Name Displays the name of the formula.
Composition Determines whether the nutrient information for this premix is
updated.
By default, this option is selected. Leave this option selected if
you want the nutrient information for the premix updated.
If you do not want the nutrient information updated, click on
this option to clear the check mark from the box.
Price Determines whether the pricing information for this premix is
updated.
By default, this option is selected. Leave this option selected if
you want the pricing information for the premix updated.
If you do not want the pricing information updated, click on this
option to clear the check mark from the box.
NOTE: Do not leave this option selected when the Base Only
option is selected. When both the Price and Base Only
options are selected, a new plant will be created for the
pricing information.
Base Only Determines where you want the nutrient or price information
saved (base plant or all plants)
Select this option if you only want to update the information at
the base plant.
By default, this option is not selected. Leave this option
unselected if you want to update the information at any or all
plants.
If you only want to update the information at the base plant,
select this option.
NOTES:
Do not select this option if the Price option is selected. When
both the Price and Base Only options are selected, a new
plant will be created for the pricing information.
When the Base Only option is selected, the Destination cell
displays ―Base Only‖ and cannot be changed. (When this
option is not selected, you can select which plants you want
updated. Refer to the description for the Destination column
for more information.)
Ingredient Displays the premix ingredient code to which the formula premix
information is applied.
To change the ingredient code, click the cell and enter an
ingredient code (or, click to select the plant from a list).
Field: Description:
Ingredient Name Displays the name of the premix ingredient. This field cannot be
changed.
Destination Displays the plant(s) that will be updated.
NOTE: If the Base Only option is selected, the Destination cell
displays ―Base Only‖ and cannot be changed.
If the Base Only option is not selected, select the plants you
want updated:
1. Click in the Destination cell and then click . A new window

appears.
2. In the Available Plants list, double-click on each plant you
want to update. As you double-click on a plant, it is moved
to the Destination Plants list.
Tip: You can also remove a plant from the Destination
Plants list if necessary by double-clicking on the
plant. Or, use the Add All and Remove All buttons to
add or remove all plants from one list to the other.
3. When all plants have been selected, click 

to return to
the Automated Premix Update – Editing Control File window.
If one plant is selected, that plant code is displayed in the
Destination cell. If you selected more than plant, the
number of plants is displayed.
NOTE: When more than one destination plant is selected and
each destination plant has its own ingredient costs, the
ingredient price is determined by calculating the cost of
the formula using the unique ingredient costs at each
destination plant. Therefore, the ingredient (selected in
this window) will have a different cost at each
destination plant. For example, if you have a Formula
Code 10 and premix Ingredient Code 10. There are
many different ingredients that go into Formula Code
10 that is now premix Ingredient Code 10. However,
the ingredients in Formula Code 10 have different
prices for the component ingredients at the different
plants and therefore Formula Code 10 will have
different costs at the different plants. If nutrient
ingredient prices are different between plants, then that
difference also is reflected in the premix Ingredient
Code 10 when processed using Automated Premix
Update.
4. When all formulas have been added to the control file, click 
. The Automated
Premix Update – Editing Control File window appears, where you can process the
control file you just created.
Processing a Control File

Automated Premix Update window appears.
2. Click on the file you want to process.
Tip: To select multiple files, press and hold the CTRL key and then click each file you
want to process.
3. If you want to view any errors that may occur during the process, click the Display
Errors on Screen option.
Tip: All errors are written to a log file whether you select this option or not so that
you can view them again after the process is complete, if necessary. However,
the log file will be overwritten the next time this control file is processed.
4. If you want to display any warnings that may occur during the process, click the
Display Warnings on Screen option.
Tip: All warnings are written to a log file whether you select this option or not so that
you can view them again after the process is complete, if necessary. However,
the log file will be overwritten the next time this control file is processed.
5. To process the control file, click . The Brill Formulation Maintenance confirmation
box appears.
6. Click Yes to continue with the Automated Premix Update. (Clicking No cancels the
process and returns you to the main window.)
When the process is complete, the main window appears.
Viewing the Last Log File

To view the last log file:
2. Click on a control file. Then, click to view the log for that control file. The log file
opens in Microsoft Notepad.
Tips:
To print the log file, click the File menu and select Print.
To save the log file in a different directory (to prevent the file from being
overwritten), click the File menu and select Save As. The Save As window
appears where you can enter a new name for the file and select the directory
in which you want to save the log file.
3. When you have finished viewing the log file, click .
Printing a Report of the File

You have the ability to generate a settings report that details all of the stored settings of a
control file.
To print the report:
2. Click on a control file. Then, click . The Automated Premix Report window
appears where you can print the report (similar to other reports).
Deleting a Control File

To delete a control file:
2. Click on the control file you want to delete. Then, click . The Brill Formulation
Maintenance confirmation box appears.
3. Click Yes to delete the control file and return to the Automated Premix Update
window.
Selecting Control Files from a Different Folder

To select a control file from a different folder:
2. Click . The Browse for Folder window appears.

3. Browse to the folder containing the control files you want to work with. Then, click on
the folder and click OK. The available control files are displayed in the list.
Automated Plant Copy

This feature is helpful to those who need to copy information from one plant to another on a
routine basis.
The process in this feature is to first create a file and set the instructions of what items to copy
(price, ingredients, formula specifications, and/or stored formulas), as well as from where – to
where. It is also possible to clear the files in the destination plant in advance of the transfer.
Only data selected to be copied are cleared. If the destination plant is not cleared, the new
data will be copied, but unwanted data may remain in the destination plant.
To use the Automated Plant Copy feature:
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Automated Plant Copy.
2. To create a new control file, click . Or, to edit an existing control file, click . The
Automated Plant Copy window appears. Each control file has two rows of command
entries.
3. Enter information into each of the following columns:

Plant Click this field to enter the plant you want to copy from.
Tip: After clicking on this field, you can click to select a plant from
the list.
Description This column displays the plant description. (This information cannot be
changed.)
Clear Select this option to delete data in the destination file. (Brill Formulation
Destination does not overwrite data; it only deletes data it is ordered to replace.)
Copy Price Select this option to have the prices from the Plant displayed in the
Plant column copied to the destination plant.
Copy Ings Select this option to have overlay ingredients copied from the Plant
displayed in the Plant column to the destination plant. (Base Ingredients
are already shared between all plants so only overlays need to be copied
on occasion.)
Copy Specs Select this option to copy Formula Specifications to the destination
plant.
Copy Store Select this option to copy Stored Formulas to the destination plant.
Prices Only Select this option to copy the ingredient base price only – without add-
on costs.
Destination Click this field to enter the destination plant (this is the plant you want
to copy to).
Tip: After clicking on this field, you can click to select a plant from
the list.
Tip: It is possible to create copy instructions for several plants in one control file.
Likewise, it is possible to delete and edit instructions in the control file. To delete or
move a line, highlight it by clicking on the box at the left end of the line. Right click
in the line and choose to delete or move. When moving a line, simply enter the line
number where you want to place this command.
4. When the instructions are complete, click .

Tip: Reports may be printed for selected files.
5. To activate the copy instructions, highlight the desired control files and click . (You can
activate more than one control file at a time.)
6. Select Yes to continue copying. When the copy is complete, the window closes.
Tips:
If you selected the Display Errors on Screen and/or Display Warnings on
Screen options, you will see the error and/or warning messages only if a problem
occurred during the data transfer.
Each automated plant copy generates a log file. To see the log, click on the View
Log File icon (magnifier on paper icon, fourth from left).
Ingredient Linking Maintenance

Ingredient Linking Maintenance is an optional feature of Brill Formulation. If you
are interested in purchasing this option, or to learn more, contact your sales
representative.
Ingredient Linking Maintenance allows you to link ingredients together (such as ground corn
and flaked corn to your whole corn ingredient as shown in the following diagram) so that as
you make changes to the nutrients and/or price of one ingredient, the nutrients and/or price
of the other ingredients is also changed. This can significantly reduce your data entry time and
ensure data accuracy when dealing with multiple plants and/or similar ingredients.
Tip: Linked ingredients can be in the same plant or in different plants.
Ground Corn
Corn
Flaked Corn
To link ingredients:
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Ingredient Linking Maintenance.
The Ingredient Linking Maintenance window appears (see picture below).
These columns are used These columns are These columns determine
to define the ingredient used to define the which information is
you want to link to other ingredient you want automatically changed for
ingredients. When to change the ingredient defined
information changes on automatically when under the ―To‖ heading.
this ingredient, it is also the ingredient
changed for the defined under the
ingredient defined under ―From‖ heading is
the ―To‖ heading. changed.

Tips:
Start on a new row for each ingredient you want to link to.
To link an ingredient to multiple ingredients, start on a new row for each link you
want to create. For example, if you want to link the price of whole corn ingredient
(code #1010 in the following example) to ground corn (code #1040) and flaked
corn (code #1039) you would enter it as follows:
From To Copy
Plant Code Name Code Name Nutr Price F.Price Base
BASE 1010 Corn 1040 Ground Corn 
BASE 1010 Corn EAST 1039 Flaked Corn 
NOTES:
Creating multiple layers of ingredients (such as corn to flaked corn and
then flaked corn to ground corn as shown in the following diagram) is not
recommended.
Corn Flaked Corn Ground Corn
If you create multiple layers as shown above, the system will allow you to
save the links; however, the information will not be updated between the
flaked corn and the ground corn. (It will still be updated between corn and
flaked corn.)
Likewise, you may want to consider carefully before creating multiple links
to a single ingredient (as shown in the following diagram):
Ingredient 1 Flaked Corn
Ingredient 2
Ingredient 3
If you create multiple links to a single ingredient, the flaked corn will be
updated when each ingredient is changed. So, if you make a price change
to ingredient 1, flaked corn is updated. Then, if you make a price change
to ingredient 2, the original changes to flaked corn will be overwritten with
the changes from ingredient 2. However, if the ingredients are updating
different information the information will not be overwritten. For example,
if Ingredient 1 is updating price and Ingredient 2 is updating Nutrient
information both links would work correctly without overwriting any
information.
From Columns
From Columns
Plant Enter the plant code for the ingredient you want to link to other
ingredients (or, click to select a plant from the list).
Code Enter the ingredient code (or, click to select an ingredient from the
list).
Tip: When you make changes to this ingredient (after linking has been
setup), the changes are also made to the ingredient defined under
the ―To‖ heading.
Name Displays the name of the ingredient (after you‘ve moved to the next row).
This information cannot be changed.
To Columns
Plant Enter the plant code for the ingredient you want to change automatically
when the ingredient defined under the ―From‖ heading is changed (or,
click to select a plant from the list).
Code Enter the ingredient code (or, click to select an ingredient from the
list).
Name Displays the name of the ingredient (after you‘ve moved to the next row).
Copy Columns
Nutr Select this option if you want to nutrient information for linked ingredients
updated automatically.
Price Select this option if you want to copy price information for linked
ingredients updated automatically.
Tip: If you select the Price option, do not select the F Price option. (If
you select both the Price and F Price options, a message is displayed
indicating that you cannot select both options.)
F Price Select this option if you want to copy final price information.
Tip: If you select the F Price option, do not select the Price option. (If
you select both the Price and F Price options, a message is displayed
indicating that you cannot select both options.)
Base Select this option if you want base ingredient information for linked
ingredients updated automatically.
NOTES:
The Price and F Price options cannot be selected when this option
is selected. (If they are selected, they will be automatically
unselected when moving to the next row.)
This option is only available when copying from a base ingredient
to a base ingredient.
3. When you have finished linking ingredients, click 

. Unless one of the following
exceptions is detected, a Brill Formulation Maintenance box appears to verify that you
want to re-save your changes.
Exception 1 (multiple links to a single ingredient): A Brill Formulation Maintenance
box appears to display the following message: ―You have linked multiple codes to
the same code.‖ Click one of the following options:
o Yes – Click this button to save the links.
o No or Cancel – Click either of these buttons to return to the Ingredient
Linking Maintenance window, allowing you to make changes.
Exception 2 (multiple layers of ingredients): A Brill Formulation Maintenance box
appears to display the following message: ―The linking of linked codes is not
supported.‖ Click one of the following options:
o No or Cancel – Click either of these buttons to return to the Ingredient
Linking Maintenance window, allowing you to make changes.
4. Click Yes to save your changes, update all ingredients, and return to the main window.
(Clicking No will save the links, but it will not update the ingredients defined in the ―To‖
column, which means that the information for each ingredient may be different.)
Deleting a Row
To remove the link between ingredients, delete the row by completing the following steps:
Tips:
To select one row, click to the left of the Plant column.

To select multiple rows, press and hold the CTRL key and then select each of
the rows you want to delete.
2. Right-click on the table and select Delete Selected Row(s). The Brill Formulation
3. Click Yes to delete the rows.
View the Linking Report

The Linking Report displays all links and the information that is linked to each ingredient.
To view the Linking report:
1. Click the Report menu and select the report you want to print. A new window appears
This area allows you to print

any messages, notes, or
comments you want to appear
If you want to on the report.
preview the report
Comments entered here will
before printing it,
print just below the header and
click the View
above the report information.
Report On The
Screen option box.
To have the window
close after the report
is printed, click the
Close after
printing option box.
2. When all settings have been specified, click  to view the report. The Linking Report
preview window appears allowing you to view and print the report. (Refer to the
―Printing a Report‖ section for more detailed information.)
Stored Formula Linking Maintenance
Stored Formula Linking Maintenance is an optional feature of Brill Formulation. If

you are interested in purchasing this option, or to learn more, contact your sales
representative.
Stored Formula Linking Maintenance allows you to make an exact copy of a stored formula to
a different formula code within the same plant. When the base stored formula is updated, the
linked stored formula is automatically updated and is an exact copy of the base formula. Once
two formulas are linked, whenever a change is made to the base formula, those changes are
automatically stored in the linked formula.
NOTES:
Changes to the linked formula will not update the base stored formula. (The system
will only make changes from the base formula to the linked formula – not vice versa.)
You cannot have multiple layers of linking. For example, you cannot link
StoredFormula1 to StoredFormula2 and then link StoredFormula2 to StoredFormula3.
To link stored formulas:

1. Click the Tools menu, point to Special, and select Stored Formula Linking
Maintenance. The Stored Formula Linking Maintenance window appears (see picture
below).
These columns are used These columns are used

to define the stored to define the stored
formula you want to link formula you want to
to other formulas. When change automatically
information changes on when the stored formula
this stored formula, it is defined under the ―From‖
also changed for the heading is changed.
formula defined under
the ―To‖ heading.

Tips:
Start on a new row for each stored formula you want to link.
To link a stored formula to multiple stored formulas, start on a new row for each
link you want to create (see example below).
From To
Plant Code Name Code Name
BASE BF101 Stored Formula 1 BF102 Stored Formula 2
BASE 1010 Stored Formula 1 1039 Stored Formula 3
From Columns
Plant Enter the plant code for the stored formula you want to link to other
formulas (or, click to select a plant from the list).
Code Enter the stored formula code (or, click to select a code from the list).
Tip: When you make changes to this stored formula (after linking has
been setup), the changes are also made to the formula defined
under the ―To‖ heading.
Name Displays the name of the stored formula (after you‘ve moved to the next
row). This information cannot be changed.
To Columns
Code Enter the stored formula code (or, click to select a code from the list).
Name Displays the name of the stored formula (after you‘ve moved to the next
row). This information cannot be changed.
3. When you have finished linking formulas, click 

. Unless one of the following exceptions
is detected, a Brill Formulation Maintenance box appears to verify that you want to re-
save your changes.
NOTES:
If you have multiple links to the same formula: The system will not give you an
error message; however, changes made on one formula may overwrite the
changes from another formula. For example, if you have both StoredFormula1 and
StoredFormula2 linked to StoredFormula3, and you make a change to
StoredFormula1, those changes will be made to StoredFormula3. Then, if you
make changes to StoredFormula2, the original changes (made from changing
StoredFormula1) will be overwritten.
If you created multiple layers of formulas: A Brill Formulation Maintenance box
appears to display the following message: ―The linking of linked codes is not
supported.‖ Click one of the following options:
o No or Cancel – Click either of these buttons to return to the Stored
Formula Linking Maintenance window, allowing you to
make changes.
4. Click Yes to save your changes, update all formulas, and return to the main window.
(Clicking No will save the links, but it will not update the formulas defined in the ―To‖
column, which means that the information for each of the formulas may be different.)
Deleting a row
To remove the link between formulas, delete the row by completing the following steps:
Tips:
To select one row, click to the left of the Plant column.

To select multiple rows, press and hold the CTRL key and then select each of
the rows you want to delete.
2. Right-click on the table and select Delete Selected Row(s). The Brill Formulation
3. Click Yes to delete the rows.
View the Linking report

The Linking Report displays all links and the information that is linked to each stored
formula. To view the Linking report:
1. Click the Report menu and select the report you want to print. A new window appears

on the report.
If you want to preview the

report before printing it,
click the View Report On
The Screen option box.
To have the window close
after the report is printed,
click the Close after
2. When all settings have been specified, click  to view the report. The Linking Report
preview window appears allowing you to view and print the report. (Refer to the
―Printing a Report‖ section for more detailed information.)
Chapter 3: System
View Log
To view a log report for Brill Formulation Maintenance:
1. Click the Tools menu, point to System, and select View Log. The Log Report window

on the report.
If you want to
preview the report
before printing it,
click the View
Report On The
Screen option box.
To have the window
Close after
2. In the Report Comments area, enter any messages, notes or comments you want to
include on the report as necessary (this information is optional).
3. Click the View Log field and select one of the following options:
Changes to system Displays a list of changes made to the system. The report
includes the following columns:
Displays one of the following codes:

A – Stored formula authorization (used if
stored formula authorization is enabled)
S – Formula Specification
I– Ingredient
F – Stored Formula
P – Price (used if price logging is enabled)
Plant Displays the Plant where the change

occurred.
Product Displays the product code that was changed.
Description Displays a description of the product.
Change Displays the user ID that was being used

when the change was made.
Action Displays the action taken.
When Displays the date the change was made.
Time Displays the time the change was made.
Base ingredient history Displays a list of changes made to base ingredients including:
who made the change, the action taken, the date, and the
time the change was made.
Ingredient history Displays a list of changes made to overlay ingredients

including: who made the change, the action taken, the date,
and the time the change was made.
Formula spec history Displays a list of changes made to formula specifications

including who made the change, the action taken, the date,
and the time the change was made.
Stored formula history Displays a list of changes made to stored formulas including
who made the change, the action taken, the date, and the
time the change was made.
Stored formula Displays a list of changes made to stored formulas that have
authorization history been authorized including who made the change, the action
taken, the date, and the time the change was made.
4. In the ―Options‖ area, enter information into each of the following fields as necessary:
User If you want to view changes that were made by a specific

user, enter the User ID.
Date Enter the range of dates you want included on the report (the
beginning date goes in the top field and then ending date goes
in the bottom field). For example, if you want to view all
changes that have occurred in the month of September you
would enter 09/01/2007 in the top field and 09/30/2007 in the
bottom field.
Time Enter the range of times you want included on the report (the
beginning time goes in the top field and the ending time goes
in the bottom field). For example, if you wanted to see all
changes that happened between 8am and 1pm you would
enter 08:00 in the top field and 13:00. Or, if you wanted to
see all changes for an entire day, you would enter 00:00 in
the top field and leave the bottom field blank.
5. Continue to print the report as usual (select a template, verify your options, etc.). Refer to
the ―Printing a Report‖ section for more detailed information.
Options
To view and/or change system options, click the Tools menu, point to System, and select
Options. The Options window appears, allowing you to define Setup options, Precision
options, and Cost options. Refer to each of the following sections for detailed information.
Setup
The Setup tab allows you to change the following options:
Tip: Click the option to either add or remove a check mark. If a check mark is visible, the
option is selected.
Sort ingredients by Select this option if you want to sort the ingredients by the
the amount column number of pounds in the formula. (If this option is selected
when you view/print a stored formula report, the ingredient
with the most pounds prints first and the ingredient with the
fewest pounds prints last.)
If this option is not selected, ingredients are sorted by
ingredient code.
Zero price ingredient This area allows you to determine how zero price ingredients
option should be handled. Select one of the following options:
Always Edit Zero Select this option if you always
Price Ingredients want to be able to edit zero price
ingredients.
Never Edit Zero Select this option if you do not
Price Ingredients want to edit zero price ingredients.
Prompt to Edit Zero Select this option if you want to be
Price Ingredients asked whether you want to edit
zero price ingredients. When this
option is selected, a message will
be displayed when you click the
Edit menu and select Prices to ask
whether you want to edit zero price
ingredients.
Prompt to increment Select this option if you want to be prompted before the
stored formula version system attempts to increment the version number within
Stored Formula Maintenance.
If this option is not selected, the system will automatically
increment the version number.
Save as default options Select this option if you want to save the current settings as
the default options for the current user. For example, if you
are currently logged in as USER1, these settings will become
default settings for USER1, but not other users.
If this option is not selected, the system will use the settings
specified in Foundation Utilities the next time you log in as
USER1.
Precision
The Precision tab allows you to change decimal precision for the following:
NOTE: The settings on this tab will override the settings in Foundation Utilities (click the
File menu, select Edit Database Configuration and then select the
Cost/Precision tab).
Tip: Enter the number of decimal places (0-5) you want the system to display, or use the
up and down arrows to increase or decrease the number of decimals.
Field: Example:
Amount Precision If this field is set to ―4,‖ quantity values will be displayed with 4
digits to the right of the decimal as follows: 9,999,999.9999
(The system allows up to 7 digits displayed to the left of the
decimal.)
Price Precision If this field is set to ―4,‖ price values will be displayed with 4 digits
to the right of the decimal as follows: $999,999,999.9999
decimal.)
Percent Precision If this field is set to ―2,‖ percentage values will be displayed with 2
digits to the right of the decimal as follows: 100.00%
decimal.)
Cost
The Cost tab allows you to change the following:
NOTE: The settings on this tab will override the settings in Foundation Utilities (click the
File menu, select Edit Database Configuration and then select the
Cost/Precision tab).
Option/Field: Description
Formula Cost Select one of the following options to determine how the cost of
formulas is calculated:
Tip: Only one option may be selected. (The selected option
appears green. Unselected options appear red.)
Formula Cost per Ton/Tonne
Formula Cost per Batch
Factor This field allows you to specify the ingredient factor.
For example, if you want to see the formula cost per 100 pounds
or kg. select the Formula Cost per Lb./Kg. option and set this
field to 100.
Startup Language
NOTE: Before you can change languages, you must have the language files resident in your
Brill Formulation directory. Contact Brill Formulation customer support specialist for
more information.
When you have the language files you need, you can set a default language file to be used by
the system upon startup.
1. On the main window, click the Tools menu, point to System, and select Startup
Language. The Startup Language window appears.
Field: Description:
Font Displays the font currently being used.
To change the font:
1. Click .
2. Select the font, font style (regular, italic, bold, etc.), and size.
In the script field, select Western.
3. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Language
Setup window.
Language Allows you to select a language file.
To select a language file:
1. Click .
2. Browse to and select the language file you want to use.
Tips:
The file name begins with ―V7MNT" and has a ―.LNG‖
extension (for example, V7MNTCAFR.LNG).
To set up languages for display, refer to the ―Language
Definition Maintenance‖ section.
3. Click Open.
3. Click to save your changes and return to the main window of Brill Formulation
Maintenance.
NOTE: You must exit and restart Brill Formulation Maintenance before the new
language file can be displayed.
System Definition Maintenance

The System Definition Maintenance option allows users to access a central data set using
different nutrient units, currencies, and languages. With a formulation data set that uses
nutrient units that are based on Imperial units, System Definition Maintenance would allow a
user to access the data and see nutrients based on metric units.
To define a new configuration:
NOTE: You must be logged in with a user ID that is set up with ―Allow user to run ‗Super-
Only‘ functions‖ in order to make these changes. (This functionality is set up in
Foundation Utilities: click the File menu and select Add/Remove Users.)
1. On the main window, click the Tools menu, point to System, and select System
Definition Maintenance. The System Definition Maintenance window appears, allowing
you to define alternate configurations.
2. On the first row that has not been used, enter information into each of the following
columns as necessary:
No Displays the row number. This information cannot be changed.
Name Allows you to enter a name for the new configuration (up to 256
alphanumeric characters).
Rest. Type Determines whether the restrictions will be actual amounts or
percentages.
Click this field and select either Actual or Percent.
Ton Defines whether a ton is 2000 pounds or 1000 Kgs.
Currency Adj Allows you to enter a currency conversion factor to convert the default
currency of the data set. For example, if the default currency of the data
set is US dollars the currency conversion factor would allow a user in
another country with remote access to the data to see ingredient costs
in their local currency. This can be changed daily.
Language Allows you to have the program run in a different language as set up in
the Language Definition Maintenance window.
(Once this field is set, you can use the Language Definition Maintenance
window to select alternate languages and the ability to select different
Language IDs. To open the Language Definition Maintenance window,
return to the main window, click the Tools menu, point to System, and
select Language Definition Maintenance.)
3. When you have finished making changes, click to save the changes and return to the
main window.
4. To use the new configuration:
a. Click the Tools menu, point to System and select Change System.
b. Click the field and select the new configuration.
c. Click to save the change and return to the main window.
Language Definition Maintenance

The Language Definition Maintenance option allows you to specify the language you want to
use, change font sizes, and more.
1. On the main window, click the Tools menu, point to System and select Language
Definition Maintenance.
Field: Description:
Language Click this field and select a language from the list.
Tip: If languages have not been set up, the list will display
―1 - Default‖ and all other options will be ―Not
Initialized‖. To initialize another language, use the
System Definition Maintenance option.
Language ID Enter the three3-character language identifier used in the
language files.
Screen Font Displays the font used by the system.
To change the font, click (above this field). The Font

window appears where you can select different font types,
styles and sizes (see the table below for additional
information).
Font This field displays the type of font you want
to use (such as Arial, Verdana, Times New
Roman, etc.).
Examples:
o This is an Arial font.
o This is a Verdana font.
o This is a Times New Roman font.
Font Style This field determines whether the information
will be Regular, Bolded, Italicized, or Bolded
and Italicized.
The bold and italics options are typically used
for information that requires special attention
such as warnings, cautions, etc.
Size This field determines how large/small the font
is. You may either select a size from the list
or enter a new size. (For example, you may
enter a font size of 7 even though the option
does not appear in the list.)
Examples:
o This is an Arial font in size 8.
o This is an Arial font in size 10.
Normal Printer Font Displays the standard font used for printing.
To change the font, click (below this field). The Font

styles and sizes (see the Screen Font description for more
detailed information).
Field: Description:
Font Size Displays the standard font size used for printing.
To change the font, click (next to this field – it‘s the same
button you use to change the Normal Printer Font). The Font
Landscape Font Size Displays the font used to print in landscape format.
To change the font, click (next to this field). The Font

Compressed Printer Font Displays the font used to print in a compressed format.
To change the font, click (below this field). The Font

Font Size Displays the font size used when printing in a compressed
format.
To change the font, click (next to this field – it‘s the same
button you use to change the Compressed Printer Font). The
Font window appears where you can select different font
types, styles and sizes (see the Screen Font description for
more detailed information).
Landscape Font Size Displays the font size used when printing in landscape format.
3. When you have finished making changes, click .

Once you have initialized the languages, you can change languages from the main window
by clicking the Tools menu, pointing to System, and selecting Change Language. (Any
user can have access to the Change Language option.)
Change Language
To change languages:
1. Click the Tools menu, point to System, and select Change Language.
2. Click the field and select the language you want to use.
3. Click .
Change System
NOTE: Different system configurations may be set up using the System Definition
Maintenance option. Refer to the ―System Definition Maintenance‖ section for more
information.
To change system definitions:
1. Click the Tools menu, point to System, and select Change System.
3. Click .
Define Margin Configuration
Information to be added at a later date.
Define Shortcuts
The Define Shortcuts option allows you to create up to 10 shortcuts to any other program on
your computer.
To set up a new shortcut:
1. Log in to Brill Formulation with a user ID that is able to run "Super-Only" functions. (This
ability is set up in Foundation Utilities: click the File menu and select Add/Remove
Users.)
2. Click the Tools menu, point to System, and select Define Custom Programs. The
Define Custom Programs window appears.
Tip: Start on a new row for each shortcut you want to create.
Field: Description:
# Displays the line number. This information cannot be changed.
Description Enter the description (up to 60 characters) that you want to appear as a
menu option under the Shortcuts menu (on the main window).
Command Click in this cell, and then click to select the program you want to
open.
Parms This column is used to specify parameter settings needed by the
external program. This is typically not used since few programs require
this feature. If needed, please contact a Brill Formulation customer
support specialist to help with this option.
Icon If you want to assign an icon to the menu option, click in this cell. Then,
click . The Select Icon for Program window appears, allowing you to
select the icon you want to use.
4. When you have finished entering information, click 

. The new menu is created;
however, you‘ll need to close the program and log back in to view the menu option. (To
view the new menu option: on the main window, click the Shortcuts menu.)
Import
Importing and exporting allows you to send data out of one Brill Formulation system and into
another.
1. Click the Tools menu, point to System, and select Import. The Import window appears.
Field: Description:
File to import Enter the name of the file you want to import. The next time you
import a file, the file name and path is displayed in this field by
default.
Tips:
The file name should end with the ―.XF1‖ extension unless you
are importing from Feed Ration Balancer (for example,
MyExportFile1.XF1). If you are importing to Feed Ration
Balancer, the file should have the ―.XFR‖ extension (such as
MyExportFile2.XFR).
If you don‘t know the name and path of the file, click to
search for and select a file.
Translation File Enter the name and path of a translation file (if necessary).
Refer to the Appendix for more information on translation files.
3. Select each of the following options as necessary:

Delete file after import Select this option if you want the system to automatically
delete the file after the import process is complete.
Ignore Names Select this option if you do not want to import names.
Ignore Comments Select this option if you do not want to import comments.
Skip formulas with Select this option if you do not want to import formulas with
unknown or not unknown ingredients or ingredients that are not found.
found ingredients
Disable Import Logging Select this option if you do not want the import process
detailed within the log file. If you want to view a list of each
item that was imported, do not select this option.
Tip: To view the log file, click after the import

process is complete.
Do not overwrite Select this option if you do not want to overwrite ingredients
existing ing/specs and formula specifications.
Do Archiving Select this option if you want to store formulas as if they
were stored using Brill Formulation Maintenance (the stored
date and version will be updated, and formulas will be
archived).
If you do not want imported files to be archived, do not
select this option. (The formula version and date sent will be
used, and nothing is archived.)
4. If you want to conform batch sizes (within the same unit of measure) to the plant you are
importing to, enter the new batch weight in the ―Override stored formula batch weight‖
field. (The system will automatically recalculate.
5. Click 
to begin the import. When the import process is complete, the Brill Formulation
Maintenance box appears. Click OK to return to the Import window.
Tip: Refer to the ―Appendix‖ for a detailed description of the import/export file.
Export
Importing and exporting allows you to send data out of one Brill Formulation system and into
another.
1. Click the Tools menu, point to System, and select Export. The Export window appears.
Field: Description:
File to export Enter the name of the file you want to export. The next time you export
a file, the file name and path is displayed in this field by default.
Tips:
The file name should end with the ―.XF1‖ extension unless you are
exporting to Feed Ration Balancer (for example,
MyExportFile1.XF1). If you are exporting to Feed Ration Balancer,
use the ―.XFR‖ extension (such as MyExportFile2.XFR).
If an export file already exists, you can click to search for and
select a file.
Translation File Enter the name and path of a translation file (if necessary).
Refer to the Appendix for more information on translation files.
Drop-down field Click the drop-down field in the middle of the window and select one of
the following options:
Base Ingredients After selecting this option, select each of the
following options as necessary:
Tip: An option is ―selected‖ when a check
mark is displayed. Some options are
selected by default and/or previous
selections. To ―unselect‖ an option,
click on the option to remove the
check mark.
Append to existing transfer file –

Select this option if you have already
exported once today. If you have not
exported yet today, do not select this
option.
Send all items – Select this option if you
want to export all items. If you want to
select specific ingredients to export, do
not select this option.
Ignore Names – Select this option if you
do not want names exported. If you want
to export the ingredient names, do not
select this option.
Field: Description:
Ignore Comments – Select this option if

you do not want comments exported. If
you want to export the comments, do not
select this option.
Select nutrients to export – Select this
option if you want to choose which
nutrients to export. If you do not want to
select specific nutrients to export, do not
select this option.
Export as Overlay Ingredients – Select
this option if you want to export the
ingredients as overlay ingredients. If you
want to export the ingredients as base
ingredients, do not select this option.
Overlay Ingredients After selecting this option, select each of the
check mark.

option.
to export the ingredient names, do not
select this option.
select this option.
Select nutrients to export – Select this
option if you want to choose which
nutrients to export. If you do not want to
select specific nutrients to export, do not
select this option.
Export overlays only – Select this
option if you want to export the overlay
ingredients only. If you want to export
the overlay ingredients as base
NOTE: This option cannot be selected
when the ―Export as Base
Ingredients‖ option is selected.
Field: Description:
Export as Base Ingredients – Select

this option if you want to export the
overlay ingredients as base ingredients. If
you only want to export the overlay
when the ―Export overlays only‖
option is selected.
Then, enter information into each of the

following fields as necessary:
Export from plant – Enter the plant
containing the overlay ingredients you
want to export (or, click to select a
code from the list).
Export to plant – If you are exporting
overlays, enter the plant you want to
export to.
Formula After selecting this option, select each of the
Specifications following options as necessary:
check mark.

option.
select specific formula specifications to
export, do not select this option.
do not want formula specification names
exported. If you want to export the
names, do not select this option.
select this option.
Expand includes – Select this option if
you want to expand any include
ingredients that have been added to the
formula specification. If you do not want
to expand include ingredients, do not
select this option.
Field: Description:
Export overlays only – Select this

option if you want to export the formula
specifications as overlays. If you do not
want to export the formula specifications
as overlays, do not select this option.
when the ―Export as Base Specs‖
option is selected.
Export as Base Specs – Select this
option if you want to export the formula
specifications as base specifications. If
you want to export the formula
specifications as overlays, do not select
this option.
when the ―Export overlays only‖
option is selected.

containing the formula specifications you
want to export (or, click to select a
code from the list).
Export to plant – If you are exporting
overlays, enter the plant you want to
export to.
Stored Formulas After selecting this option, select each of the
check mark.

option.
want to export all stored formulas. If you
want to select specific stored formulas to
do not want stored formulas names
Field: Description:

select this option.
Do not send nutrient values – Select
this option if you do not want to export
nutrient values. If you want to send
nutrient values, do not select this option.

containing the stored formulas you want
to export (or, click to select a code
from the list).
Export to plant – Enter the plant you want
to export to.
Ingredient Prices After selecting this option, select each of the
click on the option to remove the check
mark.

option.
want to export prices for all ingredients. If
you want to select specific ingredients, do
to export the names, do not select this
option.
select this option.
Do not export prices – Select this
option if you do not want prices exported.
If you want prices exported, do not select
this option.
Do not export stock status – Select
this option if you do not want in or out of
stock status exported. If you want to
export the status, do not select this
option.
Field: Description:
Send Add-On Costs – Select this option
if you want to export add-on costs. If you
do not want to export add-on costs, do

containing the ingredient prices you want
to export (or, click to select a code
from the list).
to export to.
All of the Plant After selecting this option, select each of the
check mark.

option.
option.
select this option.
Do not send nutrient values – Select
this option if you do not want to export
nutrient values. If you want to export
nutrient values, do not select this option.

Export from plant – Enter the plant you
want to export from (or, click to select
a code from the list).
to export to.
FRB Ingredients After selecting this option, select each of the
Field: Description:
check mark.

option.
want to export all ingredients. If you want
to select specific ingredients to export, do
do not want ingredient names exported. If
you want to export the names, do not
select this option.
you do not want ingredient comments
comments, do not select this option.

containing the ingredients you want to
export (or, click to select a code from
the list).
to export to.
Plant Definitions After selecting this option, select each of the
check mark.

option.
want to export all plant definitions. If you
want to select specific plants to export, do
option.
Field: Description:
Nutrients After selecting this option, select each of the

check mark.

option.
want to export all nutrients. If you want
to select specific nutrients to export, do
do not want nutrient names exported. If
you want to export the names, do not
select this option.
Species Codes After selecting this option, select each of the
click on the option to remove the check
mark.

option.
do not want species code names
Global Equations After selecting this option, select the Append
to existing transfer file option if you have
already exported once today. If you have not
exported yet today, do not select this option.
Ingredient After selecting this option, select each of the
Equations following options as necessary:
check mark.
Field: Description:

option.
want to export all ingredient equations. If
you want to select specific nutrients to
Mill Mix Setup Data After selecting this option, select each of the
check mark.

option.
Send All Ingredients and Comments –
Select this option if you want to export all
ingredients and comments. If you want to
not select this option or the ―Do not Send
Ingredients or Comments‖ option.
Do not Send Ingredients or
Comments – Select this option if you do
not want to send any ingredients or
comments. If you want to select specific
ingredients to export do not select this
option or the ―Send All Ingredients and
Comments‖ option. (Both options must be
unselected.)
Ignore Comments – This option is
available when both the ―Send all
ingredients and comments‖ and the ―Do
not send ingredients and comments‖
options are unselected. Select this option
if you do not want to export any
comments. If you want to select specific
comments to export, do not select this
option.
Miscellaneous Select the Append to existing transfer file
System Level Items option if you have already exported once
today. If you have not exported yet today, do
Field: Description:
Ingredient Linking Select the Append to existing transfer file
Specifications option if you have already exported once
Formula Linking Select the Append to existing transfer file
Specifications option if you have already exported once
3. When all selections have been made, click 

. Depending on the selections you have
made, you may be asked to select ingredients, comments, etc. When all selections have
been made, the export begins. When the export is complete, a Brill Formulation
Maintenance window appears and displays the name and path of the export file.
Tip: Refer to the ―Appendix‖ for a detailed description of the import/export file.
4. Click OK to return to the Export window.
Chapter 4: Mill Mix

The Mill Mix option produces a powerful report that can actually be used by the feed mill to
produce the feed rations. The report is customizable so that you can tailor the information in the
report and the format of the report to suit the unique needs of your business.
Setup Groups
The first step in setting up the Mill Mix report is to create groups of ingredients, which are
used to separate ingredients on the report. To set up groups:
1. On the main window, click the Mill Mix menu and select Setup Groups. The Set Up Mill
Group Names window appears.
2. Enter information into each of the following columns of the table:
Tip: Start on a new row for each group you want to create.
Group Name Enter the name of the group (up to 12 characters).
Tip: After you‘ve defined each of the groups you want to use, you
can use the Define Mill Ingredients option to determine which
ingredients belong to each group you‘ve created. Refer to the
―Define Mill Ingredients‖ section for more information.
Accumulate Select this option to have these groups accumulated for the Mill Mix
report.
Dbl Space Select this option if you want a double space placed between each
ingredient. If you do not select this option, ingredients will be single
spaced.
Amount This column sets the level of accuracy for the ingredient amounts
reported in the Mill Mix report.
Click this field and select the number of decimal places you want to
use (0–4).
Percent This column sets the level of accuracy for the ingredient percentages
reported in the Mill Mix report.
Click this field and select the number of decimal places you want to
use (0–4).
Separate Select this option if you want this group of ingredients to print on a
separate set of pages (starting with a new page and ending on a page
without any ingredients from other groups).
3. In the ―Batch Weights‖ area, enter up to six batch weights you want reported on the Mill
Mix report.

Edit Mill Comments
The ―Edit Mill Comments‖ option allows you to add a comment to a specific formula that may
not be included as Stored Formula comments (such as instructions for the production
personnel that are unique to a particular formula).
To add comments:
1. Click the Mill Mix menu and select Edit Mill Comments. The Formula Comments window
appears.
2. Click the Code field, enter the formula code and then press the TAB key (or click to
3. In the white box, enter the comment (up to 64 characters) as you want it to appear when
printed on the report.
Tip: When the Mill Mix report is printed, this comment will appear after the total batch
weight line for the formula specified in the Code field.
4. Click  to save the comment.

Define Mill Ingredients

After ingredient groups have been set up using the Setup Groups option, you can assign
ingredients to each of those groups using the Define Mill Ingredients option.
To assign ingredients to each group:
1. Click the Mill Mix menu and select Define Mill Ingredients. The Define Mill Ingredients
window appears.
Field: Description:
Ingredient Code Enter the ingredient code you want to add to a group.
Tip: To select an ingredient code from a list, or to select more
than one ingredient code, click .
Group Number Click this field and select the group you want to add the ingredient
to. (Groups are set up using the Setup Groups option.)
Field: Description:
Bin Number Enter the bin number. (The Bin Number field may be printed on the
Mill Mix report or simply used to control the sorting of ingredients.)
Batcher Code Enter the batcher code for this ingredient. (The Batcher Code field
will be printed on the Mill Mix report.)
Drop-down field Click the drop-down field and select one of the following options:
No splitting of Select this option if you do not want the
ingredient ingredient split into two different groups.
Split out amount Select this option if you want to remove the
amount in the Amount field from the first
ingredient group and place it in a second
ingredient group. For example, you may
have 1,072 pounds of corn in a formula in
the Bulk group (Group 2). You want to
remove 500 pounds and place it in the Hand
Add group (Group 1) to act as a carrier. To
do this: select the ―Split out amount‖ option,
enter ―500‖ in the Amount field, and enter ―1
– Hand Add‖ in the second Group Number
field. (The Group Number field at the top of
the window would be set to ―2 – Bulk‖.)
Remove Select this option if you want to leave the
multiples of nearest multiple of a given value in the first
amount group and place the remainder in a second
group. For example, you may have 125
pounds of meat meal in your Bag Dump
group (Group 3) in a formula. The meat meal
comes in 60-pound bags. You want any
amount that is not divisible by 60 put into
the Hand Add group (Group 1). In this case,
the nearest multiple of 60 is 120, which
leaves a remaining 5 pounds to be placed in
the Hand Add group. To do this: select the
―Remove multiples of amount‖ option, enter
―60‖ in the Amount field, and set the second
Group Number field to ―1 – Hand Add‖. (The
Group Number field at the top of the window
would be set to ―3 – Bag Dump‖.)
Do split based Select this option if you want to set a
on threshold threshold for the ingredient. If the amount is
greater than the threshold, the entire
ingredient is left in the first group. For
example, if you always want salt to be hand-
added when the amount is less than six
pounds, and if it is greater than six pounds,
you want it to be added with the other Bulk
ingredients (Group 2), you select the ―Do
split based on threshold‖ option, enter ―6‖ in
the Amount field, and set the second Group
Number field to ―2 – Bulk‖. (The Group
Number field at the top of the window would
be set to ―1 – Hand Add‖.)
Field: Description:
Amount If the ingredient will be split into two groups, enter the amount. The
amount you enter will be based on the option selected in the drop-
down list. Refer to the description of the drop-down list for more
information.
Ingredient Code If the ingredient will be split into two groups, enter the ingredient
code you want the ―second‖ portion of the ingredient to appear
under on the Mill Mix report (or, click this field and then click to
Group Number If the ingredient will be split into two groups, enter the second
group number in this field. The remaining portion of group 1 will be
placed in this group.
Bin Number If you want to assign a unique bin number to the split ingredient,
enter the bin number in this field.
3. When you have finished entering information, click  to save the changes.
Removing an Ingredient From a Group

To remove an ingredient from a group:
1. Click the Mill Mix menu and select Define Mill Ingredients. The Define Mill
Ingredients window appears.
2. In the Ingredient Code field, enter the ingredient code you want to delete and press
TAB (or click to select a code from the list).
3. Click . The Brill Formulation Maintenance box appears.

4. Click OK to remove the ingredient from the group and return to the Define Mill
Ingredients window.
Mill Ingredient Report

The Mill Ingredient Report lists all defined mill ingredients within the currently selected plant
(displayed in the Current Plant field on the main window).
To print the Mill Ingredient report:
1. Click the Mill Mix menu and select Mill Ingredient Report. The Mill Ingredient Report

on the report.
If you want to
preview the report Comments entered here will
before printing it, print just below the header and
click the View
Report On The
Screen option box.
To have the window
Close after
Tip: You can make additional changes to the report by clicking . The Report
Template Properties window appears, allowing you to change the report template
settings. Prior to printing a report, you may want to review options available on the
Sections/Options tab. The Sections/Options tab often contains several different
options that allow you to customize the information displayed on the report.
2. When all settings have been specified, click 

to view the report. The preview window
appears allowing you to view and print the report. (Refer to the ―Printing a Report‖ section
for more detailed information.)
Mill Mix Report

The Mill Mix report is the report that you can give to the feed mill to produce the feed rations.
Setting up the report

The Mill Mix report has several options that allow you to customize the report to meet your
specific needs. If you have never printed the report before or if you need to change the
report settings, refer to the following sections:
Comments
To specify the types of comments you want included on the report, click the
Comments menu and select an option from the drop-down list.
Tips:
The check mark to left of an option indicates that the option is selected.
If you save the template changes when prompted, this setting will be saved
and used by default the next time you print the report. If you do not save the
template changes, the original setting will be used the next time you print the
report (unless you choose to change it).
Sort Keys
The Sort Key menus allow you to determine how you want the report sorted. You can
apply up to three different sorts using each of the following menus:
Sort Key 1 – This menu option allows you to specify what the report will be
sorted by first.
1. Click the Sort Key 1 menu and select one of the following
options: Group Order, Bin Order; Amount Order, or
Code Order.
2. Click the Sort Key 1 menu again and select either Ascending
or Descending order (to determine the sort order).
Sort Key 2 – If you want to apply a second sorting option, this menu allows
you to specify what the report will be sorted by second. (If you
do not want to apply a second sort, click this menu and select
Don’t Care.)
Code Order.
Sort Key 3 – If you want to apply a third sorting option, this menu allows
you to specify what the report will be sorted by last. (If you do
not want to apply a third sort, click this menu and select Don’t
Care.)
Code Order.
Settings
The settings menu allows you to set up default information for the report. These
default settings are used when an ingredient has not been set up using the Mill
Ingredient Definition option.
To set up default information:
1. Click the Settings menu and select Defaults. The Mill Report Defaults window
appears.
Field: Description:
Default Group Enter a default value for the group to which you want the
undefined mill ingredients placed.
Default Bin Enter a default value for the bin to which you want the
undefined mill ingredients placed.
Field: Description:
Balance Ingredient Enter a default value for the Balance Ingredient that you
want the undefined mill ingredients assigned. This is the
ingredient used to balance the batch weight when the
formula is rounded when printing the mill report. When
this is not specified, the highest inclusion ingredient is
used to balance to the batch weight.
Mill Setup Plant Enter a default value for the setup plant to which you want
the undefined mill ingredients assigned. Companies with
many plants can do all the mill setup in only one plant and
use that setup plant when printing formula from any other
plant. As long as all plants use the same Groups (in the
same order), the same Batch Weights and the same
Ingredient definitions; this setup can be done in only one
plant. This reduces the initial setup time and maintenance
over time.
3. Click  to save the changes and return to the Mill Mix Report window.
Printing the Mill Mix Report

1. Click the Mill Mix menu and select Mill Mix Report. The Mill Mix Report window

on the report.
If you want to
preview the report
before printing it,
click the View
Report On The
Screen option box.
To have the window
Close after
2. In the ―Report Comments‖ area, enter any comments you may want to print at the top of
the report.
3. Click the drop-down field and select an option (Stored Formulas, Solution File,
Formula Set, or Formula Set Using Formula Amounts).
4. If you want to change the template, click the Current Report Template field and select a
template from the drop-down list.
Tip: You can make additional changes to the report by clicking . The Report
Template Properties window appears, allowing you to change the report template
settings. Prior to printing a report, you may want to review options available on the
Sections/Options tab. The Sections/Options tab often contains several different
options that allow you to customize the information displayed on the report.
5. If you want to preview the report before printing it, select the View Report On The
Screen option (if it hasn‘t already been selected).
6. If you want the window to close automatically after the report is printed, click the Close
after printing option.
Field: Description:
Override Batch Weight #1 This field allows you to enter a batch weight for the
Amount 1 column and will override any value entered in
the Setup Groups window. (It will also override the
formula weight if nothing has been entered in the Setup
Groups window).
Number of Nutrients per Row Allows you to enter the number of nutrients you want to
display on each row. Enter a value between 1 and 100.
Override Species Code Allows you to enter a species code.
8. When all settings have been specified, click to view the report. The preview window
appears allowing you to view and print the report. (Refer to the ―Printing a Report‖ section
for more detailed information.)
Chapter 5: Interfaces
Feed Management Systems has several different interfaces, allowing Brill Formulation to transfer
data and processes quickly and easily to other supported programs. At the publication of this
manual the following interfaces are supported by Brill Formulation:
FeedWorks(ACECO) Agris
Beta Raven CMC
EPE Thede Ward
Feed Mill Manager dBC
Flocon Sterling
Repete Matiss Autobatch
WEM M-Tech
Datastor Microsoft Excel
Each of these interfaces has its own Instruction Manual. Please contact your Brill Formulation
support specialist for additional information.
Part 7: Shortcuts
The Shortcuts menu displays the following options.

Tip: You can also create your own shortcuts to other programs. Refer to the ―Define Shortcuts‖
section to learn how.
Chapter 1: Feed Tags

If you have purchased Feed Tags, this option allows you to open Feed Tags without logging out of
Brill Formulation Maintenance.
Chapter 2: Optimization
If you purchased Brill Formulation Multi-Blend, this option allows you to open Brill Formulation
Optimization with Multi-Blend without logging out of Brill Formulation Maintenance. (If you have
not purchased Multi-Blend, this option is not available.)
Chapter 3: Optimization (No Multi-Blend)

This option allows you to open Brill Formulation Optimization without logging out of Brill
Formulation Maintenance.
Part 8: Help
Chapter 1: Display Help
Brill Formulation Help contains information and instructions on using Brill Formulation. You can
search for information about a specific topic or save your favorite topics for quick and easy
reference in the future.
To display Brill Formulation Help: click the Help menu and select Display Help.
Chapter 2: Display User Manual

The Display User Manual option allows you to view and/or print a traditional instruction manual for
Brill Formulation.
To display the Brill Formulation Instruction Manual, click the Help menu and select Display User
Manual.
Chapter 3: Support
There are two options in the Support drop-down menu for Brill Formulation Maintenance. They are
―Send Email to Support‖ and ―Visit the FMS Web Site.‖
Send Email to Support

This option allows you to send an email directly to a Brill Formulation customer support
specialist. When you select Send Email to Support a new email window is opened and the To
address is automatically filled in with the appropriate email address for support.
Visit the FMS Web Site

This option allows you to view Feed Management Systems official web site. If you log in to the
web site, you can view the latest announcements, download product updates, submit requests
to customer support, and more.
Chapter 4: About
On the main window, click the Help menu and select About. The About Box window appears,
allowing you to view session, version, copyright, and contact information.
Tip: To view a report of the options set up for your system, click . The report is displayed
in Microsoft Notepad. This report provides more detailed information on system settings and
available options.
When you‘ve finished viewing information, click  to select the plant and return to the main
window.
Using Brill Optimization

Overview
Brill Formulation Optimization allows you to create and optimize stored/production formulas using
formula specifications created in Brill Formulation Maintenance. By optimizing your formulas, you can
create formulas that are cost-effective (based on price and, if you are using Multi-Bend, production
costs) without sacrificing nutritional conditions.
There are two primary options within Brill Formulation Optimization that allow you to optimize
formulas:
Professional Nutritionist – This option allows you to make view/change an individual formula
and optimize it. Professional Nutritionist can also be used to create
―what if?‖ scenarios…allowing you to make changes without
changing the actual formula if necessary.
Batch Optimization – This option allows you to optimize many different formulas (within
a formula set) at one time.
Refer to the following sections for more information.
Part 1: Professional Nutritionist

Chapter 1: Professional Nutritionist
Overview
1. On the main window, click (on the toolbar). The Professional Nutritionist box appears
(see picture below):

Field: Description:
Plant Displays the plant. To change the plant, click to select a plant from
the list.
Tips:
This field cannot be blank – you must enter a plant code. The Spec
Plant and Pricing Plant fields may be left blank.
When both the Spec Plant and Pricing Plant fields are blank, this
field determines the source of the formula specification, ingredient
nutrients, and ingredient prices.
When the Spec Plant contains a plant code and the Pricing Plant field
is blank, this field determines the source of ingredient nutrients and
ingredient prices. The Spec Plant field determines the source of the
formula specification.
When the Spec Plant is blank and the Pricing Plant field contains a
code, this field determines the source of the formula specification
and ingredient nutrients. The Pricing Plant is the source of ingredient
prices.
contain a plant code, the Plant Code field determines the source of
ingredient nutrients. The Spec Plant field determines the source of
the formula specification. The Pricing Plant field determines the
source of ingredient prices.
Formula Displays the formula code. (See the ―Tips‖ in the Plant field description
Code for additional information.)
To change the formula code, click to select a code from the list.
Spec Plant Displays the spec plant. (See the ―Tips‖ in the Plant field description for
additional information.)
Pricing Plant Displays the pricing plant. (See the ―Tips‖ in the Plant field description
for additional information.)
Formula Click this field and select one of the following options:
Source Formula Specifications
Stored Formulas
Combine formula specs into new formula
Tip: Refer to the ―Combine formula specifications into new
formula‖ section for more information about this option.
Archived Formula Specifications
Archived Formula with Archived Prices
3. Click  to continue. The Brill Formulation Optimization window appears (see picture
below).
Toolbar
Ingredient/
Nutrient
table
Click on the
drop-down
field above
this table to
change the
display from
ingredients to
nutrients and
vice versa.
Use the Views toolbar to create customized views. By creating

views, you can display the columns in the order you specify and
quickly switch between views to monitor the information in a
format you desire.
To create a new view:
1. Click on a numbers button (0-9).
2. Arrange the columns as you want to see them.
3. Click save the view. A new box appears.

4. Enter a name for the view and then click OK. The name you
entered is displayed when the cursor hovers over the button.
4. Whether the solution is feasible or infeasible, you now have the ability to manipulate the
parameters of your restrictions. (If the solution is feasible, this enables you to determine
whether your changes can bring about a greater savings. If the solution is infeasible, you
can make necessary modifications to create a feasible set.) Making changes on this
window is similar to making changes using Professional Nutritionist (with a couple of
exceptions described below). Refer to the following sections for more information about
the columns of information and additional options.
Switch Between Ingredients and Nutrients

If you want to view the nutrient amounts in this formula, click the toolbar. The nutrient value
information is displayed. To switch back to the ingredient listing click on the button again.
View Ingredients and Nutrients in Split Screen Mode

To view both ingredients and nutrients at the same time, click (on the toolbar). Ingredients
are displayed in the upper pane, nutrients are displayed in the lower pane (see picture below).
Ingredients
are displayed
at the top.
Nutrients are
displayed on
the bottom.
Right-Click Options
There are several options within Professional Nutritionist that are available by right-clicking on
the Ingredient/Nutrient table. This section details the functions that are only available by
right-clicking on the table. (Additional options that are available using the menu options or
toolbar buttons are explained in other sections.)
Delete Selected Row

To remove a single ingredient or nutrient:
1. Right-click on the row you want to delete and select Delete Selected Rows. A message
box appears.
2. Click OK to delete the row.
To remove a multiple ingredients or nutrients:

1. Press and hold the CTRL key while you click on the first column (to the left of the Code
column) of each row you want to delete.
2. When all rows have been selected, right-click on the table and select Delete Selected
Rows. A message box appears.
Add Rows
To add a new ingredient or nutrient:
1. Right-click on the table and select Add Rows. The ―Add new items to specification‖
window appears.
2. Enter the code of the ingredient you want to add, and then click .
Tips:
To add more than one ingredient, or to look up the ingredient code, click .
The Select Ingredients window appears. Select the codes you want to add, and
then click . The ingredients are added and you are returned to the
Professional Nutritionist window.
After adding a premix ingredient, you must optimize the formula before you
can expand it.
Disable Current Ingredient And Delete From Spec

Tip: This option is not available when nutrients are displayed in the Professional
Nutritionist window. If you are currently viewing nutrients, you can display
ingredients by clicking the drop-down field above the table and selecting
Ingredients for {plant/formula}.
To temporarily disable an ingredient for this optimization, right-click on the table and
select Disable Current Ingredient and Delete From Spec. The code N/A appears in
the Minimum and Maximum fields of the ingredient, indicating this ingredient is not
available for this particular optimization.
NOTE: If you save the formula specification while the ingredient is disabled, the disabled
ingredient is no longer part of the newly saved formula specification.
Enable Current Ingredient And Add To Spec

To enable an ingredient for this optimization (making it available for use within the
formula), right-click on the table and select Enable Current Ingredient and Add To
Spec. If the code had been disabled, the ―N/A‖ is removed from the Minimum and
Maximum fields of the ingredient, indicating this ingredient is now available for this
particular optimization.
NOTE: If you save the formula specification while the ingredient is enabled, the newly
enabled ingredient is added and saved when the formula specification is saved.
Edit Ingredient
This option allows you to change ingredient information quickly and easily within
Professional Nutritionist.
To edit the nutritional information relating to a specific ingredient:

1. Right-click on the ingredient you want to change and select Edit Ingredient. The Edit
Ingredient window appears.
2. Make the necessary changes to the ingredient.
3. If you want to make the changes to the ingredient permanent (rather than just for this
particular optimization), click .
4. When you have finished making changes, click  to save the changes and return to
the Professional Nutritionist window.
Edit Nutrient
Tip: This option is not available when ingredients are displayed in the Professional
Nutritionist window. If you are currently viewing ingredients, you can display
nutrients by clicking the drop-down field above the table and selecting Nutrients
for {plant/formula}.
To edit information relating to a specific nutrient:

1. Right-click on the nutrient you want to change and select Edit Nutrient. The Edit
Nutrient window appears.
2. Make the necessary changes to the nutrient.
the Professional Nutritionist window.
NOTE: Changes are not written to the permanent file.
Change Stock Status

To change the status of an ingredient to ―Out of Stock‖ or ―In Stock‖:

Right-click on the Price field or the * field (to the right of the Price field) and select Change
Stock Status. When an ingredient is ―Out of Stock‖ the stock field (*) displays –0. If
nothing is displayed in the stock field (*), the ingredient is considered to be ―In Stock.‖
NOTE: The minimum field is cleared when the ingredient is determined to be out of stock.
If no changes are made to the minimum, then placing that ingredient back into
stock restores the original minimum. If the formula specification is saved, the
original minimum is restored automatically. Manually placing a minimum on an
―Out of Stock‖ ingredient forces that ingredient into the solution as all manually
placed minimums are always enforced.
Expanding Premixes
If a premix is included in the formula, you can expand the list of ingredients using either
of the following options:
NOTE: The formula must be optimized in order to see these options. For example, if you
add or remove a row, you must click (to optimize the formula) before these
options are available.
Expand as Premix – This option allows you to expand a single premix.

Expand All Premix Ingredients – This option allows you to expand all premix
ingredients in the formula, including premixes
stored within premixes.
Refer to the following sections for additional information.
Expand as Premix
You can expand any premix listed in the ingredients table. If more than one premix
exists in the formula, you can use this option as many times as necessary to expand
additional premixes (including premixes within premixes). Keep in mind that you must
re-optimize the formula after expanding each premix.
To expand a premix, right-click on the premix you want to expand and select Expand
as Premix. The Expand as Premix window appears.
NOTE: If you select an ingredient that is not a premix, a warning dialog box
appears and asks if you are sure you want to proceed. (If you do not want
to expand the ingredient, click OK and you are returned to the
optimization window. If you select OK the Expand as Premix window
appears and you can complete the process described in the following
instructions.)
1. If you want to change the Plant and Formula codes, enter the new codes or click
to select codes from a list.
2. Click  to expand the premix into the ingredients of the formula in which you are
working.
Reminder: If you want to expand another premix, you must first re-optimize
the formula after expanding the first premix before you can expand
the next premix.
Expand All Premix Ingredients

This option allows you to expand all premix ingredients in the formula. Note, however,
that premixes within premixes are not automatically expanded. You can you can use
this option as many times as necessary to expand each premix layer.
1. Right-click on the premix you want to expand and select Expand All Premix
Ingredients. The Expand All Premix Ingredients window appears.
2. If you want to change the Plant code, enter the new code or click to select a
code from a list.
3. If you want to have the ingredient specifications fixed, select the Fix Ingredient
Specifications option. (A check mark indicates that the option is selected.)
4. Click 
to expand the premix into the ingredients of the formula in which you are
working.
the next premix.
Merge Specifications
To combine the specifications of multiple formulas:
1. Right-click on the table and select Merge Specifications. The Merge Specifications
window appears.
2. If you want to change the Plant and Formula codes, enter the new codes or click to
select codes from a list.
Merge Ingredients Select this option to merge ingredients from the formula
specified in the Formula Code field into the formula you are
currently working with.
Merge Nutrients Select this option to merge nutrients from the formula
Replace duplicate Select this option if you want to replace duplicate
specifications specifications.
4. Click to merge the specifications.
Edit Ingredient Combinations

To edit your ingredient combinations, right-click on the table and select Edit Ingredient
Combinations. The Ingredient Combinations window appears. (Refer to the ―Ingredient
Combinations‖ section within Brill Maintenance: Part 2: Chapter 8 for more information.)
Create Comments
To add a comment to the formula specification:
1. Right-click on the table and select Create Comments. The Formula Spec Comment
window appears.
2. Enter the comment you want to add, and then click  to save your comment and
return to the previous window.
Save Prices to Disk

To save prices:
1. Right-click on the Price field and select Save Prices to Disk. The Save Prices to Disk
window appears, which allows you to make changes to ingredient prices and then save
those changes without returning to the Maintenance window of Brill Formulation.
2. To save prices for specific ingredients: In the Selected column, click the check box for
the ingredient price you want to save.
3. After you have made your selections, click 

to save those prices directly to Brill
Formulation without having to make the price changes in Brill Formulation –
Maintenance.
Perform Parametric Analysis

Parametric analysis allows you to view potential changes to a solution in a step-by-step
approach. For example, you might want to determine the point at which corn becomes
infeasible.
You can do a parametric analysis on a price, ingredient minimum or maximum, or nutrient
minimum or maximum.
To perform a parametric analysis:
1. Right-click on the ingredient you want to analyze and then click Perform Parametric
Analysis.
NOTE: You must be on either the Price, Minimum, or Maximum column when you
right-click. (Otherwise, the Perform Parametric Analysis option will not be
displayed.)
2. In the setup window, enter a beginning value and an ending value for a range you
would like to analyze.
3. Enter the size of the step between analyses you want to create.
4. Click  to review the parametric analysis based on your setup criteria.

Ingredients/Nutrients Table - Quick Reference
This section describes each column of the table on the Brill Formulation Optimization window.
Code Displays the ingredient or nutrient code. This column cannot be
changed.
Name Displays the description of the ingredient or nutrient. This column
cannot be changed.
Solution Amount Displays the solution amount. You may edit the amount by
percentage or actual. Click to change from percentage of
formula to actual ingredient weight in the Amounts column.
Price Displays the price of the ingredient or nutrient.
* Indicates stock status. When the ingredient or nutrient is in stock,
this field is blank. When the ingredient or nutrient is out of stock,
this field displays –O.
Min/Max The Minimum and Maximum columns allow you to give the program
some flexibility in finding the least cost solution to the formulation
requirements. In this example, we enter minimums on a number of
ingredients to allow the program to meet the nutrient requirements.
Click to edit nutrient minimums and maximums.
Previous Solution Displays the last values before optimization took place.
Solution Difference Displays the difference in values caused by the last optimization.
Stored Amount Displays the values in the Stored Formula.
Low Cost These columns are break points based on weight restrictions only.
These price points are valid if the price is the only change made:
Low Amount
Low Cost – Displays the price at which more of the
High Cost ingredient would be used.
High Amount Low Amount – Displays the amount that would be used at the
Lo Cost.
High Cost – Displays the price at which the program would
use less of an ingredient.
High Amount – Displays the amount that would be used at the
Hi Cost.
Rest Cost The Restriction cost is what the program determined it cost to place
a minimum on that ingredient. It can apply to maximums if the
program would like to use more of an ingredient. It is the current
cost of that ingredient/nutrient per batch minus the replacement
cost.
UnRounded Amount These are the unrounded values.
UnRounded Previous
Sensitivity When viewing a solution with the Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis
option turned on, the sensitivity information is displayed in the Extra
Value, Extra, Savings Value, and Savings columns for ingredients at
the Minimum or Maximum.
The extra cost will tell you the difference when the ingredient/
nutrient is allowed to change to the number displayed in the Extra
Value column. The savings column displays the difference when the
ingredient/nutrient is allowed to change to the number displayed in
the Savings Value column.
NOTE: By default, the Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis option is
turned off. To turn on this feature at a system level, open
Foundation Utilities, click the File menu and select Edit
Database Configuration. Then, click the Options tab and
select the Use Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis for Single
option.
Each user may also turn the Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis
option on (or off) by clicking the System menu, selecting
Options, and then selecting Use Enhanced Sensitivity
Analysis for Single.
Combine Formula Specifications into New Formula

If the Formula Source field is set to ―Combine formula specifications into new formula‖ on the
Professional Nutritionist window, the Formula Combine window appears (after clicking ). 
The window does not display any formula specifications at this point – you must provide the
formula specifications you want combined and the percentage of each formula you want
considered when the program combines the formulas.
To add a formula specification:
1. Click (in the lower left corner of the window). The ―Select 1 Plant for Formulas‖ window
appears.
2. Click on the plant that‘s associated with the specification you want to add. A checkmark
appears in the selected column to indicate that the plant has been selected.
3. Click . The ―Select Formulas for Adding‖ window appears.

4. Click on each formula you want included in the combination process. A checkmark appears
in the selected column to indicate that the formula has been selected.
5. Click 
. The Formula Combine window appears, and each of the selected formulas is
displayed in the list.
6. In the Percent column, enter the percentage of the formula you want to include in the
combined formula specification. (The percentage of inclusion for a formula specification is
multiplied by the ingredient and nutrient restriction. Then, the result is added together,
which becomes the new formula specification that is then loaded into Professional
Nutritionist. You may refine the formula specification in Professional Nutritionist and then
save the specification and production formula.)
Tip: When you enter a percentage a ―100‖ button appears. This button can be used to
calculate the percentage of the last formula in the list. For example, if three
formulas are listed, and the Percentage column for the first two formulas is set to
15% and 20% respectively, you can click the ―100‖ button to calculate the
percentage of inclusion (65%) for the third formula.
7. If you want to print a report for record of was used as input formulas, ingredients, and
percentages before actually combining the formulas and ingredients into the finished
formula, complete the following steps:
a. Click . The Buffer Combine Report appears.

b. In the ―Report Comments‖ area, enter any comments you want included on the
report. (The comments will be printed just below the header information.)
c. To change template options, click . The Report Template Properties window

appears, where you can change header/footers, graphics, fonts, printers, etc. When
you‘ve finished making changes, click  to return to the Buffer Combine Report
window.
d. By default, a preview window is displayed so you can review the report prior to
printing it. If you do not want to view the report prior to printing it, click the View
report on the screen option. The checkmark is removed.
e. By default, the preview window is closed after you print it. If you do not want the
preview window to close automatically after to printing it, click the Close After
Printing option. The checkmark is removed.
f. When all options have been set and you are ready to print, click .
If you chose to preview the report, the preview window is displayed. To print the
report, click . Then, click the Close button to close the preview window and
return to the Formula Combine window.
If you did not choose to preview the report, the report is printed and the Formula
Combine window appears.
8. Click 
. The Professional Nutritionist window appears and the newly created formula
specification is displayed.
Once the Professional Nutritionist window appears, you can treat this formula specification
the same as any other and the newly created formula.
Optimize
Optimization is the heart of the Brill Formulation program. When a formula spec is optimized,
the system takes its ingredient and nutrient requirements and attempts to create the least
expensive formula ration that fits the given parameters.
To optimize a formula, review reports and determine which changes need to be made, if any.
Then, change the columns of information as necessary and click . The system recalculates
the available ingredients, amounts, etc. and presents a feasible formula solution.
Optimize and Verify
Optimize and Verify is an optional feature of Brill Formulation. If you are interested
in purchasing this option, or to learn more, contact your sales representative.
Optimize and Verify is an optional module within Brill Formulation Optimization that works with
Feed Tags and allows you to test the medications that are included in a formula. You‘ll know
quickly whether a formula meets your nutritional requirements as well as federal and state
regulatory restrictions (which are contained within the Master Medications List of Feed Tags).
NOTE: This process does not result in the creation of a Feed Tag, but only reports to you
whether a formula will generate a valid Feed Tag, so that you do not have to optimize
a formula, save that solution, and then take the saved formula solution into Feed Tags
to verify that the formula is a valid medicated formula. The Optimize and Verify option
saves time and increases productivity as both functions (Optimize and Verify) can be
performed with a single click of a button.
Setting up Optimize and Verify

The setup required for this optional module is fairly simple. However, you must first
ensure that the Security File you are using for Brill Formulation has the Verify module
enabled. If not, please contact your sales representative or a Brill Formulation customer
support specialist to purchase this optional module. Once you have a security file that has
this module enabled, you can enable the option for use with this application as follows:
1. Open FMS Foundation Utilities. (Click the Windows Start button, point to Programs,
point to Feed Management Systems, point to Brill Formulation, and click FMS
Foundation Utilities.)
2. Log into the FMS Foundation Utilities program using your Brill Formulation User ID and
password.
3. Click the File menu and select Edit Database Configuration.
4. Click the Options tab. The list of user-controlled options appears.
5. If the Verify Medications option is not already selected, click on it to select it. (A check
mark appears in the check box to the left of the option to indicate that the option is
selected.)
6. Click to save your changes.

7. Click to exit the FMS Foundation Utilities program.
8. The next step is to ensure that you go through the proper setup of the Feed Tags
program in conjunction with this particular Brill Formulation database. Please refer to
the Feed Tags User Manual for the proper setup of Feed Tags.
Once the Feed Tags program is properly set up to work with your desired Brill
Formulation database, you are now ready to use the Verify function of Brill Formulation.
Using Optimize and Verify

In Professional Nutritionist, proceed with the normal formulation of a selected formula file.
Once you have added the necessary ingredients, including medicated ingredients, you may
verify the medications included in your formula by clicking (or by clicking the File
menu and selecting Optimize and Verify). The formula is optimized and verified. If the
formula fails to meet the medicated restrictions (in the Master Medications List of Feed
Tags), an alert box appears and notifies you of the problem.
This provides the option of viewing a report of the failed verification. If you are adjusting a
formula and know how to resolve the error, select No to return to Professional Nutritionist
and adjust the content of your formula.
If you do not know how to resolve the error, select Yes to generate a report of the failed
verification. The report provides the Plant Code, Formula Code, Nutrient Code, Nutrient
Name, Value in the formula, and a Compare value to help determine appropriate changes.
The report also specifies the error with written text toward the bottom of the report. Using
this information, you may plan any changes to the formula needed to ensure that the
formula meets regulatory requirements. Once you are done with the report, close it and
you are then returned to the Professional Nutritionist to continue work on the formula.
NOTE: If the formula meets the medicated requirements outlined in the Master
Medications List, no alert box or other information is displayed related to the
verification of the formula. You are only notified of problems when a formula does
not meet the requirements when you select Optimize and Verify.
Store Solution
The Store Solution option allows you to create a stored formula, which is an optimized version
of the formula specification that you can send to production. How is this different than using
the Save Solution option? The Save Solution option allows you to save the changes that have
been made within Professional Nutritionist up to this point; however, the formula will not be
saved permanently to a stored formula that can be sent to production. If you close
Professional Nutritionist, the changes you made will still be lost unless you use the Store
Solution option.
Tip: Formulas that are ―Infeasible‖ cannot be stored using the Store Solution option.
However, you can save the changes you‘ve made so far using the Save Solution option.
To store the solution, complete the following steps:

1. Click the File menu and select Store Solution. The Save Stored Formula window
appears. The current plant and formula specification code are displayed in the Plant and
Formula Code fields.
2. To change the plant (if you want it to be different than the formula spec), click the Plant
field and enter a new plant code, or click to select a Plant code from a list.
3. To change the formula code, click the Formula Code field and enter a new formula code,
or click to select a formula code from a list.
Check to save as Select this option if you do not want to replace the
temporary archived formula current stored formula being used for production. This
option will only work if the Archive option is activated.
Check to edit stored comments Select this option if you want to add or change any
notes you have made on this specification before
creating the stored formula.
Do Pellet Creation Select this option if you have defined a pellet premix
and you want the pellet formulas saved when this
stored formula is saved.
Save Formula Spec Select this option if you want to save the formula
specifications when you create the stored formula. The
stored formula and formula specification are saved to
the same plant/formula entered in the Plant and
5. Click to create the stored formula. If a stored formula already exists with the same
plant and formula code, a message appears asking if you want to overwrite it. Click OK to
overwrite the existing stored formula, or click Cancel to return to the Save Stored
Formula window.
Parametrics
infeasible.
minimum or maximum.
Analysis.
NOTE: You must be on either the Price, Minimum, or Maximum column when you right-
click. (Otherwise, the Perform Parametric Analysis option will not be displayed.)
2. In the setup window, enter a beginning value and an ending value for a range you would
like to analyze.
Save Formula Spec

To save a solution back to the original formula specification:
1. Click the File menu and select Save Formula Spec. The Save Formula Specification
window appears.
2. If necessary, change the plant location and formula code.
3. Click  . When updating the original formula specification, the formula code must match.
If it does, a message is displayed to warn you that you are about to overwrite the original
specification. To continue and overwrite the original formula specification, click Yes. (If
you do not want to overwrite the original, click Cancel to return to the Save Formula
Specification window without saving changes.)
Save Solution
The solution file may be saved from the Professional Nutritionist. Reports allowing the user to
print from the solution are printed by selecting the BUFFER.MLS file.
Close Set
To close the set that is currently open:
1. Click the File menu and select Close Set. A new dialog box appears.
2. To continue with closing the set, click Yes. The set is closed and you are returned to a
blank Professional Nutritionist window. (Clicking No will return you to the Professional
Nutritionist window without closing the set.)
Tip: You can add the Close Set button to a tool bar by completing the following steps:
1. Right-click on the toolbar area of the window and a pop-up menu appears.
2. Click Customize the toolbar(s). The Toolbar Customization window appears.
3. Click on the Commands tab.
4. In the Categories List (on the left), click The File Tools option. A list of commands
appears to the right.
5. Scroll down the list until you locate the Close Set option.
6. Click and hold on the Close Set icon and then drag it to where you want it on the
toolbar on the Professional Nutritionist window.
Tip: Make sure the position of the button is where you want it before you drop it to
the toolbar. To ensure you have the correct location, a highlight bar will
appear on the toolbar to indicate the location of the icon. (The bar will not
appear if you are not pointing to a toolbar.)
7. When the button has been created, click the Close on the Toolbar Customization
window to close the window and return to the Professional Nutritionist window.
Chapter 2: Creating Premixes

When one plant makes a premix or concentrate and distributes it through formulas in other plants,
it may be necessary or prudent to save the premix as an ingredient. Brill Formulation allows you
to save a premix or a partial premix within Professional Nutritionist.
If you have saved a partial premix, Brill Formulation –Optimization also allows you to directly
reload Professional Nutritionist with the production formula containing the premix. The production
formula enters Professional Nutritionist as fixed, but you can override it for further changes.
1. Click the Edit menu and select Make a Premix. The Store Premix as Ingredient window
appears with the code and formula name displayed at the top of the window.
Field: Description:
Plant Code Enter the name of the plant that is using this premix as an ingredient
(or, click to select a Plant code from a list).
Pricing Plant Enter the name of the plant from which you want to use the
ingredient pricing information. Click on the lookup button to the right
of the field to view the available plants.
Save as Ingredient Enter a new code for the premix.
NOTE: This code must be unique. Click to review the ingredient
list to ensure that you do not write over an existing
ingredient.
Tip: Although you may rename your premix, it is initially named
after the original formula with ―Premix‖ added to the end.
New Name The system uses the original formula name with ―Premix‖ added to
the end by default. To change the name, click this field and enter a
new name (up to 36 characters).
New Rounding Factor Enter a new rounding factor if necessary.
New Production Enter a production minimum if necessary.
Minimum
3. Click one of the following options:

Save to Base Leave this option selected if you want to save the premix as a base
ingredient. (When selected, the option appears green. When
unselected, the option appears red.)
Save to Overlay Click this option to save the premix as an overlay ingredient. (When
selected, the option appears green. When unselected, the option
appears red.)
4. If you want the premix to be given and ―in-stock‖ status (making it available for purchase or
use within a formula), leave the ―Place ingredient in-stock‖ option selected. If you want the
premix to have an ―out-of-stock‖ status, click the Place ingredient in-stock option to
remove the check mark.
5. If you want to save the ingredient as a partial premix, click . The Store Premix as Ing –
Partial Premix Specifications window appears, where you can enter information as follows:
Tip: This function also may be used to create a formula where part of the ingredients are
blended in a premix, then used to produce the finished product. This procedure will
create a stored formula for the partial premix and for the finished product using the
partial premix.
Field: Description:
Original Formula These fields display the formula code and description of the formula
that is being used to create the premix.
Premix Formula These fields display the premix formula code and description (entered
on the previous window). To change this information, click either the
Code or Description fields and enter a new code/description as
necessary.
Production Formula These fields display the production formula (stored formula) code and
description. Enter a formula code and description.
NOTE: This code must be unique. Click to review the ingredient
list to ensure that you do not write over an existing

ingredient.
Tip: Although you may enter a new description, it is initially
named after the original formula with ―Production‖ added to
the end.
7. Enter information into each of the following columns of the table as necessary:
Field: Description:
Include By default, this option is selected for each of the ingredients in the
list. If you do not want to include the ingredient (for example, if the
producer is adding to the production formula on site), click on the
check box to remove the check mark. (Only the selected ingredients
will be used to create the premix.)
Code Displays the ingredient code. This information cannot be changed.
Description Displays the ingredient description. This information cannot be
changed.
Premix Amount Displays the premix amount. To enter a different premix amount,
click this field and enter the new amount.
Tip: To return to the original amount, click .
Formula Amount Displays the formula amount. To enter a different formula amount,
click this field and enter the new amount.
Tip: To return to the original amount, click .
Tip: To view nutrients, click .
8. When you have defined all of the parameters needed in creating this premix, click . Your
settings are saved and you are returned to the Store Premix as Ingredient window.
Tips:
If you have selected a formula that already exists a dialog box appears and offers you a
decision of whether you want to replace the previously stored formula with the one you
are creating. Select No if you want to return to the Store Premix as Ing – Partial Premix
Specifications window and select a different formula code. Select Yes if you want to
replace the previously stored formula with the one you are creating here.
If you have made some selections in the Partial Premix Specifications window, three
check boxes appear in the lower left corner of the window. These options allow you to
choose whether you want to create a formula spec., reload the production formula, and
reload the premix formula.
9. To save the premix as an ingredient and return to the Brill Formulation Optimization window,
click .
Part 2: Batch Optimization

Chapter 1: Creating a New Formula Set (*.MLS file)
1. Click the Edit menu and select Current Set. The Recall Formula Set window appears.
2. Enter a name for the new formula set in the File Name field and press ENTER (or click Open).
3. Add formulas to the formula set by completing the following steps:
a. Click the Edit menu and select Formula Listing. The Formula Listing window appears, and
the name of the formula set you created in the previous steps is displayed in the title bar.
b. Click one of the following:
Button: Name: Description:
View Formula Spec Lookup screen This option allows you to add formula
specifications to the formula set.
View Stored Formula Lookup screen This option allows you to add stored
formulas to the formula set. (Stored
formulas are optimized formulas that have
been saved and sent to production.)
c. Begin adding formulas to the formula set by clicking (View Formula Spec Lookup window).
The Select Plant for Formulas window appears.
d. Click on the plant containing the formulas you want to select. The Plant to Read Spec
(Optional) window appears.
e. If you want to select a different plant to be the source of the formula specification, click on the
plant you want to select, and then click .

If you do not want to select a plant, click . The plant selected in step d will also be the
plant used to read the formula specifications.
The Select Plant for Pricing (Optional) window appears.
f. If you want to select a different plant to be the source of the ingredient prices, click on the
plant you want to select, and then click .

If you do not want to select a plant, click . The plant selected in step d will also be the
plant used for pricing.
The Select Formulas for Adding window appears.
g. Click on each formula you want to add to the formula set.
h. When all formulas have been selected, click . The Formula Listing window appears and the
selected formulas appear in the list.
Tip: If you have an existing formula set that you want to merge into the new formula set,
click to select the formula set.

4. If necessary, change formula information in the following columns:
Fix Selecting a check box in this column results in a solution that is equal to the
current stored formula. This is important for Multi-Blend to allocate
ingredient usage for custom formulas.
Lock Select a check box in this column to prevent changing the status of the
Fixed field when using the Create Selection option in Multi-Blend.
Plant Displays the plant. To change a Formula Plant selection in the grid, double-
click on the field and change the plant code to the code of the plant you
want.
Once the plant code is displayed in the Plant field you should position your
cursor on a different line and click your mouse. This stores the selection for
this field and a dialog box appears and asks if you want the plant you just
selected assigned to all of the formulas in this set.
If you want to change the Plant only for the formula on the line you are
changing, you select No. Brill Formulation only changes the Plant for the
formula you have just changed.
If you want to change the Plant for all formulas in the scrolling window, you
select Yes and all Plants are changed to the one you just defined for this
line.
Tips:
This field cannot be blank – you must enter a plant code. The Spec Plant
and Pricing Plant fields may be left blank.
When both the Spec Plant and Pricing Plant fields are blank, this field
determines the source of the formula specification, ingredient nutrients,
and ingredient prices.
When the Spec Plant contains a plant code and the Pricing Plant field is
blank, this field determines the source of ingredient nutrients and
When the Spec Plant is blank and the Pricing Plant field contains a code,
this field determines the source of the formula specification and
ingredient nutrients. The Pricing Plant is the source of ingredient prices.
When all three plant fields (Plant, Spec Plant, and Pricing Plant) contain
a plant code, the Plant Code field determines the source of ingredient
nutrients. The Spec Plant field determines the source of the formula
specification. The Pricing Plant field determines the source of ingredient
prices.
Code Displays the formula code. To change the formula code, click on the field
and enter the code you want to include in this optimization.
Spec Displays the plant used to read the formula specifications. To change or add
a Formula Spec Plant in the grid, click on the field and change the plant
code to the code of the plant you want.
Once the plant code is displayed in the Spec field you should position your
cursor on a different line and click your mouse. This stores the selection for
this field and a dialog box appears and asks if you want the plant you just
selected assigned to all of the formulas in this set.
If you want to change the Spec plant only for the formula on the line you
are changing, you select No. Brill Formulation will then only change the
Spec plant for the formula you have just changed.
If you want to change the Spec plant for all formulas in the scrolling
window, you select Yes and all Spec plants are changed to the one you just
defined for this line.
Price Displays the plant used to determine pricing. To change or add a Pricing
Plant in the grid, click on the field and change the plant code to the code of
the plant you want.
Once the Pricing Plant code is displayed in the Price field you should position
your cursor on a different line and click your mouse. This stores the
selection for this field and a dialog box appears and asks if you want the
plant you just selected assigned to all of the formulas in this set.
If you want to change the Pricing Plant only for the formula on the line you
Pricing Plant for the formula you have just changed.
If you want to change the Pricing Plant for all formulas in the scrolling
window, you select Yes and all Pricing Plants are changed to the one you
just defined for this line.
Formula Name Displays the name of the formula. This field cannot be changed.
Amount Contains the amount (in tons) of each formula to produce.
Click on the field, and enter the amount you want to produce. (The amount
for each formula can be different and can be determined down to the
1/10,000 of a ton.)
Minimum NOTE: This option should only be used when optimizing a floating tonnage
formula set in Multi-Blend.
Click on this field and enter a minimum number of tons of a formula you
want to consider in a floating tonnage Multi-Blend set. (This sets a minimum
amount of this formula to consider in optimizing a particular Multi-Blend
set.)
Maximum NOTE: This option should only be used when optimizing a floating tonnage
Click on this field and then enter a maximum number of tons of a formula
you want to consider in a floating tonnage Multi-Blend set. (This sets a
maximum amount of this formula to consider in optimizing a particular
Multi-Blend set.)
Sell NOTE: This option should only be used when optimizing a floating tonnage
Allows you to set an actual selling price of a formula in a floating tonnage
Multi-Blend set. Click on the field and enter the price at which you want to
sell this formula.
Sell % NOTE: This option should only be used when optimizing a floating tonnage
Allows you to set a percentage over the ingredient cost of a formula to use
in calculating the selling price for a floating tonnage Multi-Blend set. Click on
the field and enter the percentage over the ingredient cost of a formula you
want used in calculating the price.
Rest This field cannot be changed.
Low Amt This field cannot be changed.
High Amt This field cannot be changed.
Calc Sell This field cannot be changed.
Cost This field cannot be changed.
5. When you‘ve finished making changes, click  to save the formula set and return to the main
window of Brill Formulation Optimization.
Chapter 2: Modifying a Formula Set

2. Click on the formula set (*.MLS file) you want to change, and then click Open.
3. Click the Edit menu and select Formula Listing. The Formula Listing window appears, and the
name of the formula set is displayed in the title bar.
4. Change information in each of the columns as necessary. (Refer to the ―Creating a new formula
set (*.MLS file)‖ section for more information about each column.)
Tips:
To delete a formula from the formula set, click on the row you want to delete. Then, right-
click and select Delete Selected Rows. A message box appears. Click OK to delete the
row.
To delete multiple formulas, press and hold the CTRL key while you click on the first
column (to the left of the Fix column) of each row you want to delete. Then, right-click on
the table and select Delete Selected Rows. A message box appears. Click OK to delete
the row.
5. When you‘ve finished making changes, click  to save the formula set and return to the main
window of Brill Formulation Optimization.
Chapter 3: Optimizing a Batch

To optimize a batch of formulas:
2. Select the formula set (*.MLS file) you want to optimize and click Open. The main Brill
Formulation Optimization window appears.
Tip: If you need to create a new formula set, refer to the ―Creating a new formula set (*.MLS
file)‖ section for instructions.
3. Make changes to the formula set, if necessary. (Refer to the ―Modifying a Formula Set‖ section
for more information.)
4. Click the File menu and select Batch Optimization. The Batch Optimization box appears.
5. If you want to view the Optimization Log after the batch has been optimized, click the View
Optimization Log option. A checkmark appears to indicate that the option is selected.
6. Click 
. A progress bar appears in the box. When the process is complete, a message box
appears to indicate that the batch has been optimized.
Tip: The solution file is created during this process. This file contains the optimized formulas
within the formula set.
7. Click OK to continue.
Tip: If you selected the option to display the Optimization Log in step 5, the Log is displayed
in a preview window. To print the report, click . To close the window, click the Close
button.
8. Print additional reports as necessary by clicking the Report menu and selecting the report you
want to print.
Tip: We recommend printing the Solution Report first. The Solution Report allows you to
review each of the optimized formulas in the formula set. The Comparison Report is also
helpful for determining whether costs have changed enough to justify re-issuing a
formula to production.
9. Store the solution file by clicking the File menu and selecting Store Solution. The Save
Solution to Stored Formulas window appears.
Store All Formulas Select this option if you want to store all formulas in the formula
set.
Select which Select this option if you want to select specific formulas within the
formulas to store formula set. For example, if you identified 3 formulas out of 10 that
had a significant decrease in cost, you may only want to store those
3 formulas. This option will allow you to select those 3 formulas and
store them in the Stored Formula file to be sent to production.
11. Verify the date in the Stored Date field. By default, this field displays today‘s date. If
necessary, you can change the field by entering a new date in MM/DD/YYYY format.
Save as temporary Select this option if you want to save the solution file as a
archived formula temporary archived formula
Do Pellet Creation Select this option if you want to do pellet creation.
13. Click . The solution file is stored.
Chapter 4: Using the Weekly Process

The ―Weekly‖ process is used to automatically optimize large numbers of formulas on a regular
basis. After optimizing the formulas, the system helps you determine which new formulas should
be issued to production based on the following criteria:
1. All formulas in the Formula Set will have the current production formula checked by
verification. All formulas that fail verification will have a new formula issued.
2. The cost change for each new solution is tested to determine whether the change exceeds
the Price Threshold
3. Extended Price Thresholds may be used to test the formula cost change multiplied by the
tons of production.
4. If the formula specification has changed. For formulas that contain an Include, the Master
Formula is marked as changed to keep formulas synchronized.
The Weekly procedure may be used at any time to optimize a Formula Set and test the new
solutions to determine which solutions meet the criteria for issuing a new production formula.
Set up and run the Weekly Process

1. Click the File menu and select Weekly. The Weekly window is displayed.
Note: If you are currently working with a set, you must close it to enable this option.
2. Review and set up information on each of the tabs as described in the following sections:
Start-up
Enter information into each of the following fields:
Field: Description:
Delay start of This option allows you to delay the weekly process until after regular
weekly until business hours or until a more convenient time of day. Select this
option and then enter the time of day you want the process to start.
If you do not select this option, the weekly process will start as soon
as you click .
Formula set Enter the location and name of a Formula set file to be optimized.
Tip: Click to search for the set you want to optimize.
Solution Report
The Solution Report tab allows you to set up a template to use as a method of setting all
Weekly configurations. You can also send the Solution Report output directly to a printer
or to a file to print or view later.
Enter information into each of the following fields:
Field: Description:
Report Template Displays the template that will be used. To change the template,
click . A new window appears, allowing you to select a new
template.
Output Options Select one of the following options:
Send to printer Select this option if you want the Solution
report sent to your default printer.
Send to file Select this option if you want the Solution
report sent to a file. After selecting this option,
enter a name and location for the file as
follows:
1. Click . A new window appears.
2. Search for and select the location
of the file.
3. Enter the name of the file in the File
Name field.
4. Click Save.
Error Report
The Error Report is a report of the formulas selected to be issued and the reason for
issuing the new formula. Click to view the report.
Options
Select each of the following options as necessary:
Skip changed If you want to issue a new formula if the formula specification
specifications has been changed, do not select this option. Then, enter the
number of days to check for a changed specification in the box
at the lower right corner of this tab.
If you do not want to issue a new formula if the formula spec-
ification has been changed, select this option.
Do not delete solutions When formulas are optimized using the weekly process, the
system creates a temporary solution for each formula.
Select this option if you want to save these temporary
solutions for each formula.
If this option is not selected the temporary files are
automatically deleted if the formula does not need to be re-
issued to production.
Skip O/S or deleted Select this option if you do not want to print out-of-stock or
ingredient warning deleted ingredient warnings on the Solution Report.
If this option is not selected, out-of-stock and deleted
ingredient warnings will be printed the Solution Report when
applicable.
Logout at end Select this option if you want to completely close Brill
Formulation Optimization after the Weekly process is finished.
If this option is not selected, the main Brill Formulation
Optimization window is displayed after the Weekly process is
finished.
Verify Medications Select this option if you want to ensure that your medicated
formulas comply with state and federal regulations.
If this option is not selected, medications will not be verified.
NOTE: In order to use this option, you must have Feed Tags.
In addition, this option must be turned on in
Foundation Utilities (click the File menu, select Edit
Database Configuration and then select the
Options tab click the Verify Medications option.
Days to check for If you want to issue a new formula when the formula
changed specification specification has been changed, enter the number of days to
check for a changed specification.
3. When all information is complete, click 

. The Weekly process starts immediately unless
you‘ve entered a time in the ―Delay start of weekly until‖ field on the Start-Up tab.
Part 3: Multi-Blend
Multi-Blend is an optional module of Brill Formulation. If you are interested in purchasing

this option, or to learn more, contact your sales representative.
Feed Manufacturers must often allocate ingredients that are high quality but available in limited
quantity. Multi-Blend, an optional module of Brill Formulation, assists in the simultaneous formulation
of several stored formulas vying for limited resources. Multi-Blend considers the variation in nutrient
requirements among the formulas to be optimized and the total volume of each formula.
For example, an ingredient in limited supply may be more valuable in one formula when formulated
alone, but may in fact lower overall costs if allocated among several formulations or used in the
highest volume feed.
Chapter 1: Creating a Multi-Blend Set

To create a new Multi-Blend set:
1. Click the File menu and select New Multi-Blend Set. The Formula Listing window appears.
This window allows you to define which formulas or formula specifications are included in the
set. In addition, you can specify where the formulas, formula specifications, prices and other
initial information will come from. (Once you define this initial information, then you can define
the limitations you want placed on this particular Multi-Blend set.)
2. Add formulas to the set by completing the following steps:
a. Right-click on the table and select either Add Row(s) to add formula specifications, or
Add Row(s) With Stored Formulas. The Select 1 Plant for Formulas window appears.
b. Click on the plant you want to use for formulas and then click . The Select 1 Plant to
Read Spec (Optional) window appears.
c. If you want to use a different plant to read the formula specifications, click on the plant
you want to use and click . The Select 1 Plant for Pricing (Optional) window appears.
Tip: If you do not want to select a different plant, just click . The Select 1 Plant for
Pricing (Optional) window appears.
d. If you want to use a different plant for pricing information on ingredients, click on the
plant you want to use and click . The Select Formulas for Adding window appears.
Tip: If you do not want to select a different plant for pricing, just click . Select
Formulas for Adding window appears.
e. Select each of the formulas you want to add to the set by clicking on the formula you
want to add. (You can select as many formulas as you want.)
f. When all formulas have been selected, click  to return to the Formula Listing window.
Tips:
If necessary, you can add more formulas to this list from other plants by clicking the
View Formula Spec Lookup Screen button again and selecting a different formula
plant and repeating the procedure to add the formulas from another plant to this
set.
(You also can place your cursor over the table and then right-click on the table. A
pop-up menu appears and offers you the selections of Add Row(s) or Add Row(s)
With Stored Formulas.)
To remove a formula from the list, click on the first column of the table (to the left of
the Fix column) next to the formula you want to delete. Then, right-click on the
formula and select Delete Selected Row(s).
If you want to include stored formulas in the set, click the View Stored Formula
Lookup Screen button (the right at bottom of window).
You can change the order of the columns in the list by clicking on a column heading
and selecting a different column. For example, if the Fix column is displayed first and
you want the Plant column to be the first column displayed, click the Fix column
heading. A drop-down arrow appears. Then, select Plant. The Plant column becomes
the first column in the list. After making changes, you can save your settings – or
return to the original settings – using the Grid Layout menu. Click the Grid Layout
menu and select one of the following options:
o Save Current Layout as Custom Default - Select this option if you want to
save the layout you currently have displayed as the Custom Default layout for
future use.
o Restore Original Layout as the Default - If you are working on a grid and
want to revert to the original layout as the default, select Restore Original
Layout as the Default. The window then reverts to the original layout, which
you can then save.
o Apply Original Layout - If you simply want to view the window at this time
using the original layout of the grid, select Apply Original Layout. The window
is then displayed using the original layout.
o Apply Custom Layout - You may have saved a custom layout style
previously and been working on a different layout. If you want the current
layout to be displayed using your custom format, select Apply Custom Layout
and the grid is displayed using your previously stored Custom Layout.
Fix Select this check box if the stored formula has no formula specification.
These types of formulas can still be a part of the Multi-Blend set and the
ingredient usages are allocated during optimization.
Lock When you use the criteria selection to select formulas to issue, you may
select this check box to prevent the Fix column from being automatically
changed.
Plant Displays the plant. To change a Formula Plant selection in the grid, click
on the field and change the plant code to the code of the plant you want.
Once the plant code is displayed in the Plant field you should position your
cursor on a different line and click your mouse. This stores the selection
for this field and a dialog box appears and asks if you want the plant you
just selected assigned to all of the formulas in this set.
If you want to change the Plant only for the formula on the line you are
changing, you select No. Brill Formulation only changes the Plant for the
formula you have just changed.
If you want to change the Plant for all formulas in the scrolling window,
you select Yes and all Plants are changed to the one you just defined for
this line.
Tips:
This field cannot be blank – you must enter a plant code. The Spec
Plant and Pricing Plant fields may be left blank.
When both the Spec Plant and Pricing Plant fields are blank, this field
determines the source of the formula specification, ingredient
nutrients, and ingredient prices.
When the Spec Plant contains a plant code and the Pricing Plant field
is blank, this field determines the source of ingredient nutrients and
When the Spec Plant is blank and the Pricing Plant field contains a
code, this field determines the source of the formula specification and
ingredient nutrients. The Pricing Plant is the source of ingredient
prices.
contain a plant code, the Plant Code field determines the source of
ingredient nutrients. The Spec Plant field determines the source of the
formula specification. The Pricing Plant field determines the source of
ingredient prices.
Code Displays the formula code. To change the formula code, click on the field
and enter the code you want to include in this optimization.
Spec Displays the plant used to read the formula specifications. To change or
add a Formula Spec Plant in the grid, click on the field and change the
plant code to the code of the plant you want.
Once the plant code is displayed in the Spec field you should position your
cursor on a different line and click your mouse. This stores the selection
for this field and a dialog box appears and asks if you want the plant you
just selected assigned to all of the formulas in this set.
If you want to change the Spec plant only for the formula on the line you
Spec plant for the formula you have just changed.
If you want to change the Spec plant for all formulas in the scrolling
window, you select Yes and all Spec plants are changed to the one you
Price Displays the plant used to determine pricing. To change or add a Pricing
Plant in the grid, click on the field and change the plant code to the code
of the plant you want.
Once the Pricing Plant code is displayed in the Price field you should
position your cursor on a different line and click your mouse. This stores
the selection for this field and a dialog box appears and asks if you want
the plant you just selected assigned to all of the formulas in this set.
If you want to change the Pricing Plant only for the formula on the line
you are changing, you select No. Brill Formulation will then only change
the Pricing Plant for the formula you have just changed.
If you want to change the Pricing Plant for all formulas in the scrolling
window, you select Yes and all Pricing Plants are changed to the one you
Formula Name Displays the name of the formula. This field cannot be changed.
PMO This flags a formula that is a premix in a Premix Optimization formula set.
Amount Contains the amount (in tons) of each formula to produce.
Click on the field, and enter the amount you want to produce. (The
amount for each formula can be different and can be determined down to
the 1/10,000 of a ton.)
Minimum NOTE: This option should only be used when optimizing a floating
tonnage formula set in Multi-Blend.
Click on this field and enter a minimum number of tons of a formula you
want to consider in a floating tonnage Multi-Blend set. (This sets a
minimum amount of this formula to consider in optimizing a particular
Multi-Blend set.)
Maximum NOTE: This option should only be used when optimizing a floating
Click on this field and then enter a maximum number of tons of a formula
you want to consider in a floating tonnage Multi-Blend set. (This sets a
maximum amount of this formula to consider in optimizing a particular
Multi-Blend set.)
Sell NOTE: This option should only be used when optimizing a floating
Allows you to set an actual selling price of a formula in a floating tonnage
Multi-Blend set. Click on the field and enter the price at which you want to
sell this formula.
Sell % NOTE: This option should only be used when optimizing a floating
Allows you to set a percentage over the ingredient cost of a formula to use
in calculating the selling price for a floating tonnage Multi-Blend set. Click
on the field and enter the percentage over the ingredient cost of a formula
you want used in calculating the price.
Rest If the number of tons to produce in a floating tonnage Multi-Blend Solution
is a minimum or a maximum, this amount indicates the additional profit to
be made by making one more or one less ton of the formula. When
viewing the Formula Listing window, this field is blank and cannot be
changed.
Low Amt Brill Formulation may offer a recommendation of the number of tons to
make of a particular formula in this particular Multi-Blend set. In this field
it is most likely an amount that is less than the minimum tons you defined
in the Formula Listing window. When viewing the Formula Listing window,
this field is blank and cannot be changed.
High Amt Brill Formulation also may offer a recommendation of the number of tons
to make of a particular formula in this Multi-Blend set that is most likely
an amount that is greater than the maximum number of tons you defined
in the Formula Listing window. When viewing the Formula Listing window,
Calc Sell This field is utilized after optimizing a Multi-Blend set and displays the
calculated selling price as determined by either the Sell or Sell % field of
the Formula Listing window. When viewing the Formula Listing window,
Cost This field cannot be changed.
4. If necessary, you can modify prices of ingredients, include additional ingredients, include
additional nutrients, allow substitution of ingredients and edit the configuration of your bin
allocations. To do this, click the Formula menu and select one of the following options:
Multi-Price Ingredients
Add Ingredients
Add Nutrients
Substitute Ingredients
Edit Bin Allocation Configuration
Refer to each of the sections following step 5 for additional information (or click on a link
above to view the information).
5. When all formulas have been added and set up as you would like, click 
to optimize the set.
The Brill Formulation Optimization window appears. Refer to the ―Chapter 2: Optimizing a
Multi-Blend set‖ section for more information.
Multi-Price Ingredients
Multi-Price is an optional module of Brill Formulation. If you are interested in

purchasing this option, or to learn more, contact your sales representative.
When you select this option, the Multi-Price Ingredient Definitions window appears where
you may add, edit, or delete multi-price ingredients from your Multi-Blend set.
1. Click . The Select Ingredients window appears.

2. Select the ingredients you want included in the multi-price function of Brill
Formulation. Once you have selected the list you desire, click 
and the selections
you made are displayed in the Multi-Price Ingredient Definitions window.
3. To add names to the Multi-Price ingredients you have added, click on the Name field
and then enter the name you desire.
4. Once you have defined all of the multi-price ingredients you desire, click  and you
are returned to the Formula Listing window.
To remove an ingredient:
1. Click on the first column of the table (to the left of the Code column) next to the
ingredient you want to remove.
2. Right-click on the ingredient you want to remove and select Delete Selected Row(s).
Add Ingredients
When you select this option, the Add Ingredients window appears, which allows you to
add, edit, or delete ingredients that you want to be able to add to your Multi-Blend set.
2. Select the ingredients you want included in the Multi-Blend set.
3. Once you have selected the list you desire, click and the selections you made are
displayed in the Add Ingredients window.
Wildcard This column allows you to enter a specific formula or you can use
the asterisk (*) as a wildcard enabling you to select all or a group of
formulas. In the Wildcard column you may enter the following:
11* will add the ingredient to all formulas beginning with 11
?1 will add the ingredient to all two-character formula codes
ending with 1.
??5 will add the ingredient to all three-character formula codes
ending in 5.
Code Displays the ingredient code.
Name Displays the ingredient name.
Minimum Allows you to select a minimum amount you want Brill Formulation
to use in the Multi-Blend set if this ingredient is selected for use.
Click on the field and enter an amount in tons that you want defined
as a minimum amount.
Maximum Allows you to select a maximum amount you want Brill Formulation
to use in this Multi-Blend set if this ingredient is selected for use.
Click on the field and enter an amount in tons that you want defined
as a maximum amount.
5. Once you have defined all of the additional ingredients you desire, click  and you
To remove an ingredient from the window:

ingredient you want to remove.
2. Right-click on the ingredient you want to remove and select Delete Selected Row(s).
Add Nutrients
When you select this option, the Add Nutrients window appears, which allows you to add,
edit, or delete nutrients.
To add nutrients:
1. Click . The Select Nutrients window appears.

2. Select the nutrients you want included in the Multi-Blend set.
3. Once you have selected the list you desire, click  and the selections you made are
displayed in the Add Nutrients window.

the asterisk (*) as a wildcard enabling you to select all or a group of
formulas. In the Wildcard column you may enter the following:
11* will add the nutrient to all formulas beginning with 11
?1 will add the nutrient to all two-character formula codes
ending with 1.
??5 will add the nutrient to all three-character formula codes
ending in 5.
Code Displays the nutrient code.
Name Displays the nutrient name.
Minimum Allows you to select a minimum amount you want Brill Formulation
to use in the Multi-Blend set if this nutrient is selected for use. Click
on the field and enter an amount in tons that you want defined as a
minimum amount.
Maximum Allows you to select a maximum amount you want Brill Formulation
to use in this Multi-Blend set if this nutrient is selected for use. Click
on the field and enter an amount in tons that you want defined as a
maximum amount.
5. Once you have defined all of the additional nutrients you desire, click and you are
returned to the Formula Listing window.
To remove a nutrient from the window:

nutrient you want to remove.
2. Right-click on the nutrient you want to remove and select Delete Selected Row(s).
Substitute Ingredients
The Substitute Ingredient function is a quick way to offer an ingredient to a Multi-Blend
problem when it is not in any of the formula specifications. When you select this option,
the Substitute Ingredients window appears, which allows you to substitute one ingredient
for another while using Multi-Blend.
To define substitute ingredients:
the asterisk (*) as a wildcard enabling you to select all or a group
of formulas. In the Wildcard column you may enter the following:
11* will add the nutrient to all formulas beginning with 11
?1 will add the nutrient to all two-character formula codes
ending with 1.
??5 will add the nutrient to all three-character formula codes
ending in 5.
From Ing Enter the ingredient code you want to replace.
Name Displays the name of the ingredient that will be replaced.
To Ing Enter the ingredient code you want to use.
Name Displays the name of the ingredient that will be used to replace
the ingredient in the ―From Ing‖ column.
Keep Org Select this option if you want to keep the original ingredient in the
list of available ingredients. If this option is not selected, the
original ingredient is locked out during the solution operation.
2. Once you have defined all of the substitute ingredients you desire, click  and you
Edit Bin Allocation Configuration

The Edit Bin Allocation Configuration option allows you to change how you have allocated
quantities in your ingredient bins.
For example, if there are two ingredient bins empty and there are three candidate
ingredients (ingredients that you might want to use in your operation), you could
determine which two of the three ingredients would be most cost effective to use in
producing your feed while maintaining the specified requirements.
NOTE: If the candidate ingredients are not already in your system you must add them. In
addition, make sure the costs and other nutrient information are defined.
To change your bin allocations:

2. Select each of the ingredients you want to consider for bin allocation.
3. Click 
. Your selections are then displayed in the Edit Bin Allocation Configuration
window (see picture below).
Each row displays a

candidate ingredient
(selected in the
previous step).
You can pose multiple problems to

the Optimizer and allow the
Optimizer to consider up to 10 bin
allocation problems at once. Each
column indicates a problem to solve.
In this example, only one problem is
defined, and each ingredient is
considered in the problem.
4. Click the Plant field and select an available plant from the list.
5. For each problem you want to solve, enter information for each item (row) in the list
as follows:
Row: Description:
Ingredients If you want to consider the ingredient in a problem place a ―1‖ in
the column. In the example above, one problem is defined in
column 1, and each ingredient is being considered in that
problem. Therefore, each ingredient has a ―1‖ placed in column 1.
Group Minimum Enter the minimum number of ingredients you want used in the
optimized solution. The example above shows a scenario in which
there are 3 candidate ingredients and only room for 1 ingredient.
At least one of the three ingredients is needed; therefore, the
Group Minimum is set to ―1‖.
Group Maximum Enter the maximum number of ingredients you want used in the
optimized solution. The example above shows a scenario in which
there are 3 candidate ingredients and only room for 1 ingredient.
Therefore, the Group Maximum is set to ―1‖.
Minimum Usage If you want minimum usages to be considered, enter the minimum
amount. For example, if you do not want to consider an ingredient
unless the Optimizer recommends at least 20 tons of it (or any
minimum amount you determine), then you would enter that
amount in this column.
6. Click  to save the changes and return to the Formula Listing window.
7. Click  to optimize the solution and display the results on the Brill Formulation
Optimization window.
Merge Formulas From Another MLS File

There may be times when you have already defined a Multi-Blend set and want to include
that set with another set you had previously defined. To accomplish this you first open one
of the two sets in the Formula Listing window and then click on the Merge Formulas
From Another MLS File button. The Select MLS File to Merge window appears.
Locate the file you desire to merge into the one you already have open and then click on it
to highlight the selection. Select Open and the second MLS file is merged into the one you
already have open in the Formula Listing window. Both sets of files are displayed in the
current set. You can merge as many files together as you need without exceeding the
maximum number of allowable files for a Multi-Blend set.
You then have the option of saving the current set or conducting a Save As Multi-Blend
Set to create a separate MLS file that now contains all of the merged sets.
1. If you are ready to proceed to the next step of optimizing this Multi-Blend set of
formulas,
click . The values you have entered in this window are then used to conduct an
initial optimization of the set and the program displays the initial results in the
2. Refer to the next section of this manual, which details the optimization procedure for a
Multi-Blend set.
Chapter 2: Optimizing a Multi-Blend Set

To optimize a Multi-Blend set:
1. Create a new Multi-Blend set or open an existing Multi-Blend set (click the File menu and
select Open Multi-Blend set). The Formula Listing window appears.
2. If necessary, make changes to the formulas (refer to the ―Chapter 1: Creating a Multi-Blend set‖
section for additional information).
3. When you are ready to optimize the set, click 

. The set is optimized and the results are
displayed in the Brill Formulation Optimization window (see picture below).
Initially, this field

is set to display
global results for
all plants and all
formulas.
Click this field to
display nutrient/
ingredient
information for a
specific plant (if
you have Multi-
Plant) and/or a
specific formula.
This area indicates whether the solution is feasible

or infeasible.
A solution is considered feasible if it the solution
can be manufactured within the specified
restrictions.
A solution is considered infeasible when the
restrictions placed upon the components make it
impossible to manufacture the formula set. When a
solution is infeasible, you must modify your
restrictions in some way to achieve a feasible
solution to the optimization of the given set.
4. Whether the solution is feasible or infeasible, you now have the ability to manipulate the
parameters of your restrictions. (If the solution is feasible, this enables you to determine
whether your changes can bring about a greater savings. If the solution is infeasible, you can
make necessary modifications to create a feasible set.)
Review reports and determine which changes need to be made, if any. Then use the following
options to change the solution as necessary (when available, click on a link or refer to the
appropriate section for more information):
o Drop-down list: The drop-down list in the upper left area of the window allows you to
displays the nutrients/ingredients for any or all formulas. Click on the drop-down
arrow and select the formula ingredients or nutrients you desire to manipulate. Then
you can make the changes in the fields as desired.
o Quick Update: This option allows you to quickly view/change ingredient and nutrient
information for all formulas using the Quick Update feature (see picture below).
To use the Quick Update option, right-click on the ingredient/nutrient you want to view
or change and select Quick Update.
Tip: The Quick Update report contains ingredient/nutrient information displayed on
the Quick Update window. To view/print the Quick Update report, click (in
the lower left corner of the window). The Quick Update Report window appears,
allowing you to print the report as usual.
The first four

columns on this
window display
information about
each formula in
the MLS file
including plant,
code, and name.
This portion of the window displays the selected

ingredient/nutrient including the
minimum/maximum restrictions, current
amount, ton amount, current usage, previous
amount, and previous usage for each formula in
This field displays the the MLS file.
total usage of the You can change the minimum/maximum
ingredient/nutrient restriction amounts or the current amount for a
across all formulas in single formula or all formulas in the set.
the MLS file.
Switch between ingredients and nutrients

Right-click options (these options are available when you right-click on the
Ingredient/nutrient table):
o Delete selected row
o Add rows
o Disable current ingredient and delete from specification
o Enable current ingredient and add to specification
o Edit ingredient
o Edit nutrient
o Change stock status
o Expanding premixes
o Merge specifications
o Edit ingredient combinations
o Create comments
o Save prices to disk
o Perform parametric analysis
Set minimum and maximum restrictions on ingredient groups
Define selection criteria
5. When you have finished making changes you can then optimize and store the solution.
Switch Between Ingredients and Nutrients

If you want to view the nutrient amounts in this formula, click the toolbar. The nutrient value
information is displayed. To switch back to the ingredient listing click on the button again.
NOTE: If you are using Multi-Blend, you must be viewing ingredient or nutrient information in
order for this button to be available. (The drop-down list cannot be set to a "Global..."
option or a "Groups..." option.)

To view both ingredients and nutrients at the same time, click (on the toolbar). Ingredients
are displayed in the upper pane, nutrients are displayed in the lower pane (see picture below).
NOTE: If you are using Multi-Blend, you must be viewing ingredient or nutrient information in
order for this button to be available. (The drop-down list cannot be set to a "Global..."
option or a "Groups..." option.)
Ingredients
are displayed
at the top.
Nutrients are
displayed on
the bottom.
Right-Click Options
There are several options on the Optimization window that are available by right-clicking on
the Ingredient/Nutrient table. This section details the functions that are only available by
right-clicking on the table. (Additional options that are available using the menu options or
toolbar buttons are explained in other sections.)
Delete Selected Row

To remove a single ingredient or nutrient:
1. Display the ingredient or nutrient information. (Click the drop-down field and select an
ingredient or nutrient option.)
2. Right-click on the row you want to delete and select Delete Selected Rows. A message
box appears.
3. Click OK to delete the row.
To remove a multiple ingredients or nutrients:

2. Press and hold the CTRL key while you click on the first column (to the left of the Code
column) of each row you want to delete.
3. When all rows have been selected, right-click on the table and select Delete Selected
Rows. A message box appears.
Add Rows
To add a new ingredient or nutrient:
2. Right-click on the table and select Add Rows. The ―Add new items to specification‖
window appears.
3. Enter the code of the ingredient you want to add, and then click .
Tips:
To add more than one ingredient, or to look up the ingredient code, click .
The Select Ingredients window appears. Select the codes you want to add, and
then click . The ingredients are added and you are returned to the
After adding a premix ingredient, you must optimize the formula before you
can expand it.
Disable Current Ingredient And Delete From Spec

Tip: This option is not available when nutrients are displayed on the Optimization
window. If you are currently viewing nutrients, you can display ingredients by
clicking the drop-down field above the table and selecting Ingredients for
{plant/formula}.
To temporarily disable an ingredient for this optimization, right-click on the table and
select Disable Current Ingredient and Delete From Spec. The code N/A appears in
the Minimum and Maximum fields of the ingredient, indicating this ingredient is not
available for this particular optimization.
NOTE: If you save the formula specification while the ingredient is disabled, the disabled
ingredient is no longer part of the newly saved formula specification.
Enable Current Ingredient And Add To Spec

{plant/formula}.
To enable an ingredient for this optimization (making it available for use within the
formula), right-click on the table and select Enable Current Ingredient and Add To
Spec. If the code had been disabled, the ―N/A‖ is removed from the Minimum and
Maximum fields of the ingredient, indicating this ingredient is now available for this
particular optimization.
NOTE: If you save the formula specification while the ingredient is enabled, the newly
enabled ingredient is added and saved when the formula specification is saved.
Edit Ingredient
This option allows you to change ingredient information quickly and easily on the
{plant/formula}.
To edit the nutritional information relating to a specific ingredient:

1. Right-click on the ingredient you want to change and select Edit Ingredient. The Edit
Ingredient window appears.
2. Make the necessary changes to the ingredient.
3. If you want to make the changes to the ingredient permanent (rather than just for this
particular optimization), click .
the Optimization window.
Edit Nutrient
Tip: This option is not available when ingredients are displayed on the Optimization
window. If you are currently viewing ingredients, you can display nutrients by
clicking the drop-down field above the table and selecting Nutrients for
{plant/formula}.
To edit information relating to a specific nutrient:

1. Right-click on the nutrient you want to change and select Edit Nutrient. The Edit
Nutrient window appears.
2. Make the necessary changes to the nutrient.
the Optimization window.
NOTE: Changes are not written to the permanent file.
Change Stock Status

{plant/formula}.
To change the status of an ingredient to ―Out of Stock‖ or ―In Stock‖:

Right-click on the Price field or the * field (to the right of the Price field) and select Change
Stock Status. When an ingredient is ―Out of Stock‖ the stock field (*) displays –0. If
nothing is displayed in the stock field (*), the ingredient is considered to be ―In Stock.‖
NOTE: The minimum field is cleared when the ingredient is determined to be out of stock.
If no changes are made to the minimum, then placing that ingredient back into
stock restores the original minimum. If the formula specification is saved, the
original minimum is restored automatically. Manually placing a minimum on an
―Out of Stock‖ ingredient forces that ingredient into the solution as all manually
placed minimums are always enforced.
Expanding Premixes
If a premix is included in the formula, you can expand the list of ingredients using either
of the following options:
NOTE: The formula must be optimized in order to see these options. For example, if you
add or remove a row, you must click (to optimize the formula) before these
options are available.
Expand as Premix – This option allows you to expand a single premix.

Expand All Premix Ingredients – This option allows you to expand all premix
ingredients in the formula, including premixes
stored within premixes.
Refer to the following sections for additional information.
Expand as Premix
You can expand any premix listed in the ingredients table. If more than one premix
exists in the formula, you can use this option as many times as necessary to expand
additional premixes (including premixes within premixes). Keep in mind that you must
re-optimize the formula after expanding each premix.
To expand a premix:
1. Right-click on the premix you want to expand and select Expand as Premix. The
Expand as Premix window appears.
NOTE: If you select an ingredient that is not a premix, a warning dialog box
appears and asks if you are sure you want to proceed. (If you do not want
to expand the ingredient, click OK and you are returned to the
optimization window. If you select OK the Expand as Premix window
appears and you can complete the process described in steps 2-3.)
2. If you want to change the Plant and Formula codes, enter the new codes or click
to select codes from a list.
working.
the next premix.
Expand All Premix Ingredients

This option allows you to expand all premix ingredients in the formula. Note, however,
that premixes within premixes are not automatically expanded. You can you can use
this option as many times as necessary to expand each premix layer.
1. Right-click on the premix you want to expand and select Expand All Premix
Ingredients. The Expand All Premix Ingredients window appears.
2. If you want to change the Plant code, enter the new code or click to select a
code from a list.
3. If you want to have the ingredient specifications fixed, select the Fix Ingredient
Specifications option. (A check mark indicates that the option is selected.)
working.
the next premix.
To combine the specifications of multiple formulas:
1. Right-click on the table and select Merge Specifications. The Merge Specifications
window appears.
2. If you want to change the Plant and Formula codes, enter the new codes or click to
select codes from a list.

Merge Ingredients Select this option to merge ingredients from the formula
Merge Nutrients Select this option to merge nutrients from the formula
Replace duplicate Select this option if you want to replace duplicate
specifications specifications.
4. Click to merge the specifications.
Edit Ingredient Combinations

To edit your ingredient combinations, right-click on the table and select Edit Ingredient
Combinations. The Ingredient Combinations window appears. (Refer to the ―Ingredient
Combinations‖ section within Brill Maintenance: Part 2: Chapter 8 for more information.)
Create Comments
To add a comment to the formula specification:
1. Right-click on the table and select Create Comments. The Formula Spec Comment
window appears.
2. Enter the comment you want to add, and then click  to save your comment and
return to the previous window.
Save Prices to Disk

To save prices:
1. Right-click on the Price field and select Save Prices to Disk. The Save Prices to Disk
window appears, which allows you to make changes to ingredient prices and then save
those changes without returning to the Maintenance window of Brill Formulation.
2. To save prices for specific ingredients: In the Selected column, click the check box for
the ingredient price you want to save.
3. After you have made your selections, click 

to save those prices directly to Brill
Formulation without having to make the price changes in Brill Formulation –
Maintenance.
Perform Parametric Analysis

infeasible.
minimum or maximum.
Analysis.
NOTE: You must be on either the Price, Minimum, or Maximum column when you
right-click. (Otherwise, the Perform Parametric Analysis option will not be
displayed.)
2. In the setup window, enter a beginning value and an ending value for a range you
would like to analyze.
Ingredients/Nutrients Table - Quick Reference

This section describes each column of the table on the Brill Formulation Optimization window.
Code Displays the ingredient or nutrient code. This column cannot be
changed.
Name Displays the description of the ingredient or nutrient. This column
cannot be changed.
Solution Amount Displays the solution amount (as actual or percentage). To change
the amount from actual to percentage, or vice versa, click .
Price Displays the price of the ingredient or nutrient.
* Indicates stock status. When the ingredient or nutrient is in stock,
this field is blank. When the ingredient or nutrient is out of stock,
this field displays –O.
Tip: You can change the status of an ingredient by right-clicking
on the ingredient you want to change. Then, click Change
Stock Status.
Minimum The Minimum and Maximum columns allow you to set minimum and
maximum restrictions on ingredients or nutrients.
Maximum
Previous Solution Displays the amount that was in the Solution Amount column before
the solution was optimized.
Solution Difference Displays the difference between the amount displayed in the
Solution Amount column
and the amount displayed in the Previous Solution column.
Stored Amount Displays the amount that is currently in the Stored Formula.
Low Cost These columns are break points based on weight restrictions only.
These price points are valid if the price is the only change made:
Low Amount
Low Cost – Displays the price at which more of the
High Cost ingredient would be used.
High Amount Low Amount – Displays the amount that would be used at the
Lo Cost.
High Cost – Displays the price at which the program would
use less of an ingredient.
High Amount – Displays the amount that would be used at the
Hi Cost.
Rest Cost Displays the restriction cost, which gives you an indication of the
cost for placing a minimum or maximum on a particular ingredient
or nutrient
The restriction cost is calculated as: the current cost of the
ingredient/nutrient per batch minus the replacement cost.
UnRounded Amount Displays the amount in the Solution Amount column before it was
rounded.
UnRounded Previous Displays the amount in the Previous Solution column before it was
rounded.
Sensitivity When viewing a solution with the Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis
option turned on, the sensitivity information is displayed in the Extra
Value, Extra, Savings Value, and Savings columns for ingredients at
the Minimum or Maximum.
The extra cost will tell you the difference when the ingredient/
nutrient is allowed to change to the number displayed in the Extra
Value column. The savings column displays the difference when the
ingredient/nutrient is allowed to change to the number displayed in
the Savings Value column.
NOTE: By default, the Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis option is
turned off. To turn on this option at a system level, open
Foundation Utilities, click the File menu and select Edit
Database Configuration. Then, click the Options tab and
select the Use Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis for Multi-
Blend option.
Each user may also turn the Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis
option on (or off) by clicking the System menu, selecting
Options, and then selecting Use Enhanced Sensitivity
Analysis for Multi-Blend.
Optimize
To optimize a set of formulas, click . The system recalculates the available ingredients,
amounts, etc. and presents a feasible solution for the set of formulas.
Optimize and Verify
Optimize and Verify is an optional feature of Brill Formulation. If you are interested
in purchasing this option, or to learn more, contact your sales representative.
Optimize and Verify is an optional module within Brill Formulation Optimization that works with
Feed Tags and allows you to test the medications that are included in a formula. You‘ll know
quickly whether the set meets your nutritional requirements as well as federal and state
regulatory restrictions (which are contained within the Master Medications List of Feed Tags).
NOTE: This process does not result in the creation of a Feed Tag, but only reports to you
whether a formula will generate a valid Feed Tag, so that you do not have to optimize
a formula, save that solution, and then take the saved formula solution into Feed Tags
to verify that the formula is a valid medicated formula. The Optimize and Verify option
saves time and increases productivity as both functions (Optimize and Verify) can be
performed with a single click of a button.
Setting up Optimize and Verify

The setup required for this optional module is fairly simple. However, you must first
ensure that the Security File you are using for Brill Formulation has the Verify module
enabled. If not, please contact your sales representative or a Brill Formulation customer
support specialist to purchase this optional module. Once you have a security file that has
this module enabled, you can enable the option for use with this application as follows:
1. Open FMS Foundation Utilities. (Click the Windows Start button, point to Programs,
point to Feed Management Systems, point to Brill Formulation, and click FMS
Foundation Utilities.)
2. Log into the FMS Foundation Utilities program using your Brill Formulation User ID and
password.
3. Click the File menu and select Edit Database Configuration.
4. Click the Options tab. The list of user-controlled options appears.
5. If the Verify Medications option is not already selected, click on it to select it. (A check
mark appears in the check box to the left of the option to indicate that the option is
selected.)
6. Click to save your changes.

7. Click to exit the FMS Foundation Utilities program.
8. The next step is to ensure that you go through the proper setup of the Feed Tags
program in conjunction with this particular Brill Formulation database. Please refer to
the Feed Tags Installation and Instruction manuals for the proper setup of Feed Tags.
Once the Feed Tags program is properly set up to work with your desired Brill
Formulation database, you are now ready to use the Verify function of Brill Formulation.
Using Optimize and Verify

Proceed with the normal formulation of a formula set. Once you have added the necessary
ingredients, including medicated ingredients, you may verify the medications included in
your formula by clicking (or by clicking the File menu and selecting Optimize and
Verify). The formula set is optimized and verified. If the formula set fails to meet the
medicated restrictions (in the Master Medications List of Feed Tags), an alert box appears
and notifies you of the problem.
This provides the option of viewing a report of the failed verification. If you are adjusting a
formula and know how to resolve the error, select No to return to the Optimization
window and adjust the content of your formula.
If you do not know how to resolve the error, select Yes to generate a report of the failed
verification. The report provides the Plant Code, Formula Code, Nutrient Code, Nutrient
Name, Value in the formula, and a Compare value to help determine appropriate changes.
The report also specifies the error with written text toward the bottom of the report. Using
this information, you may plan any changes to the formula needed to ensure that the
formula meets regulatory requirements. Once you are done with the report, close it and
you are then returned to the Optimization window to continue work on the formula set.
NOTE: If the formula meets the medicated requirements outlined in the Master
Medications List, no alert box or other information is displayed related to the
verification of the formula. You are only notified of problems when a formula does
not meet the requirements when you select Optimize and Verify.
Store Solution
The Store Solution option allows you to create a stored formula, which is an optimized version
of the formula specification that you can send to production. How is this different than using
the Save Solution option? The Save Solution option allows you to save the changes that have
been made up to this point; however, the formula will not be saved permanently to a stored
formula that can be sent to production. If you close the formula set, the changes you made
will still be lost unless you use the Store Solution option.
Tip: Formulas that are ―Infeasible‖ cannot be stored using the Store Solution option.
However, you can save the changes you‘ve made so far using the Save Solution option.
To store the solution, complete the following steps:

1. Click the File menu and select Store Solution. The Save Stored Formula window
appears. The current plant and formula specification code are displayed in the Plant and
2. To change the plant (if you want it to be different than the formula spec), click the Plant
field and enter a new plant code, or click to select a Plant code from a list.
3. To change the formula code, click the Formula Code field and enter a new formula code,
or click to select a formula code from a list.
Check to save as Select this option if you do not want to replace the
temporary archived formula current stored formula being used for production. This
option will only work if the Archive option is activated.
Check to edit stored comments Select this option if you want to add or change any
notes you have made on this specification before
creating the stored formula.
Do Pellet Creation Select this option if you have defined a pellet premix
and you want the pellet formulas saved when this
stored formula is saved.
Save Formula Spec Select this option if you want to save the formula
specifications when you create the stored formula. The
stored formula and formula specification are saved to
the same plant/formula entered in the Plant and
5. Click to create the stored formula. If a stored formula already exists with the same
plant and formula code, a message appears asking if you want to overwrite it. Click OK to
overwrite the existing stored formula, or click Cancel to return to the Save Stored
Formula window.
Parametrics
infeasible.
minimum or maximum.
Analysis.
NOTE: You must be on either the Price, Minimum, or Maximum column when you right-
click. (Otherwise, the Perform Parametric Analysis option will not be displayed.)
2. In the setup window, enter a beginning value and an ending value for a range you would
like to analyze.

Save Formula Spec
To save a solution back to the original formula specification:
1. Click the File menu and select Save Formula Spec. The Save Formula Specification
window appears.
2. If necessary, change the plant location and formula code.
3. Click  . When updating the original formula specification, the formula code must match.
If it does, a message is displayed to warn you that you are about to overwrite the original
specification. To continue and overwrite the original formula specification, click Yes. (If
you do not want to overwrite the original, click Cancel to return to the Save Formula
Specification window without saving changes.)
Save Solution
The solution file may be saved from the Optimization window. Reports allowing the user to
print from the solution are printed by selecting the BUFFER.MLS file.
Close Set
To close the set that is currently open:
1. Click the File menu and select Close Set. A new dialog box appears.
2. To continue with closing the set, click Yes. The set is closed and you are returned to a
blank Optimization window. (Clicking No will return you to the Optimization window
without closing the set.)
Tip: You can add the Close Set button to a tool bar by completing the following steps:
a. Right-click on the toolbar area of the window and a pop-up menu appears.
b. Click Customize the toolbar(s). The Toolbar Customization window appears.
c. Click on the Commands tab.
d. In the Categories List (on the left), click The File Tools option. A list of commands
appears to the right.
e. Scroll down the list until you locate the Close Set option.
f. Click and hold on the Close Set icon and then drag it to where you want it on the
toolbar on the Optimization window.
Tip: Make sure the position of the button is where you want it before you drop it to
the toolbar. To ensure you have the correct location, a highlight bar will
appear on the toolbar to indicate the location of the icon. (The bar will not
appear if you are not pointing to a toolbar.)
g. When the button has been created, click the Close on the Toolbar Customization
window to close the window and return to the Optimization window.
Ingredient Groups
Ingredient groups allow you to set minimum and maximum restrictions on a group of
ingredients. For example, if you wanted to set a maximum restriction on all corn within a
Multi-Blend set, you could create a ―Total Corn‖ group, which would be set up to include all
corn ingredients (coarsely ground corn, finely ground corn, etc.). Then, a maximum restriction
could be placed on the Total Corn ingredient group.
Setting up Ingredient Groups

Setting up ingredient groups is a 3-step process (outlined below):
Step 1 – Define ingredient groups
Step 2 - Add ingredients to ingredient groups
Step 3 - Set minimum or maximum tonnage restrictions
Step 1 – Define ingredient groups

1. On the main Optimization window (prior to opening a Multi-Blend set), click the File
menu and select Define Ingredient Groups. The Define Ingredient Groups window
If necessary, you can delete a group

at any time by completing the
following steps:
1. Highlight the row (click the far
left column of the row - ).
2. Right-click on the row and select
Delete Selected Row(s).
2. For each group you want to add, create a new row by entering information in to each
of the following columns:
Code Enter a code for the new ingredient group (up to 8 alphanumeric
characters).
Name Enter a name/description for the ingredient group (up to 36
alphanumeric characters).
3. Click 
. The ingredient groups are created. Continue with ―Step 2 – Add ingredients
to ingredient groups.‖
Step 2 – Add ingredients to ingredient groups

1. Click the File menu and select Add Ingredients to Groups. The Add Ingredient to
Groups window appears (see picture below).
The groups in this list

were set up on the
Define Ingredient
Groups window.
2. For each ingredient you want to add, create a new row by entering information in to
each of the following columns:
Code Enter the ingredient code, or click to select an ingredient code from
the list.
Name The name of the ingredient (as set up in Brill Formulation Maintenance)
is displayed.
Tip: If you typed a code in the Code field (instead of clicking to
select a code from the list), the name will not be displayed until
after a group is selected and you press TAB to move to the next
row.
Group If you selected an ingredient code by clicking , the first group in the
list is displayed by default. To change the ingredient code, click the
Group column to display the drop-down arrow. Then, click the drop-
down arrow and select a group from the list.
If you entered an ingredient code, click the Group column to display the
drop-down arrow. Then, click the drop-down arrow and select a group
from the list.
3. Click 
. The ingredients are added to a group. You can now set minimum and
maximum tonnage restrictions for ingredient groups when necessary.
Step 3 – Set minimum or maximum tonnage restrictions

Minimum and maximum restrictions can be set on the Brill Formulation Optimization
window by completing the following steps:
1. Click the drop-down list in the upper left corner of the window and select Groups for
plantcode / All formulas (see picture below). Ingredient groups are displayed in the list.
2. Enter minimum and/or maximum tonnage restrictions in the Minimum and Maximum
columns respectively.
3. Click to optimize the set using the minimum and maximum restrictions as entered.
Selection Criteria
When a large set of formulas is optimized, several formulas may only change slightly in which
case it would not be beneficial to create a new production formula. With the Selection Criteria
option, you can quickly and easily identify which formulas have changed sufficiently (according
to the selection criteria) to justify creating a new stored formula for production.
To enter selection criteria:
1. On the main Optimization window (with a formula set open), click the Edit menu and
select Create Selection. The Select Criteria window appears.
NOTE: You can enter more than one selection criteria. For example, if you only
want to create new stored formulas if the volume percentage has increased
by 1% and the formula savings is $1 or more, you would set the Volume %
field to ―1‖ and the Formula Savings field to ―1.00‖.
Field: Description:
Volume % Enter the percentage of volume decrease required to
create a new stored formula.
Stored Formula Cost Enter the decrease in cost required to create a new stored
formula.
New Formula Cost
Field: Description:
Formula Savings Enter the savings required to create a new stored formula.
Production Savings
Formula Change % Enter the percentage of change (to all ingredients; either
up or down) required to create a new stored formula.
Usage Sensitivity Enter the decrease in usage sensitivity required to create
a new stored formula.
3. When all criteria has been entered, click 

. The formula set is optimized, and the
Selection Results window appears to display the results (see picture below).
These columns display the changes to each formula

based on the selection criteria. Values that meet the
A check mark is placed in the Fix selection criteria entered on the previous window are
column for each formula that does not displayed in red.
meet the selection criteria. If the Fix
column is checked, the formula will not
be optimized according to the formula
specification (the current stored
formula is used).
If the Fix column is blank, the formula
will be re-optimized according to the
4. To re-optimize the set according to the selection criteria, click . The set is
optimized and the main Optimization window appears.
To modify the selection criteria, click to return to the Selection Criteria window.
Part 4: Reports
This menu allows you to print the following reports.
Report: Availability: Description:
Usage Report Used for batch sets or Multi- This report allows you to display a list of
Blend sets (MLS files). ingredients used in the batch or Multi-Blend
This report can be displayed formula set.
from the Brill Formulation
Optimization window after
opening/optimizing a set.
Summary Report Used for batch sets or Multi- This report displays either the amount of an
Blend sets. ingredient per formula (100%) or the amount
This report can be displayed of an ingredient per formula part (1).
after optimizing a batch or
opening/optimizing a Multi-
Blend set.
Shadow Report Used for Professional This report reviews the last optimization of
Nutritionist, batch sets, or either the formula specification currently
Multi-Blend sets. displayed in Professional Nutritionist or all
This report can be displayed formulas in the current set (depending on
after optimizing. where you are in the system), and provides an
overview of where the system would change
ingredient amounts and at what price.
Solution Report Used for Professional This report reviews the last optimization of
Nutritionist, batch sets, or either the formula specification in the
Multi-Blend sets. Professional Nutritionist window, or all
This report can be displayed formulas in the current set (depending on
after optimizing. where you are in the system).
Sensitivity Report Used for Professional This report displays ingredients/nutrients and
Nutritionist, batch sets, or their restriction costs or savings.
Multi-Blend sets. An additional Create Selection option allows
This report can be displayed you to filter the information displayed in the
after optimizing. report by either Ingredient Threshold and/or
Default Nutrient Threshold amount. For
example, if you entered ―1‖ in the Ingredient
Threshold field, the report would display all
ingredients where the restriction results in a
cost of $1.00 or more.
Compare Report Used for Professional This report compares the selected formula to
Nutritionist, batch sets, or the optimized solution and displays the
Multi-Blend sets. differences in the formula as well as the
This report can be displayed individual ingredients.
after optimizing.
Printing a Report
The process for printing any of the available reports is similar.
1. Click the Report menu and select the report you want to print. A new window appears similar
to the following:

on the report.
If you want to Comments entered here will
preview the report print just below the header and
before printing it, above the report information.
click the View
Report On The
Screen option box.
To have the window
Close after
Tips:
You can make additional changes to the report by clicking . The Report Template
Properties window appears, allowing you to change the report template settings. Prior
to printing a report, you may want to review options available on the Sections/Options
tab. The Sections/Options tab often contains several different options that allow you to
customize the information displayed on the report.
Additional options may be available depending on the report you selected. For more
information about a specific report, click here.
2. When all settings have been specified, click .
3. If you selected the ―View Report On the Screen‖ option, the report is displayed in a window
Use the toolbar to view additional

pages, print the report, and
more. Refer to the following table
for more information.
Close This button allows you to close the preview window and return
to the previous window.
Show/Hide Report Click this button to alternate between showing and hiding the
Guides report guides displayed on the screen. The guides display the
separate sections of the report, guide you to differing types of
data available in the report, and identify margins.
First Page Click this button to view the first page of a report that has
multiple pages. (If you are currently viewing the first page,
this button is disabled and cannot be used.)
Previous Page Click this button to view to the previous page of a multiple-
page report. (If you are currently viewing the first page, this
button is disabled and cannot be used.)
Next Page Click this button to view the next page of a multiple-page
report. (If you are currently viewing the last page, this button
is disabled and cannot be used.)
Last Page Click this button to view the last page of a multiple-page
report. If you are at the last page, this button appears gray on
the screen and cannot be used.
Magnify Report This button allows you to make the report appear larger or
smaller. Click this button and then select an option from the
list or select the percentage of enlargement or reduction.
Print Click this button to print the report. The standard Windows
Print window appears where you can select the number of
copies you want to print, specify whether to collate the copies,
determine whether you want to print all pages or a range of
pages, specify printer settings, and more.
Find Item in Report These two buttons allow you to search for a specific item of
information within the report.
Find The Next
Click to begin searching. The FMSReport window appears.
Occurrence Of The
Item In the Search For field, enter the string of characters you want
to search for, and then click OK. The system searches the
report and locates the page with the first instance of the string
you entered. To find the next page containing the information
you entered, click .
Copy Text in The This button allows you to copy text in the report and save it to
Report To The the ―clipboard‖ (making it available to be pasted in other
Clipboard applications such as Excel, Word, etc.)
Save Text In This button allows you to create a text file directly from the
Report To A File report as it is displayed.
To create a text file:
1. Click . The Select Text File To Save window appears.
2. Select the folder you want to save the file to, and then
click Save. The file is created and saved as a text file.
Copy Page To The This button allows you to save the current page of the report
Clipboard As A Picture in a picture format, allowing you to use it into another
program such as Word or a graphics program such as Paint.
To save a page as a picture:
1. Display the page of the report you want to copy.
2. Click . The Select BMP file to save window appears.
5. Click Save. The file is created and saved in *.bmp format,
and the FMSReport box appears, displaying the location of
the file.
Save The Document This button allows you to save the report as a PDF (Portable
As A PDF File Document Format) file. (This allows others to view the file
using PDF readers such as Acrobat Reader.)
To save the report as a PDF file:
1. Click . The Select PDF file to save window appears.
4. Click Save. The file is created and saved in *.pdf format.
Convert Document This button allows you to create a PDF file and immediately
To PDF And Email email it.
To create a PDF file and email it to someone:
1. Click . The PDF file is created and your email program
opens a new email window with the file already attached.
2. Add the subject and body information of the email, enter
the recipient‘s email address, and send the email as usual.
Part 5: System Menu

Chapter 1: Options
Click the Options menu to display the Options window. This window contains four tabs (described
in the following sections) that allow you to define system, restrictions, cost and precision options.
Options
The Options tab allows you to change the following options:
Tip: Click the option to either add or remove a check mark. If a check mark is visible, the
option is selected.
Sort ingredients by Select this option if you want to sort the ingredients by the
the amount column number of pounds in the formula. (If this option is selected when
you view/print a stored formula report, the ingredient with the
most pounds prints first and the ingredient with the fewest pounds
prints last.)
If this option is not selected, ingredients are sorted by ingredient
code.
Sort rejected Select this option if you want rejected ingredients listed at the end
ingredients at end of the formula.
Ignore Stock Status Select this option if you want to be able to include ingredients in
formulations regardless of whether they are currently in or out of
stock.
If this option is not selected, out of stock ingredients will not be
used in feasible formulations. If the ingredient would normally
have been included in the formulation, it will is displayed at the
bottom of the list of ingredients and ―-O‖ appears in the * column
to indicate that the ingredient is out of stock.
Clear Minimum for O/S Select this option if you want the system to clear the minimum
Ings setting requirements for out of stock ingredients.
If this option is not selected, the minimum setting requirements
for out of stock ingredients will not be cleared.
Use production Select this option if you want the system to consider production
minimums minimums when optimizing formulas. (Typically, this should be
turned on.) For example, if the minimum amount of corn your
production site can include is 10lbs, formulas that include corn will
be optimized so that at least 10lbs if used.
If this option is not selected, you may need to manually configure
formulas that include ingredients that do not consider production
minimums.
Enable swing Select this option to enable swing, which determines how quickly
an ingredient can be added or removed from a formula.
If this option is not selected, swing is disabled.
NOTE: Minimum and maximum constraints for swing may be set
up in Foundation Utilities (click the File menu, select Edit
Database Configuration and then select the Swing
tab).
Rounding Code Enter the rounding code. (Rounding codes are used to determine
how the ingredient amounts are to be rounded off during
optimization.)
If this option is not selected, the default rounding code is used.
NOTE: Default values for rounding codes are set up in
Foundation Utilities (click the File menu, select Edit
Database Configuration and then select the
Optimization tab). The rounding code in this tab will
override the default rounding code in Foundation Utilities.
Use Enhanced Select this option to turn on the Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis
Sensitivity Analysis for option for ingredients within single least cost Optimization.
Single The Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis option is a decision making tool
that attempts to predict what the ingredient usage within an
optimized solution would have been without minimum and
maximum restrictions, and allows you to see what cost difference
might exist if minimum or maximum restrictions are changed.
Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis must be turned on to get
Savings/Extra sensitivity analysis information for ingredients at
the Minimum or Maximum restriction.
NOTE: This option may be turned on within Foundation Utilities
(click the File menu, select Edit Database
Configuration and then select the Options tab).
Use Enhanced Select this option to turn on the Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis
Sensitivity Analysis for option for ingredients within Multi-Blend.
Multi-Blend The Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis option is a decision making tool
that attempts to predict what the ingredient usage within an
optimized solution would have been without minimum and
maximum restrictions, and allows you to see what cost difference
might exist if minimum or maximum restrictions are changed.
Enhanced Sensitivity Analysis must be turned on to get
Savings/Extra sensitivity analysis information for ingredients at
the Minimum or Maximum restriction.
NOTE: This option may be turned on within Foundation Utilities
(click the File menu, select Edit Database
Configuration and then select the Options tab).
Save as default options Select this option if you want to save the current settings as the
default options for the current user. For example, if you are
currently logged in as USER1, these settings will become default
settings for USER1, but not other users.
If this option is not selected, the system will use the settings
specified in Foundation Utilities the next time you log in as USER1.
Restrictions
The Restrictions tab allows you to change the following:
NOTE: The settings on this tab will override the settings in Foundation Utilities (click the File
menu, select Edit Database Configuration and then select the Restrictions tab).
Ingredient Restriction Select one of the following options to determine how the
Cost ingredient restriction cost is calculated:
Ingredient Restriction Cost per Batch
Ingredient Restriction Cost per Ton/Tonne
Ingredient Restriction Cost per Lb./Kg.
Factor This field allows you to specify the ingredient restriction factor.
For example, if you want to see the ingredient restriction cost per
100 pounds or kg. select the Formula Cost per Lb./Kg. option
and set this field to 100.
Nutrient Restriction Select one of the following options to determine how the nutrient
Cost restriction cost is calculated:
Nutrient Restriction Cost per Batch
Nutrient Restriction Cost per Ton/Tonne
Nutrient Restriction Cost per Lb./Kg.
Factor This field allows you to specify the nutrient restriction factor.
For example, if you want to see the nutrient restriction cost per
100 pounds or kg. select the Formula Cost per Lb./Kg. option
and set this field to 100.
Cost
The Cost tab allows you to change the following:
menu, select Edit Database Configuration and then select the Cost/Precision tab).
field to 100.
Precision
The Precision tab allows you to change decimal precision for the following:
menu, select Edit Database Configuration and then select the Cost/Precision tab).
Tip: Enter the number of decimal places (0-5) you want the system to display, or use the
up and down arrows to increase or decrease the number of decimals.
Field: Example:
decimal.)
decimal.)
decimal.)
Chapter 2: Startup Language

To set a default language file for Brill Formulation Optimization:
1. Click the System menu and select Startup Language. The Startup Language window appears.
Field: Example:
Font Displays the font currently being used.
To change the font:
1. Click .
2. Select the font, font style (regular, italic, bold, etc.), and size.
In the script field, select Western.
3. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Language
Setup window.
1. Click .
Tips:
The file name begins with ―V7MNT" and has a ―.LNG‖
extension (for example, V7MNTCAFR.LNG).
To set up languages for display, refer to the ―Language
Definition Maintenance‖ section.
3. Click Open.
3. Click  to save your changes and return to the main window of Brill Formulation Optimization.
NOTE: You must exit and restart Brill Formulation Optimization before the new language file
can be displayed.
Chapter 3: Change Language

Before you can change languages, you must have the language files resident in your Brill
Formulation directory. These are available from the Feed Management Systems web site:
www.feedsys.com
Select Brill Formulation from the directory, then Customer Source, then Brill Formulation/Updates.
At the end of the Language Files area, you will find a list of foreign language zip files available free
to download. Once downloaded, extract the files to the Brill Formulation directory on your hard
drive.
Once the files are extracted, you will need to enable them. To do so, move or copy the files
beginning with BRLTL to your C/Windows/System folder. There must be one for each language.
Look for the three-letter identifier just before the extension to identify each language.
Eng=English. Rus=Russian. Chi=Chinese. Tur=Turkish. Esp=Spanish. Por=Portuguese.
You will not be able to run Russian or Chinese languages unless you have the corresponding
Russian or Chinese Windows operating system.
To change to a different language display:

1. Click the System menu and select Change Language. The Startup Language window
appears.
3. Click  to save the changes and return to the main window of Brill Formulation Optimization.
Part 6: Custom and Help

Chapter 1: Custom Menu
You can open Brill Formulation Maintenance without closing Brill Formulation Optimization by
clicking the Custom menu and selecting Maintenance. The Brill Formulation Maintenance window
opens (you do not need to log in).
Chapter 2: Help Menu

Display Help
Brill Formulation Help contains information and instructions on using Brill Formulation. You can
search for information about a specific topic or save your favorite topics for quick and easy
reference in the future.
To display Brill Formulation Help, click the Help menu and select Display Help.
Display User Manual

The Display User Manual option allows you to view and/or print a traditional instruction
manual for Brill Formulation.
To display the Brill Formulation Instruction Manual, click the Help menu and select Display
User Manual.
Support
There are two options in the Support drop-down menu for Brill Formulation Maintenance. They
are ―Send Email to Support‖ and ―Visit the FMS Web Site.‖
Send Email to Support

This option allows you to send an email directly to a Brill Formulation customer support
specialist. When you select ―Send Email to Support‖ a new email window is opened and
the To address is automatically filled in with the appropriate email address for a Brill
Formulation customer support specialist.
Visit the FMS Web Site

This option allows you to view Feed Management Systems official web site. If you log in to
the web site, you can view the latest announcements, download product updates, submit
requests to a Brill Formulation customer support specialist, and more.
Debug Mode
Debug Mode places Brill Formulation Optimization into a debugging mode for diagnosing
problems with the system. When you place the system into Debug Mode two additional
options appear in the Support drop-down menu (Save Debug Files and Email Debug Files
to Support). See the following sections for additional information about these options.
Starting Debug Mode

NOTE: If a check mark appears to the left of the selection, the system is operating in
Debug Mode.
1. Start Brill Formulation-Optimization.

2. Click the Help menu, point to Support and select Debug Mode.
3. You must now operate the system in a manner to re-create the problem you are
encountering. Once the error or other unwanted result is encountered you proceed
to then save the debug files. This allows your Brill Formulation customer support
specialist to view the files and situation in which you encountered the unwanted
result. The two methods of saving the Debug ZIP file are described in the following
descriptions.
Stopping Debug Mode

Click the Help menu, point to Support. If a check mark appears to the left of the Debug
Mode option, the system is currently running in Debug Mode. If the check mark is not
displayed next to the option, click the Debug Mode option. The menu closes and the
system is no longer in a debugging mode of operation.
Saving Debug Files

NOTE: You must be in Debug Mode in order to use this option. See the ―Starting
Debug Mode‖ section for instructions.
Once you have recreated the problem and contacted a Brill Formulation customer
support specialist, you may be asked to save the necessary files for the support team.
(This will allow them to diagnose any problems you may be encountering.)
To save the debug files:
1. When instructed, click the Help menu, point to Support, and click Save Debug
Files. The Specify File to Save Debug Files window. This window allows you to
define a specific file name and location for the file. (This is a standard ZIP file and
will contain the files the support specialist needs to fully answer your questions
related to any problems or errors you are encountering with the Brill Formulation
system.) The window creates a standard file name, which you may change upon
the instruction of the support specialist, if necessary.
2. Once you define the file name and its location, click Save. The system then obtains
the needed files and creates the ZIP file. You may then send that file to the support
specialist. Refer to the ―Emailing Debug Files to Support‖ section for instructions.
Emailing Debug Files to Support

Click the Help menu, point to Support, and click Email Debug Files to Support.
The system launches your email client, attaches the ZIP file, and fills out necessary
information for the system to send the file with the appropriate information. Once you
send the email, you may then exit the system and proceed with the next operation as
prescribed by the support specialist.
Chapter 3: About
On the main window, click the Help menu and select About. The About Box window appears,
allowing you to view session, version, copyright, and contact information.
Tip: To view a report of the options set up for your system, click . The report is
displayed in Microsoft Notepad. This report provides more detailed information on
system settings and available options.
When you‘ve finished viewing information, click  to select the plant and return to the main
window.
Part 7: Exit
To exit Brill Formulation Optimization click on the File menu and select Exit. A confirmation window
appears. (This feature helps to avoid inadvertent data loss in a situation where you have not saved a
solution and inadvertently ended the program.)
If you decide you do not want to end the program, select No and you are returned to the Optimization
window. If you decide you want to end the program, select Yes and the program closes.
Using Brill Foundation Utilities

FMS Foundation Utilities allows you to perform back-office and system maintenance functions for Brill
Formulation Maintenance and Optimization including the following:
Activating a new license or updating an existing license.
Adding/changing user information.
Changing the configuration of Brill Formulation on a specific workstation.
Rebuilding data files (to properly maintain your system).
Viewing the security file for easier communication with a Brill Formulation customer support
specialist.
To open FMS Foundation Utilities:

Click the Windows Start button, point to All Programs, point to Feed Management Systems, point to
Brill Formulation, and click FMS Foundation Utilities. The FMS Foundation Utilities window appears.
There are seven menu options available in the FMS Foundation Utilities window. The following parts of the
manual are based upon these seven primary areas of operation. These areas are:
File
Security
Reports
Rebuild
System
Help
To select one of these options, simply select the option and a drop-down menu appears and displays the
options available under each primary area of operation.
Part 1: File
Each of option under the File menu provides access to a different area of operation for the FMS
Foundation Utilities. The following Chapters of the manual detail the operation of each of these
options.
Chapter 1: Edit Database Configuration

In Foundation Utilities, click the File menu and select Edit Database Configuration. The
Properties window for that database appears. This window has several tabs where specified
parameters are defined for the operation of Brill Formulation. Each of the following sections details
the setting of these parameters and how they affect the operation of the Brill Formulation system.
General
The General tab allows you access to the following parameters for the operation of Brill
Formulation:
Field: Description
Default Plant Enter the plant you want to use as the default plant. (The
plant can be changed if necessary by changing the Current
Plant field on the main window of Brill Formulation
Maintenance, or in different windows within the Plant
column/field in Brill Formulation Optimization – depending
on where you are.)
Field: Description
Default Pricing Plant Enter the plant you want to use as default when
determining/using ingredient costs.
If this field is blank, pricing information comes from the
default plant. (The pricing can be changed if necessary by
changing the Alternate Plant field on the main window of
Brill Formulation Maintenance, or in different windows
within the Plant column/field in Brill Formulation
Optimization – depending on where you are.)
Formula Spec Base Plant Enter the plant you want to use as default for formula
specifications.
If this field is blank, the default (or current) plant is used.
Dry Matter Nutrient Number This field allows you to define the default nutrient number
for dry matter.
Enter the code for the nutrient you want to use as default.
Default Batch Size This field allows you to define the default batch size.
Enter the default size.
Display Ingredient Restrictions This field allows you to define the default method of
displaying ingredient restrictions on reports.
As Actual Amounts
As Percents
Temporary Files Location This field allows you to limit the type of files stored in the
Temporary Files Location.
Click this field and select the types of files you want saved
in the temporary files location.
Ingredient Pricing Units This field allows you to define how pricing is displayed in
the system. By default, the system will display prices per
hundredweight, and one ton equals 2,000 pounds.
To change pricing units, click this field and select a new
option from the list.
Options
This tab displays the optional modules and features you want available to your Brill
Formulation system for all users. To activate an option, place a check mark in the check box
next to the option you want to activate. Remove a check mark to make that option
unavailable.
Tip: To view the Options tab, complete the following steps:
1. In Foundation Utilities, click the File menu and select Edit Database
Configuration. The Properties window for that database appears.
2. Click the Options tab.
Optimization
The Optimization tab allows you to specify the following settings relating to Optimization:
Tip: To view the Optimization tab, complete the following steps:
2. Click the Optimization tab.
Field: Description
Costed Slack Initial Multiplier Please talk to a Brill Formulation customer support
specialist before making any changes to this field.
Costed Slack Global Multiplier Please talk to a Brill Formulation customer support
Costed Slack Global Please talk to a Brill Formulation customer support
Group Multiplier specialist before making any changes to this field.
Plant Multiplier specialist before making any changes to this field.
Plant Group Multiplier specialist before making any changes to this field.
MIP Cost Tolerance Please talk to a Brill Formulation customer support
Single Formula Cost Tolerance This field should be set to ―0.01‖. Please talk to a Brill
Formulation customer support specialist before making
any changes to this field.
Default Rounding Code This field allows you to determine a default rounding code
if no code is defined for a specific operation. This rounding
code is used when no other options sets it before
performing calculations or optimizations.
Refer to the ―Book 4: Appendix; Chapter 4: Rounding
Codes‖ section for descriptions of each rounding code.
O/S Ing Price Multiplier This option allows you to use out-of-stock ingredients in a
solution when the only other resources available would
cause the solution to become infeasible. This field should
be set to ―10‖. Please talk to a Brill Formulation customer
support specialist before making any changes to this field.
This option works in conjunction with the ―Ignore stock
status‖ option (on the Options tab). If the ―Ignore stock
status‖ option is selected, this field is ignored. If the
―Ignore stock status‖ option is not selected, out-of-stock
ingredients are used, but assigned a high price. The price
is automatically calculated by multiplying the highest price
used in the formula by the number in the O/S Ing Price
Multiplier field.
You can also select one of the following options:

Option: Description
Use Scaling During the optimization routine some models use quite
small and quite large numbers. This can cause problems in
solving the optimization. When this options is selected, the
system performs an additional scaling routine to try to
equalize this high/low variance, which may reduce some
ranging sensitivity. If you get OML errors during
optimization, try selecting this option.
NOTE: You must stop the program and restart in order
for this option to take effect after you have
changed the selection.
Use Enhanced Multiblend When this option is selected, the Infeasibility report used
Infeasibility Reporting in Brill Formulation Optimization Multi-Blend is simplified
to help you find the infeasibility more quickly.
If this option is not selected, a more detailed report is
displayed.
Swing
The Swing tab allows you to specify the following settings relating to Swing:
Tip: To view the Swing tab, complete the following steps:
2. Click the Swing tab.
Field: Description
Inner Price Threshold Type This field is used to test the change in formula cost.
The system compares the change in formula cost between
the new solution and the currently stored formula and
displays the difference as either an actual amount or a
percentage.
As Actual Amounts
As Percents
Outer Price Threshold Type This field is used to test the change in formula cost.
The system compares the change in formula cost between
the new solution and the currently stored formula and
displays the difference as either an actual amount or a
percentage.
As Actual Amounts
As Percents
Field: Description
Swing Type This field allows you to define how swing amounts should
be displayed on reports.
Default to Ingredient Restrictions – this option
allows you to defer this setting to the setting made
on the General tab in the Display Ingredient
Restrictions field.
As Percents – this option displays results in
percentages. Selecting this option will override the
setting on the General tab in the Display
Ingredient Restrictions field.
As Actual Amounts – this option displays results in
actual amounts. Selecting this option will override
the setting on the General tab in the Display
Ingredient Restrictions field.
Global Swing Low Nutrient This field allows you to impose the swing limits on
ingredients for EVERY formula where the ingredient is
present. Once you set up the nutrient value and include it
in the ingredient, you can then set a Global Swing Low
Nutrient and a Global Swing High Nutrient.
To impose global swing limits:
In the Global Swing Low Nutrient field, enter a nutrient
code. This nutrient and its swing value are then used to
determine the low swing value. Then, within optimization,
if a nutrient‘s value falls below the low swing limit
(determined by the nutrient code entered in this field),
you will be required to save a new stored formula.
NOTE: Before entering a value in this field, you should
discuss the use of this parameter with a Brill
Formulation customer support specialist. Only
advanced users should adjust this setting.
Global Swing High Nutrient This field allows you to impose the swing limits on
ingredients for EVERY formula where the ingredient is
present. Once you set up the nutrient value and include it
in the ingredient, you can then set a Global Swing Low
Nutrient and a Global Swing High Nutrient.
To impose global swing limits:
In the Global Swing Low Nutrient field, enter a nutrient
code. This nutrient and its swing value are then used to
determine the low swing value. Then, within optimization,
if a nutrient‘s value falls below the low swing limit
(determined by the nutrient code entered in this field),
you will be required to save a new stored formula.
NOTE: Before entering a value in this field, you should
discuss the use of this parameter with a Brill
Formulation customer support specialist. Only
advanced users should adjust this setting.
Verification
The Verification tab allows you to specify the following settings:
Tip: To view the Verification tab, complete the following steps:
2. Click the Verification tab.
Field: Description
Verification Base Plant This field allows you to define a base plant for verification of
formulas. The base plant is used to verify your stored formulas
against the formula specification and determine whether it falls
within the defined tolerances. (Defined tolerances are entered in
the Minimum Tolerance and Maximum Tolerance fields.)
Enter the code for the plant that will be the source of the formula
specifications. If you leave this field blank, the system compares
the stored formulas against the formula specifications stored in
the same plant.
Minimum Tolerance Enter the minimum tolerance level. During verification, a report is
generated to alert you of any formulas that do not fall within the
defined minimum and maximum tolerances when compared to the
Maximum Tolerance Enter the maximum tolerance level. During verification, a report is
generated to alert you of any formulas that do not fall within the
defined minimum and maximum tolerances when compared to the
Verify All Nutrients Select this option if you want the system to verify the nutrient
values during the verification process.
Cost/Precision
The Cost/Precision tab allows you to change the following cost settings:
Tip: To view the Cost/Precision tab, complete the following steps:
2. Click the Cost/Precision tab.
field to 100.
In addition, you can change decimal precision for the following:

Tip: Enter the number of decimal places (0-5) you want the system to display, or use the up
and down arrows to increase or decrease the number of decimals.
Field: Example:
decimal.)
decimal.)
decimal.)
Premix
The Premix tab allows you to specify the following settings:
Tip: To view the Premix tab, complete the following steps:
2. Click the Premix tab.
Field: Description
Update Premix Nutrients by Before entering a value in the ―Update Premix Nutrients by
Species Code Species Code‖ field, you should discuss the use of this
parameter with a Brill Formulation customer support
specialist. Only advanced users should change this setting.
Place Premix Flag (1) in this Before entering a value in the ―Place Premix Flag (1) in
Nutrient this Nutrient‖ field, you should discuss the use of this
parameter with a Brill Formulation customer support
specialist. Only advanced users should change this setting.
Restrictions
The Restrictions tab allows you to change the following:
Tip: To view the Restrictions tab, complete the following steps:
2. Click the Restrictions tab.
Ingredient Restriction Cost Select one of the following options to determine how the
ingredient restriction cost is calculated:
Tip: Only one option may be selected. (The selected
option appears green. Unselected options appear
red.)
Ingredient Restriction Cost per Batch
Ingredient Restriction Cost per Ton/Tonne
Ingredient Restriction Cost per Lb./Kg.
Factor Enter the ingredient restriction factor.
For example, if you want to see the ingredient restriction
cost per 100 pounds or kg., select the Formula Cost per
Lb./Kg. option and set this field to 100.
Nutrient Restriction Cost Select one of the following options to determine how the
nutrient restriction cost is calculated:
Tip: Only one option may be selected. (The selected
option appears green. Unselected options appear
red.)
Nutrient Restriction Cost per Batch
Nutrient Restriction Cost per Ton/Tonne
Nutrient Restriction Cost per Lb./Kg.
Factor Enter the nutrient restriction factor.
For example, if you want to see the nutrient restriction
cost per 100 pounds or kg., select the Formula Cost per
Lb./Kg. option and set this field to 100.
SQL Data Bridge

The SQL Data Bridge tab allows you to set up and use the SQL Data Bridge. The SQL Data
Bridge is an additional option that may be purchased, which provides real-time access to your
current and archived stored formulas in a Microsoft SQL Server database. Data saved in this
familiar format can easily be used to update your ERP or accounting system, or used for
reporting. Updates made from Brill Formulation Maintenance and Optimization are immediately
saved to the database, so your information is always current.
NOTE: SQL Server must be installed and working properly prior to using this feature. If you
are using SQL Server 2000, special setup is required on the workstation (not the
server). Special setup is not required for SQL Server 2005.
Complete the following steps on the workstation:
1. Open Windows Administrative Tools/Component Services.
a. Click the Windows Start button and select Control Panel.
b. Double-click on Administrative Tools.

c. Double-click on Component Services.
2. Expand the Component Services option, the Computers folder appears.
3. Expand the Computers folder.
4. Right-click on My Computer and select Properties.
5. Click the MSDTC tab.
6. In the ―Transaction Configuration‖ area, click the Security Configuration button.
7. Select the Network DTC Access option.
8. In the ―Transaction Manager Communication‖ area:
a. Select the Allow Outbound option.
b. Select the No Authentication Required option.
9. Click OK to save your changes and return to the My Computer Properties window.
10. Click OK to return to the Component Services window.
11. Close the Component Services window and the Administrative Tools window and
return to the Control Panel window.
12. Double-click on the Windows Firewall option.
13. Click the Exceptions tab.
14. Click the Add Programs button.
15. Browse to and select the msdtc.exe program (usually located in
[Windows/System32]).
16. Click OK to add the program and return to the Windows Firewall window.
17. Click OK to save the changes and return to the Control Panel window.
18. Close the Control Panel window. All changes have been made and the SQL Data
Bridge can now be configured as described in the next section.
Configuring the SQL Data Bridge

Before using the SQL Data Bridge option, you must set up the database, specify
authorization settings for the database, and enable the SQL Data Bridge option as follows:
NOTE: Typically, configuration is a one-time process. After you‘ve initially configured the
SQL Data Bridge, you will not need to reconfigure unless you want to change the
database being used.
1. On the SQL Data Bridge tab, click the Configure SQL Data Bridge button. The FMS
SQL Data Bridge Configuration Wizard appears.
Tip: To view the SQL Data Bridge tab, complete the following steps:
a. In Foundation Utilities, click the File menu and select Edit Database
b. Click the SQL Data Bridge tab.
2. Click the Next button. The next window appears.
3. Click the Server Name field and select a server from the list. (This is the server that
will hold the SQL Data Bridge database.)
4. Click the Next button. The next window appears, allowing you to specify how you will
log into the server.
Option: Description
Use Windows Select this option if you want Windows to authenticate the
Authentication user name and password when determining authorization to
use the SQL Data Bridge.
When this option is selected, the user name and password of
the person currently logged into Windows is used to access
the Microsoft SQL Server database.
Use SQL Server Select this option if you want SQL Server to authenticate the
Authentication user name and password. Then, enter the user name and
password needed to access the Microsoft SQL Server
database.
6. Click the Next button. The next window appears, allowing you to select a database.
7. If you‘ve already created a database, click the Database Name field and select a
database from the list.
To create a new database, type the name of the database in the Database Name field.
8. Click the Next button. The next window appears.
9. In the Comments area, enter any notes and/or descriptions as necessary to describe
the database being added/changed.
10. Click the Finish button. The Success box appears indicating that the database tables
were created successfully.
11. Click OK to return to the Default Data Properties window.
12. To enable SQL Data Bridge, click the Use SQL Data Bridge option. (This must be
selected in order to use SQL Data Bridge.)
13. In the ―Plant Usage‖ area, select one of the following options:
Option: Description
Use All Plants Select this option if you want to archive information for all
plants.
Use Selected Plants Select this option if you want to archive information only for
the plants you select.
To select plants:
1. Click . The Please Select Plants to be Archived window
appears. The plants available for selection are displayed
in the Available Plants area on the left.
2. Click on the plants you want to select and then click the
Select Plant(s) button. The plants are moved to the
Selected Plants area indicating that they have been
selected.
Tip: To select all plants, click the Select All Plants
button. To remove all plants from the Selected
Plants area, click the Un-Select All Plants
button.
14. In the ―Archiving‖ area, select the following options as necessary to specify the
information that is automatically archived:
Option: Description
Archive Base Select this option if you want to archive all base ingredients
Ingredients for the plant(s) specified in the ―Plant Usage‖ area.
Tip: When this option is selected, the Load Base
Ingredients button is enabled, allowing you to pre-
load base ingredients into the database, if necessary.
Refer to step 15 for more information about pre-
loading the database.
Archive Plant Select this option if you want to archive ingredients for the
Ingredients plant(s) specified in the ―Plant Usage‖ area.
Tip: When this option is selected, the Load Plant
Ingredients button is enabled, allowing you to pre-
load plant ingredients into the database, if necessary.
Archive Ingredient Select this option if you want to archive ingredient prices.
Prices Tip: When this option is selected, the Load Ingredient
Prices button is enabled, allowing you to pre-load
ingredient prices into the database, if necessary.
Archive Stored Select this option if you want to archive stored formulas.
Formulas Then, select one of the following options:
Archive All Archives all nutrients within the stored
Nutrients formula.
Archive Archives only the nutrients assigned to
Nutrients in the stored formula‘s species code.
Species Code
Archive Archives the formula specifications for
Formula the stored formulas.
Specifications
Tip: When this option is selected, the Load Stored
Formulas and Load Stored and Archived Versions
buttons are enabled, allowing you to pre-load
information into the database, if necessary. Refer to
step 15 for more information about pre-loading the
database.
15. When the Use SQL Data Bridge option is enabled, any changes to the information for
the options selected in the ―Archiving‖ area are instantly/automatically saved to the
database; however, you may want to manually pre-load a complete set of data after
initially configuring a database. To pre-load the database, click one of the following
buttons:
Button: Description
Load Base This button allows you to pre-load selected base ingredients
Ingredients as follows:
1. Click the Load Base Ingredients button. The ―Select
Base Ingredients to Archive‖ window appears.
Button: Description
2. Select each of the base ingredients you want to pre-

load.
Tip: To pre-load all base ingredients, click .
3. Click 
. As the base ingredients are pre-loaded, a
progress indicator appears at the lower left corner of the
window to show that the information is currently being
loaded. When the process is complete, message
appears.
4. Click OK.
Load Plant This button allows you to pre-load ingredients for a selected
Ingredients plant as follows:
NOTE: Ingredients must be pre-loaded one plant at a time.
Therefore, you‘ll need to complete the following
steps for each plant.
1. Click the Load Plant Ingredients button. . The ―Select

1 plant for ingredients to archive‖ window appears.
2. Select the plant containing the ingredients you want to
pre-load, and then click . The ―Select Base

Ingredients to Archive‖ window appears.
3. Select each of the ingredients you want to pre-load.
Tip: To pre-load all ingredients for the selected plant,
click .
4. Click 
. The ingredients are pre-loaded. A progress
indicator appears at the lower left corner of the window
to show that the information is currently being loaded.
When the process is complete, message appears.
5. Click OK.
Load Ingredient This button allows you to pre-load ingredient prices for a
Prices selected plant as follows:
NOTE: Ingredient prices must be pre-loaded one plant at a
time. Therefore, you‘ll need to complete the
following steps for each plant.
1. Click the Load Ingredient Prices button. . The ―Select

1 plant for ingredient prices to archive‖ window appears.
2. Select the plant containing the ingredient prices you
want to pre-load, and then click 

. The ―Select
Ingredients For Plant‖ window appears.
3. Select each of the ingredients with the prices you want
to pre-load.
Tip: To pre-load all ingredients for the selected plant,
click .
Button: Description
4. Click . The prices for all selected ingredients are pre-

loaded. A progress indicator appears at the lower left
corner of the window to show that the information is
currently being loaded. When the process is complete,
message appears.
5. Click OK.
Load Stored This button allows you to pre-load selected stored formulas
Formulas as follows:
NOTE: Formulas must be pre-loaded one plant at a time.
1. Click the Load Stored Formulas button. The ―Select 1

plant for stored formulas‖ window appears.
2. Select the plant containing the formulas you want to
pre-load, and then click 

. The ―Select formulas to add
to SQL Data Bridge‖ window appears.
3. Select each of the formulas you want to pre-load.
Tip: To pre-load all stored formulas, click .
4. Click . The formulas are pre-loaded. A progress

indicator appears at the lower left corner of the window
to show that the information is currently being loaded.
When the process is complete, message appears.
5. Click OK.
Load Stored and This button allows you to pre-load selected stored formulas
Archived Versions as well as all archived versions as follows:
NOTE: Formulas must be pre-loaded one plant at a time.
1. Click the Load Stored and Archived Version button.

The ―Select 1 plant for stored formulas‖ window
appears.
2. Select the plant containing the formulas you want to
pre-load, and then click 

. The ―Select formulas to add
to SQL Data Bridge‖ window appears.
3. Select each of the formulas you want to pre-load.
Tip: To preload all stored formulas, click .
4. Click . The formulas you selected and all archived

versions are pre-loaded. (You cannot select specific
archived versions to pre-load.) A progress indicator
appears at the lower left corner of the window to show
Button: Description
that the information is currently being loaded. When the

process is complete, message appears.
5. Click OK.
16. Click  to save your changes and return to the main window of Foundation Utilities.
Chapter 2: Add/Remove Databases

Brill Formulation allows you the ability to easily add existing databases to your system or to create
a new blank database for situations where you are either starting new or want to begin with a
clean slate for a new database and then bring in known data of significant use to migrate to a
newer system while maintaining the best portions of a system that has become cluttered with
some portions of a system that are less desirable.
Creating a Blank Database

1. In Foundation Utilities, click the File menu and select Add/Remove Databases. The
Add/Remove Databases window appears.
2. Click on the Description field on the last line in which there is no text. Enter the
description of the database you are going to add. (After creating the database, this
description is displayed in a drop-down list on the Brill Formulation login window, allowing
you to select it.)
3. Click on the Location field of the window in the same line. A lookup icon ( ) appears at
the right end of the field.
4. Click . The Browse For Folder window appears.

5. Create a folder for the new database by completing the following steps:
a. Browse to the directory in which you want to add the new folder.
b. Click the Make New Folder button. A new folder appears.
c. Enter the name for the new folder and press ENTER. The new folder is created and is
highlighted in blue.
6. Click OK. If this folder is empty (as expected) a new dialog box appears to indicate that
the database does not exist.
7. Click Yes to create the new database. The Add/Remove Databases window appears and
notice that the newly created database description and location fields are displayed.
8. Click  . A message appears indicating that the program needs to restart to complete the
installation of this new data set.
9. Click OK. Foundation Utilities closes and then opens the FMS Foundation Utilities Login
window. Notice that the new database has been added to the drop-down list. (To select
the database, click the Dataset field and select the new database from the list.)
The newly created database is now ready for modification and use by you and others with
access to this new database.
Adding an Existing Database

To add an existing database, follow the same procedure as described in the ―Creating a new
database‖ with the following exception:
In the Location field, click to search for the location of an existing database and locate the
Configuration.ini file within that folder. Once you locate the Configuration.ini file, click on it
and then click Open.
FMS Foundation Utilities then continues with the same procedure as described in creating a
blank database (the system restarts and the recently added database is then available in the
login window). The database is then available for use by others with access to this database.
Removing a Database
To remove a database:
1. In Foundation Utilities, click the File menu and select Add/Remove Databases. The
Add/Remove Databases window appears.
2. Highlight the line containing the database you want to remove.
Tip: To highlight the column, click on the very first column (to the left of the Description
column) of the row you want to highlight.
3. Right-click on the table and select Delete Row. A new box appears to confirm that you
want the database removed.
4. Click Yes to remove the database. The row is removed from the list.
NOTE: The actual database is not deleted, only the link to this particular Brill Formulation
system and that database. Removing the database from this window does not
delete any of the files in the database.
5. Click  . A message appears indicating that the program needs to restart to complete the
process.
6. Click OK. Foundation Utilities closes and then opens the FMS Foundation Utilities Login
window. The new database has been removed from the drop-down list.
Chapter 3: Add/Remove Users

Security allows you to define users for the system as well as the level of security and the amount
of information available to that user. For example, one user may be limited to only viewing
information, while another has the ability to modify it. In addition, you may want to limit access to
certain nutrients and ingredients to a few users.
NOTES:
Each user should have a unique User ID and Password to get into the system. The password
may be changed at any time.
The ―Super‖ User ID or User IDs with equivalent access may add, delete or modify other User
IDs within the system. It is highly recommended that the ―Super‖ User ID and any other User
IDs with equivalent access be used with a password. The system is initially installed without a
password to allow the installer immediate access. However, you should add a password to this
User ID to limit access to this capability. All you need to do is simply open the user record for
User ID ―Super‖ and add a password to the User ID. If a password is added to the User ID
―Super,‖ make a record of the password and store it in a safe location.
These security options allow you to customize access to fit your company‘s demands. We
recommend that you create appropriate policies in applying the different security settings to
ensure accurate formulations and to limit the entry of errors into the system. The following
instructions describe the options available as well as how to set them; however, they are not
intended to serve as a recommended setup for any particular user.
If you have more than one person that will require the same level of security (for example,
administrator or formulator, etc.) you may want to consider setting up a standard user ID
(such as ADMIN or FORM) with the necessary security settings. The standard IDs may be used
as a basis to create individual user IDs and passwords with the same security settings, which
will save time when initially setting up users as well as in the future if security settings need to
be changed – when the security settings for the standard user are changed, they are applied
to all other user IDs based on the standard user ID.
Adding/Changing Users
1. Click the File menu and select Add/Remove Users. The Add/Remove Users window appears.
General Tab
Field: Description:
User ID Enter the user ID you want to add or change (up to 8
characters) and then press ENTER (or, click to select a
user ID from a list).
Password Enter the user‘s password (up to 8 characters).
Equivalence If you have set up standard users, this field allows you to
enter the standard ID you want to use.
Refer to the ―Notes‖ under the ―Chapter 3: Add/Remove
Users‖ section for more information.
Use Default User Folder Leave this option selected (a check mark is displayed to
indicate that the option is selected) if you want to use the
default folder structure. The default user folder is
automatically created in …\Brill Data\[Formulation
Data]\User Folders\[User ID]. We recommend leaving this
option selected if you do not have multiple users or if you do
not want users to set up user-specific preferences.
If you have multiple users and you want to allow users to
setup user-specific preferences, click this option to remove
the check mark. Then, complete the following steps to
specify the path of the user folder:
1. Click . The Select Temporary User Directory window

appears.
2. Create a new folder, by clicking . A new folder

appears with the title ―New Folder‖. Then, click in the
box, enter the user ID, and press ENTER.
NOTE: The folder must be created in the default
directory (…\Brill Data\[Formulation Data]\User
Folders\[User ID]). We do not recommend
moving it to a unique location.
3. Click the Open button. Then, click Save. The user
directory is created, which holds the temporary files and
configuration files for the individual user.
NOTE: A temporary user folder is not required for multi-
user systems. If no user directory is utilized, the
settings are stored in a temporary directory that is
General Tab
Field: Description:
removed once the user logs off the system.
Full Access Plant If you want the user to have full access to a specific plant,
enter the plant code that this user will have full access to
(or, click to select a code from a list).
Tip: If you leave this field blank, the settings specified on
the Access and Menu tabs will determine the user‘s
level of access.
Ingredient Base Access Click this field and select an access level for base
ingredients:
Read Only: Select this option if you want the
user to be able to view and print
various reports. User will not be
able to make changes or delete
existing information.
Read/Write: Select this option if you want the
user to be able to view or make
changes to the information. User
will not be able to delete
information.
Read/Write/Delete: Select this option if you want the
user to be able to view, change,
and delete information.
NOTE: When the setting in this field allows higher access
than the setting for Ingredients on the Access tab,
this field takes precedence.
Examples:
If this field is set to ―Read/Write/Delete‖ and the
Ingredient setting on the Access tab is set to ―Read
Only‖, the Read Only setting is ignored. (The user will still
be able to view, change, and delete overlay ingredients.)
If this field is set to ―Read Only‖ and the Ingredient
setting on the Access tab is set to ―Read/Write/Delete‖,
the user will be able to view base ingredients, but not
change or delete base ingredients. In addition, the user
will be able to view, change, and delete overlay
ingredients.
Default Security Click this field and select one of the following options:
Full access by default – Select this option if you want
the user to have access to all options.
NOTE: Selecting this option will cause the drop-down
field on the Menu tab to be set to ―All items ON‖
(which does not allow you to turn off specific
areas of the system, if necessary). If you need
to limit the user‘s access to specific areas of the
system, set the drop-down field on the Menu
tab to ―Default all ON except those marked‖,
and then select the areas you do not want the
user to have access to.
General Tab
Field: Description:
No access by default – Select this option if do not

want the user to have access to any area of the system
unless you turn it on.
NOTE: To allow the user access to specific areas of the
system, set the drop-down field on the Menu
tab to ―Default all OFF except those marked‖,
and then select the areas you want the user to
have access to.
Allow User to Run Select this option if you want the user to have access to
―SUPER-only‖ Functions areas that are only available ―SUPER‖ users.
Access Tab
Field: Description:
Drop-down field Click the drop-down field and select one of the following
options:
Plants: Allows you to define which plants
the user can access as well as the
level of access.
Nutrients: Allows you to define which nutrients
a user can access as well as the
level of access. You can define a
range, multiple ranges or individual
nutrients.
Ingredients: Allows you to define which
ingredients a user can access as
well as the level of access. You can
define a range, multiple ranges or
individual ingredients.
Specifications: Allows you to define which formula
specifications a user can access as
well as the level of access. You can
individual specifications.
Stored Formulas: Allows you to define which stored
formulas a user can access as well
as the level of access. You can
individual stored formulas.
Table Enter information into each of the following columns:
Low: If you are defining a range of codes, enter the
lowest value in the range to be defined. (See
―NOTE‖ below for more information.)
High: If you are defining a range of codes, enter the
highest value in the range to be defined. (See
―NOTE‖ below for more information.)
Access Tab
Field: Description:
Rights: Click the drop-down arrow to the right of the

field and select one of the following:
o No Access: Select this option if
you do not want the
user to have any
access to view,
change, or delete
information.
o Read Only: Select this option if
you want the user
to be able to view
and print various
reports. User will
not be able to make
changes or delete
existing information.
o Read/Write: Select this option if
you want the user
to be able to view or
make changes to
the information.
User will not be able
to delete
information.
o Read/Write/Delete: Select this option if
you want the user
to be able to view,
change, and delete
information.
NOTE:
When searching for or defining ranges it‘s helpful to know
how codes are sorted. Codes are sorted as follows:
1. Codes consisting of all numbers are sorted in numerical
order and displayed first.
2. Codes consisting of numbers and letters are sorted and
displayed next.
3. Codes consisting of all characters are sorted in
alphabetical order and displayed last.
For example, if you have the following ingredients:
Code: Name:
1001 Code A
1100 Code B
1020 Code C
10CRNBLK Code D
11BARLEY Code E
101BLDML Code F
102TEST Code G
12ABCDE Code H
VITPREM Code I
Access Tab
Field: Description:
SOYMEAL Code J
CANMEAL Code K
They are sorted in the following order:

Code: Name:
1001 Code A
Example: If you wanted to 1020 Code C
define the range of codes 1100 Code B
between code B and code K, 101BLDML Code F
you would enter ―1100‖ in the 102TEST Code G
low column and ―CANMEAL‖ in 10CRNBLK Code D
the high column. 11BARLEY Code E
12ABCDE Code H
CANMEAL Code K
SOYMEAL Code J
VITPREM Code I
Menu Tab
Field: Description:
Drop-down field Click this field and select one of the following options:
All items ON – Select this option if you want the user
to have access to all menu options.
Default All ON except those marked – Select this
option if you want all menu options available by default.
Then, in the table below, select each menu option you
do not want the user to be able to access.
Default All OFF except those marked – Select this
option if, by default, you want to prevent the user from
accessing any of the menu options. Then, in the table
below, select each menu option you want the user to be
able to access.
Table If the drop-down field is set to ―All items ON‖, the user will
have access to each of the menu options listed in this table.
Any selections you make will be ignored.
If the drop-down field is set to ―Default All ON except those

marked‖, click the check box to the left of each menu option
you do not want the user to be able to access.
If the drop-down field is set to ―Default All OFF except those

marked‖, click the check box to the left of each menu option
you want the user to be able to access.
3. When you have finished making changes, click  to save the changes.
4. Click to close the window.
Removing Users
1. Click the File menu and select Add/Remove Users. The Add/Remove Users window
appears.
2. In the User ID field, enter the code for the user you want to remove and press ENTER (or,
click to select a user ID from a list).
3. Click . The Foundation Utilities box appears to verify that you want to remove the user.
4. Click Yes to remove the user. (Clicking No returns you to the Add/Remove Users window
without removing the user.)
Chapter 4: Adjust Colors

This option allows you to customize the colors used on various windows within the system. The
areas of customizing include:
Active Tab Color (foreground and background)
Grid Header Color (background only)
Grid Even Lines (foreground and background)
Grid Odd Lines (foreground and background)
To customize colors:
1. Click the File menu and select Adjust Colors. The Adjust Colors window appears (see picture
below).
This area of the

window allows you to
preview your changes
as you make them.
Tip: The fields, text, and colors displayed on the Adjust Colors window are the current
settings.
2. Change each option as follows:

Active Tab Color Use the buttons to the right of this field to change the color
settings for an active tab (which is a tab that is currently
selected) as follows:
Click the lookup button ( ) on the left to change the
foreground color (which is the text).
Click the lookup button on the right to change the
background color (which is the color of the tab itself).
Tip: You can change back to the default system setting at any
time by clicking .
Grid Header Back Color Click the lookup button ( ) to the right of this field to change
the background color for the column headings within a table.
time by clicking .
Grid Even Lines Color Use the buttons to the right of this field to change the even lines
within a table.
background color.
time by clicking .
Grid Odd Lines Color Use the buttons to the right of this field to change the odd lines
within a table.
background color.
time by clicking .
Chapter 5: Restart and Re-Login

This option allows you to restart Foundation Utilities and log back in using a different user ID
and/or database. After selecting this option the program quits and then launches itself again,
allowing you to select a new database (if necessary), and enter a user ID and password.
Chapter 6: Exit
To close Foundation Utilities, click the File menu and select Exit. The FMS Foundation Utilities
closes.
Part 2: Security
Chapter 1: Display Current License
This option allows you to view the license file for this computer. After selecting this option, the
license file opens in Notepad.
NOTE: The information within the license file cannot be changed (even if you make a change and
save it, the changes will not be saved). To upgrade your license or add additional
users/features, etc. please contact your Brill Formulation customer support specialist.
Chapter 2: New Activation

This option allows you to activate Brill Formulation using a new activation code.
To activate, complete the following steps:
1. Verify you are able to connect to the internet properly by completing the following steps:
a. Open Internet Explorer.
b. In the address bar, enter the following address: http://activation.feedsys.com.
If the following web site is displayed, continue with step 2. If you are not able to connect
to this web site, refer to the ―Troubleshooting Activation for Brill Formulation‖ document
for additional information before continuing to step 2.
2. Click the Security menu and select New Activation. The Brill Formulation Activation window
3. Enter your 26-character activation code.

4. If you have internet access, click the Activate button. A progress bar appears to indicate the
progress of the activation.
If you do not have access to the internet, click the Email Activation Code button. A message
box appears to indicate that activating by email will take additional time (compared to
activating using the internet). To continue to activate by email, click Yes. A progress bar
appears to indicate the progress of the activation.
5. When activation is complete the Brill Formulation Activation box appears to indicate that the
activation was completed successfully (see picture below).
6. To register, click the Register Now button. Your internet browser (such as Internet Explorer
or Netscape) opens to the FMS web site where you can enter your information.
If you do not want to register, click No Thanks to close the window.
The Brill Formulation Login window appears. The installation is complete and you can now log
in to Brill Formulation as usual.
Chapter 3: Update Activation

The system will automatically check on a periodic basis to make sure that you have the proper and
most recent license file. However, if you have recently updated the maximum number of users,
purchased additional features, or removed features, etc., this option allows you to update the
license for this computer immediately.
To update the license file for this computer:
1. Click the Security menu and select Update Activation. The Processing… box appears to
indicate the progress of the update process (see picture below).
When the update is complete the Brill Formulation Activation box appears to indicate that the
update was completed successfully (see picture below).
NOTE: If you receive a message indicating that your current license is already up-to-date and
you believe an updated version should have been available, please contact your Brill
Formulation customer support specialist for assistance.
2. Click OK. The FMS Foundation Utilities Login window appears, allowing you to log in to
Foundation Utilities with the new license.
Part 3: Reports
View Configuration
The Configuration report allows you to view all parameter/configuration settings for Brill
Formulation. (This report is typically used by a Brill Formulation customer support specialist to
diagnose possible sources of problems within the system. You may be asked by your support
specialist to run this report and provide them with a copy of the results.)
To print the Configuration report:
1. Click the Reports menu and select View Configuration. Notepad opens and displays the
report.
2. Click the File menu and select Print. The standard Windows Print window appears where you
can select the number of copies you want to print, specify whether to collate the copies,
determine whether you want to print all pages or a range of pages, specify printer settings,
and more.
3. When you are ready to print the report, click the Print button. The report is sent to the printer.
Part 4: Rebuild
Chapter 1: Rebuild Data Files
This option allows you to rebuild your data files.
NOTE: Backing up your database and rebuilding your data files is important to maintain a well-
functioning system and to ensure that your system operates at optimum speed. The
database should be backed up daily, and the data files should be rebuilt once a month.
To rebuild your database:

1. Complete the daily backup of your database.
NOTES:
The first step to maintaining your system is to complete a daily backup of your
database. To back up your database, use a file compression program such as ZIP or
RAR and make a full backup of the data folder and all subdirectories for your Brill
Formulation system (the default location for your data folder is C:\Brill Data).
After the daily backup is complete, verify that the backup was successful (open the
compressed file, make sure that all necessary files have been included, and make sure
that you are able to extract files).
2. Make sure that no one is running Brill Formulation and that no one is accessing the database
for any purpose.
3. Open Foundation Utilities (click the Windows Start button, point to All Programs, point to
Feed Management Systems, point to Brill Formulation, and click FMS Foundation
Utilities.) The FMS Foundation Utilities Login window appears.
4. If you have more than one data set, make sure the Dataset field is set to the database you
want to rebuild.
5. Enter your user name and password. Then, click .

6. Click the Rebuild menu and select Rebuild Data Files. A notification window appears to
inform you that you will be logged out to rebuild the database.
7. Click Yes to continue. The Rebuild Data Files window appears. (Clicking No will return you to
the FMS Foundation Utilities window without rebuilding the database.)
8. In the ―Check files to rebuild‖ box, click the check box next to each file you want to rebuild.
NOTE: We recommend selecting all files unless a Brill Formulation customer support
specialist is assisting you and recommends that you do not rebuild certain files.
File Name: Description:
Backup files to *.old Select this option if you want to back up your current files. When
this option is selected, the system will make a copy of the existing
file and add the ―*.OLD‖ extension to the file so that you are able
to go back to the existing file before the file is rebuilt.
Specify individual Do not select this option unless asked to do so by a Brill
files to rebuild Formulation customer support specialist.
Purge Deleted Select this option if you want to remove deleted ingredients from
Ingredients your permanent files.
10. Click  and the process begins. At the top of the Rebuild Data Files window is a display of
the file currently being rebuilt so that you may monitor the system‘s progress. When it is
complete, a log file report is displayed, allowing you to view the changes that have been made
to your files and identify any problems that were encountered. Once you have either reviewed
or printed this report, close the window and you are then returned to the FMS Foundation
Utilities window.
Brill Formulation Files – Quick Reference

These are the files used in the current Brill Formulation system and beside them are the
definitions of what each file is used as in the system. Please use this as a reference to only the
basic uses and names of these files in the system. This is not meant to be an entire conclusive
list of all possible files. If you encounter a problem or need additional explanation of the files
listed here, please contact your Brill Formulation customer support specialist.
Brill Formulation Btrieve Files and Functions
PLANT.DAT Plant definitions.
SECURITY.DAT These 3 files contain user names and passwords and data access
restrictions. Menu customer is also contained in these files.
SECURITY2.DAT
SECURITY3.DAT
FORMSPEC.DAT Formula Specifications.
FORMOVER.DAT Formula Specification overlays for Plant Management systems.
INGCOMBI.DAT Ingredient Combination data for Formula Specs.
SWING.DAT Ingredient Swing data for Formula Specs.
VERIFY.DAT Formula Verification data.
FORMAUTH.DAT Formula Authorization data
PTHRESH.DAT Price threshold data for formulas.
FORMCOMM.DAT Comments for Formula Specs and stored formulas
INGMATRX.DAT Base Ingredient nutrient data
Brill Formulation Btrieve Files and Functions

OVRMATRX.DAT Ingredient nutrient overlay data
INGEQ.DAT Ingredient equations
PRICEFIL.DAT Ingredient prices
PRCADD.DAT Ingredient price add-ons
STOMATRX.DAT Ingredient Stochastic data
STORFORM.DAT Stored Formula file
CONFIDNC.DAT Formula Spec data for Stochastic formulation
PELETSET.DAT Pellet creation set up data
MARGIN.DAT Margins data for pricing
ARCHFILE.DAT Archive file
LOG7.DAT System log file
WEMxxxxx.DAT Mill Report set up data xxxxx=plant code
SOLUTION.DAT Current solution file
*.SLN Multiple solution files named by user
Brill Formulation Non-Btrieve Files and Functions

GLOBALEQ.DTA Global equations
SPECIES2.DAT Species Codes
NUTRIENT.DAT Standard Nutrient definitions
NUTRT*.DAT Nutrient Definitions Overrides
WEM*.GRP Mill Report Setup
*.MLS Formula Set Files
Chapter 2: Translate Free Location Files

The Translate Free Location Files option allows you to translate data set files that are stored in any
location. The types of files that can be translated are:
.APU (Automated Premix Update files)
.APC (Automated Plant Copy files)
.JLS (Formula Set Files)
.ILT, .SLT, .NLT, and .FLT ―List Files‖ (from the user-lookup window).
NOTE: Ranges cannot be translated so some manual changes may be required for these
―List Files.‖
1. In Foundation Utilities, click the Rebuild menu and select Translate Free Location Files.
The Rebuild Data Files window appears.
2. In the Translation File field, enter the path and name of the file you want use to translate.
Tip: You do not need to include the three character extension. For example, C:\Brill
Data\Demo Data\FileName)
3. In the ―Select Files To Translate‖ area, click . The Select Files to Translate window appears.
4. Select the files you want to translate.
Tips:
To select a single file, double-click on the file you want to translate. The file is selected
and the Rebuild Data Files window appears.
To select multiple files, press and hold the CTRL key and then select the files you want to
translate. When all files have been selected, click the Open button. The Rebuild Data Files
window appears.
5. If you want the location of the translated file to be in the same path as the original file, click
the Same as Source Path option in the ―Destination Path‖ area.
If you want to specify a different location for the translated file, click next to the
Destination Path field. The ―Open the folder to contain the Destination files‖ window appears,
allowing you to select the path.
6. If you want to translate any existing files (with a *.OLD extension) click the Skip files that
already have a .OLD version option. Otherwise, leave this option unselected.
7. Click  to translate the files. The Foundation Translation.log window appears.

8. Review the log. Then, click the File menu and select Exit to close the window and return to
the Foundation Utilities window.
Chapter 3: Archive Maintenance

The Archive Maintenance option allows you to create a backup copy of your current archive file
and/or delete a range of archived formulas from the current archive file. (You cannot delete archived
formulas from a backup archive file.)
To create a backup and/or delete archived formulas:
1. Click the Rebuild menu and select Archive Maintenance. The Archive Maintenance window
appears.
Versions to keep Enter the number of versions you want to keep in your current archive file.
For example, there are 10 versions of a formula and you want to keep five,
enter ―5‖ in this field.
If the ―Delete records before this date‖ field is blank, the first five formulas
will remain in the current archive file. The other five are removed and saved
in the backup file.
Version:
10P
9R
8R
7R These versions would remain
6R in the current archive file.
5R
4R
3R
2R
1T
If the ―Delete records before this date‖ field contains a date (for example,
02/15/2008), the first five formulas prior to the date entered will remain in
the current archive file. The other five are removed and saved in the backup
file.
Version: Date:
10P 03/12/2008
9R 03/07/2008
8R 02/29/2008
These versions would remain
7R 02/20/2008
in the current archive file.
6R 02/15/2008
5R 02/06/2008
4R 01/30/2008
3R 01/22/2008
2R 01/17/2008
1T 01/15/2008
NOTE: The number of versions kept does not effect the number of files
that are saved in the backup file. (All formulas are saved in the
backup archive file.)
Delete records If you want to delete records prior to a specific date, enter that date in this
before this date field.
For example, there are 10 versions of a formula you want to delete anything
older than March 15, 2008, enter ―03/15/2008‖. If the ―Versions to keep‖
field is blank, any version older than March 15 will be deleted from the
current archive file.
Version: Date:
10P 04/15/2008
9R 04/07/2008
8R 04/03/2008
These versions would remain
7R 03/27/2008 in the current archive file.
6R 03/25/2008
5R 03/20/2008
4R 03/15/2008
3R 03/13/2008
2R 03/07/2008
1T 02/22/2008
NOTE: The ―Versions to keep‖ field takes precedence over the ―Delete
records before this date‖ field. For example, if the ―Versions to
keep‖ field is set to ―5‖, and the ―Delete records before this date‖
field is set to ―03/15/2008‖, the system will retain and delete
versions as follows:
Version: Date:
10P 04/15/2008
9R 03/19/2008
8R 02/20/2008
These versions would
7R 01/16/2008 remain in the current
6R 12/24/2007 archive file. Note that
5R 12/03/2007 although two versions
meet the 03/15/2008
4R 11/25/2007
date, five versions are
3R 11/14/2007 kept in the current
2R 10/15/2007 archive file.
1T 10/2/2007
Copy Archive File This option should always be selected. This option copies the current archive
to Backup Folder file to a backup folder.
If the ―Versions to keep‖ and ―Delete records before this date‖ field are
blank, the current file is backed up and no versions are deleted.
3. Click . The ―Select destination file for archive‖ window appears.

4. To save the archive file in the default folder, click Save. The file (called Archive-date.DAT,
where date is the actual date the file was backed up) is saved to the Archive folder (located in
your dataset folder).
Tip: You can save the backup file to any folder you choose by clicking the Save In field and
selecting a new location.
Part 5: System
To set the default font for Brill Formulation and the language file for Foundation Utilities:
1. Click the System menu and select Language. The Language Setup window appears.
Field: Description:
System Font Displays the font currently being used.
To change the font:
1. Click .
2. Select the font, font style (regular, italic, bold, etc.), and size. In the
script field, select Western.
3. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Language Setup window.
1. Click .
Tips:
The file name begins with ―V7MNT" and has a ―.LNG‖ extension (for
example, V7MNTCAFR.LNG).
To set up languages for display, refer to the ―Language Definition
Maintenance‖ section.
3. Click Open.
3. Click  to save the changes and return to the main window.

NOTE: You must exit and restart Foundation Utilities before the new language file can be
displayed.
Part 6: Help
Chapter 1: View Help File
The View Help File option allows you to view information and instructions for using Foundation
Utilities.
To display Foundation Utilities Help, click the Help menu and select View Help File.
Chapter 2: View the Manual

The Display User Manual option allows you to view and/or print a traditional instruction manual for
Foundation Utilities.
To display the Brill Formulation Instruction Manual, click the Help menu and select View the
Manual.
Chapter 3: Register
If you chose not to register during the activation process, you can register at any time using the
Register menu option.
To register, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Help menu and select Register. The Brill Registration window appears.
2. Click the Register Now button. Your internet browser (such as Internet Explorer or Netscape)
opens to the FMS web site where you can enter your information.
Chapter 4: Check for Formulation Updates

This option allows you to check for updated versions of Brill Formulation.
To check for updates, click the Help menu and select Check for Formulation Updates.
Chapter 5: About
The About option allows you to view copyright and version information for Foundation Utilities. To
view the About box, click the Help menu and select About.
When you‘ve finished viewing the information, click OK to close the window and return to the
main Foundation Utilities window.
Appendix
This portion of the manual provides technical or supporting information used in support of the Brill
Formulation System. Each chapter here outlines separate issues and is not intended to be considered as a
whole. Each portion details specific issues that have been reviewed and handled by our Brill Formulation
customer support specialists.
Chapter 1: Error – 103 Reply from Network Driver is Bad

If you experience an error message that states: Error - 103Reply from Network Driver is Bad you
should perform the following actions to correct the situation and return your system to a fully
operational status.
1. Locate the file ―ESNECIL.IND‖ that is located in the System32 directory of your computer system file.
2. Delete the file ―ESNECIL.IND‖
3. Go to the folder destination: C:\Program Files\Feed Management System\Brill Formulation.
4. Once there, locate the file ―SETUPEX.EXE‖ and double-click on this file. The application runs in the
background and quits automatically.
5. Start Brill Formulation and the system should be operational again.
Chapter 2: Rounding Codes

Rounding codes are used to determine how the ingredient amounts are to be rounded off during
optimization. Every ingredient is given a rounding factor when it is created, but the rounding code in
the footer determines how that rounding factor is to be used.
The rounding codes described here are the codes that may be used.
Rounding Description:
Code:
0 If Rounding Code 0 is used, no rounding will occur. The least cost solution will be solved for the
exact batch weight. The ingredients will not be rounded regardless of the individual rounding
codes.
1 When Rounding Code is set to 1, all the ingredients will be rounded according to their rounding
factors. With all rounding being taken into account, it is very difficult to obtain the exact batch
weight specified in the formula specification. Therefore, when Rounding Code 1 is selected, the
batch weight most likely will not be maintained but the individual ingredients will be rounded
according to their rounding factors.
2 A slight modification of Rounding Code 1 is Rounding Code 2. Rounding Code 2 will round all of the
ingredients according to their rounding factors, except the highest volume ingredient, which rounds
up or down to maintain the batch weight. This can slightly affect the nutrient analysis of the
formula.
3 Like Rounding Code 2, Rounding Code 3 rounds all ingredients according to their rounding factors.
After adjusting the highest ingredient to maintain the batch weight, the highest volume ingredient
is then rounded again using the highest rounding factor of all ingredients.
4 Rounding Code 4 will adjust all non-fixed ingredients proportionally back to the batch weight. Fixed
ingredients (where the minimum equals the maximum) are not adjusted proportionally. All
ingredients are then rounded according to their rounding codes. Finally the highest ingredient is
adjusted in increments up or down to get as close as possible to the batch weight. The increment
value is the highest rounding factor used.
5 Rounding Code 5 is the same as Rounding Code 4, except that ingredients are not rounded.
6 Rounding code 6 will adjust all non-fixed ingredients proportionally back to the batch weight. Fixed
ingredients (where the minimum equals the maximum) are not adjusted proportionally. Ingredients
are not rounded. The highest volume ingredient is then adjusted to maintain the batch weight.
Rounding Description:
Code:
are rounded according to their rounding codes. The batch weight is not adjusted.
are then rounded according to their rounding codes. The highest volume ingredient is then
adjusted to maintain the batch weight.
9 Not currently used in system. Same as rounding 0.
10 Rounding Code 10 is the same as Rounding Code 2, except that fixed ingredients are not rounded.
11 Rounding Code 11 is the same as Rounding Code 10, except that all ingredients are only rounded
up. The highest volume ingredient is adjusted to maintain the batch weight.
12 Rounding Code 12 is the same as Rounding Code 11 except that after the highest volume
ingredient is adjusted, it is then rounded up to the nearest lb/kg.
13 We do not recommend using this code. (If this code is used, it will perform the same rounding
operations as rounding code 0.)
14 Rounding Code 14 sets that all ingredients are proportionally adjusted to the specification batch
weight. No rounding occurs.
15-98 We do not recommend using these codes. (If one of these codes is used, it will perform the same
rounding operations as rounding code 0.)
99 FMS use only. Do not use.
Chapter 3: Special Nutrients and Ingredients

Ingredient Level
If you want to proportionally change a group of nutrients based upon the change of another
one, this is possible. For example, if you want to adjust the nutrient values of your amino
acids based upon a change in the protein content, here is how it works:
Nutrient: Old Amount: New Amount:
Key Nutrient: Protein 8.70000 8.4000 entered
Adjust. Nutrients: Lysine 0.2000 0.1931 calculated
Methion 0.1800 0.1738 calculated
To initiate this option, you must first tell the system that you have a key nutrient. Then, for
that nutrient, you must tell which nutrients are to be adjusted based upon a change in the key
nutrient. Finally, as you modify the key nutrient value, the program asks if you want to factor
the nutrients.
To set up a nutrient to be factored, you must use special ingredient code NUTF 1. Use the add
ingredient option and set all nutrients to be factored equal to a 1. Set your last nutrient (120)
equal to the key nutrient number.
(If you want to use moisture as a key nutrient, then put a - (negative) moisture nutrient
number in the last nutrient since moisture is an inverse ratio.)
Finally, after adding the special code NUTF 1, you must exit the ingredient maintenance
section and re-enter since the program picks up the nutrient factoring information on the way
into this program; so, if you change or add anything it does not become useful until the next
time you enter the ingredient maintenance program.
In the example that follows, Ingredient NUTF 1 has been designated the ―PROTEIN FACTOR.‖
All the amino acids have been flagged with a value of 1. This value will instruct the program to
proportionally adjust the amino acids, based upon a change in nutrient no. 10 (PROTEIN). The
last nutrient is given a value of 10, the key nutrient number for protein.
See the following report on how to set up the factoring.
Nutrient/Energy Factoring
PLANT: MKT YOUR PLANT DATE:
TIME:
ING/NUT# NAME AS FED
NUTF 1 PROTEIN FACTOR
1 WEIGHT LBS 1.00
13 ARGININE PCT 1.00
14 LYSINE PCT 1.00
15 METHIONINE PCT 1.00
16 METH & CYSTIN PCT 1.00
17 TRYPTOPHANE PCT 1.00
18 CLYCINE PCT 1.00
19 HISTIDINE PCT 1.00
20 LEUCINE PCT 1.00
21 ISOLEUCINE PCT 1.00
22 PHENYLALANINE PCT 1.00
23 PHENYL & TYRO PCT 1.00
24 THEONINE PCT 1.00
25 VALINE PCT 1.00
120 ENERGY FACTOR 10.00
Before protein is factored, the nutrient profile of corn looks like this:
THE PROFITABLE FEED CO. INGREDIENT #159
CORN GR YL 8.7 AS FED BASIS
1 WEIGHT LBS 1.00 21 ISOLEUCINE PCT 0.40
2 MET ENER POU CAL 1560.00 22 PHENYLALAN PCT 0.50
3 PROD ENERGY CAL 1140.00 23 PHEN & TYRO PCT 0.86
4 MET ENER SWINE CAL 1411.00 24 THREONINE PCT 0.40
5 DIGESTIBLE ENER CAL 1479.00 25 VALINE PCT 0.40
6 E N E MAINT MCL 95.00 26 CRUDE FAT PCT 3.90
7 E N E PRODUC MCL 62.00 27 CRUDE FIBER PCT 2.00
8 TDN SWINE PCT 80.00 28 DRY MATTER PCT 88.00
9 TDN RUMINANT PCT 80.00 29 ASH PCT 1.30
10 CRUDE PROTEIN PCT 8.70 30 CALCIUM PCT 0.02
11 DIGESTIBLE PR PCT 6.50 31 PHOS-AV PCT 0.10
12 NPN PCT 32 PHOS-TO PCT 0.29
13 ARGININE PCT 0.49 33 SALT PCT 0.08
14 LYSINE PCT 0.20 34 SODIUM PCT 0.01
15 METHIONINE PCT 0.18 35 POTASSIUM PCT 0.29
16 METH & CYSTIN PCT 0.34 36 MANGANESE MG 5.00
17 TRYPTOPHANE PCT 0.10 37 ZINC MG 10.00
18 GLYCINE PCT 0.50 38 IRON MG 9.00
19 HISTIDINE PCT 0.21 39 COPPER MG 1.54
20 LEUCINE PCT 1.08 40 COBALT MG
When the value of protein is changed from 8.7 to 8.4, and all other nutrients are factored,
the nutrient profile of corn looks like this:
6 E N E MAINT MCL 95.00 26 CRUDE FAT PCT 3.90
7 E N E PRODUC MCL 62.00 27 CRUDE FIBER PCT 2.00
8 TDN SWINE PCT 80.00 28 DRY MATTER PCT 88.00
9 TDN RUMINANT PCT 80.00 29 ASH PCT 1.30
10 CRUDE PROTEIN PCT 8.40 30 CALCIUM PCT 0.02
11 DIGESTIBLE PR PCT 6.50 31 PHOS-AV PCT 0.10
12 NPN PCT 32 PHOS-TO PCT 0.29
13 ARGININE PCT 0.47 33 SALT PCT 0.08
14 LYSINE PCT 0.19 34 SODIUM PCT 0.01
15 METHIONINE PCT 0.17 35 POTASSIUM PCT 0.29
16 METH & CYSTIN PCT 0.32 36 MANGANESE MG 5.00
17 TRYPTOPHANE PCT 0.09 37 ZINC MG 10.00
18 GLYCINE PCT 0.48 38 IRON MG 9.00
19 HISTIDINE PCT 0.20 39
20 LEUCINE PCT 1.04 40
Formula Specification Level

Nutrient factoring is a complex concept that allows you to increase (by a given factor)
nutrient restrictions in a formula spec, while maintaining the stored batch size. Nutrient
density is important in production and gain, for example, when feed consumption
decreases due to heat or stress. This method allows you to factor any nutrients by up to
two designated factors.
Ingredient Number ENEF 1 is reserved for nutrient factoring. Select the Ingredient
Maintenance Option from the Basic Feed Formulation Menu. Now, choose the Option to
Update and establish your nutrient factor parameters. Each nutrient in this ingredient may
have one of three factor codes:
Nutrient Description:
Factor Code:
0 A nutrient factor code of zero (or a blank) means that the nutrient will not be
factored.
1 A nutrient factor code of one (1.00) means that the nutrient will be factored by
the amount you define for factor 1. All nutrients set to 1 in this ingredient will
be multiplied by factor amount 1 (minimum restriction on the last nutrient,
120, in a formula spec).
2 A nutrient factor code of two (2.00) means that the nutrient will be factored by
both factor code amount 1 (minimum restriction on the last nutrient in a
formula spec) and then re-factored by factor amount 2 (maximum restriction
on the last nutrient in a formula spec). In other words, Factor 1 times (x)
Factor 2.
The following is a sample report of Ingredient Number ENEF 1, using nutrient factors.

6 E N E MAINT MCL 26 CRUDE FAT PCT
7 E N E PRODUC MCL 27 CRUDE FIBER PCT
8 TDN SWINE PCT 28 DRY MATTER PCT
9 TDN RUMINANT PCT 29 ASH PCT
10 CRUDE PROTEIN PCT 2.00 30 CALCIUM PCT
11 DIGESTIBLE PR PCT 31 PHOS-AV PCT
12 NPN PCT 32 PHOS-TO PCT
13 ARGININE PCT 2.00 33 SALT PCT
14 LYSINE PCT 2.00 34 SODIUM PCT
15 METHIONINE PCT 2.00 35 POTASSIUM PCT
16 METH & CYSTIN PCT 2.00 36 MANGANESE MG
17 TRYPTOPHANE PCT 2.00 37 ZINC MG
18 GLYCINE PCT 2.00 38 IRON MG
19 HISTIDINE PCT 2.00 39
20 LEUCINE PCT 2.00 40
Once the nutrient code factors for ingredient ENEF 1 have been established, you must set
the minimum and maximum nutrient amounts in your formula specs. The following
printout was obtained through the Print Individual Formula Specification Option.
THE PROFITABLE FEED COMPANY
PLANT: MKT YOUR PLANT NAME
FORMULA SPECIFICATION PRINT OUT DATE TIME
NUMBER DESCRIPTION WEIGHT SPECIES CODE
151 15AA LAYER-ENERGY FACTORED 2000.0 1
ING. NO NAME MINIMUM MAXIMUM
159 CORN GY YL 8.7 1.500 6.500
121 BREWERS GRAIN 18.000
174 SOY MEAL 49%
211 RICE MILL FEED
252 MEAL ML 50/P4 1.000 6.000
281 LIMESTONE
294 BIOFOS 0.020 1.000
296 PHOSPHOROUS 0.050
401 LYSINE
421 LIQUIMETH 40%
481 TR-MIN LAYER 0.030 0.030
511 SALT 0.400 0.400
551 EGG LAYER PREMIX 0.025 0.025
NUT. NO. NAME MINIMUM MAXIMUM
1 WEIGHT 1.000 1.000
2 MET ENERGY POULTRY 1000.000 1000.100
10 CRUDE PROTEIN 12.462
14 LYSINE 0.523
15 METHIONINE 0.249
16 METH & CYSTIN 0.442
30 CALCIUM 4.200 4.300
31 PHOSPHORUS-AV 0.400
120 ENERGY FACTOR 1.250 0.995
The following table illustrates how the nutrient factors are applied. Calculations are
performed on two nutrients (MET ENERGY POULTRY, and CRUDE PROTEIN). Note how the
factors are multiplied by the minimum and maximum restrictions values.
NUTRIENT FACTORING CALCULATIONS
NUTRIENT 2 MET ENERGY POULTRY 10 CRUDE PROTEIN
FACTOR 1 1.250 1.250
FACTOR 2 0.995
MINIMUM 1000.000 12.462
MAXIMUM 1000.000 0
MINIMUM W/FACTOR 1250.000 15.500
MAXIMUM W/FACTOR 1250.125 0
Nutrient number 2, MET ENERGY POULTRY, has been flagged with a nutrient factor code of
1.0000 in ingredient number ENEF 1. A value of 1 applies a single factor of 1.25 (minimum
restriction on nutrient number 120 in the formula spec). Therefore, the minimum of 1000
cal/lb is multiplied by 1.25 to obtain a factored energy level of 1250.000 cal/lb in the least
cost solution.
Nutrient number 10, CRUDE PROTEIN, has been flagged with a nutrient factor code of
2.0000 in ingredient number ENEF 1. A value of 2 applies a double factor of 1.25
(minimum restriction on nutrient number 120 in the formula spec) times 0.995 (maximum
restriction on nutrient number 120 in the formula spec) or 1.24375 (1.25 x 0.995).
Therefore, the minimum of 12.462% is multiplied by 1.24375 to obtain a factored crude
protein percentage of 15.500.
A Least Cost Report for this formula spec is displayed below. Notice in the following
example, the nutrient requirements have been factored by the correct amounts:
2 MET ENERGY POULTRY was 1000.000 and 1000.100 cal/lb and is now
1250.000 cal/lb = 1000.000 x 1.25, and 1250.130 cal/lb = 1000.100 x 1.25
10 CRUDE PROTEIN was 12.462% and is now 15.500% = 12.462 x 1.25 x 0.995
Therefore, anytime you least cost a formula spec with a minimum and a maximum
restriction on your highest nutrient number (120), the spec will automatically be factored.
The amount by which it will be factored depends upon the nutrient values of ingredient
number ENEF 1, and the factor 1 amount (minimum restriction) and the factor 2 amount
(maximum restriction).
THE PROFITABLE FEED COMPANY PLANT MKT MARKET
PRODUCT CODE…151
PRODUCT NAME…15AA LAYER-ENERGY FACTOR
DATE:
DATE/TIME OF LAST LEAST COST #100
RND ING PERCENT COST/ LOW HIGH REST.S/ INGREDIENT
AMT NUM NAME OF MIX 1000LB RANGE RANGE 1000LBS MIN. MAX.
S
1276.47 159 CORN GR YL 8.7 63.823 4.10 3.38 9.65
203.76 174 SOY MEAL 49% 10.188 10.40 9.81 11.31 18.000
175.81 281 LIMESTONE 8.791 1.00 0.80 4.95
130.00 121 BREWERS GRAIN 6.500 5.75 7.05 -1.30 1.500 6.500
117.90 252 MEAT ML 50/P4 5.895 11.25 10.27 11.90 1.000 6.000
64.29 211 RICE MILL FEED 3.125 2.25 2.39
20.00 296 PHOSPHORUS 1.000 8.00 1.000 1.000
8.00 511 SALT 0.400 2.25 0.400 0.400
2.27 421 LIQUIMETH 40% 0.113 42.00 7.56 112.52
0.60 481 TRACE MIN 0.030 25.00 0.030 0.030
0.50 551 EGG LAYER PREM 0.025 35 0.025 0.025
0.40 294 BIOROS 0.020 12.00 7.59 4.41 0.020
2000.00 TOTAL WEIGHT $100.58 PER TON %5.03 PER 100LB
401 LYSINE 112.00 8.06 0.050
NUM RESTRICTION MINIMUM ACTUAL MAXI- NUTRIENT

MUM COST
1 WEIGHT LBS 1.00 1.0000 1.00
2 MET ENERGY POUL CAL/LB CAL/LB 1250.00 1250.00 1250.00 0.02183
10 CRUDE PROTEIN PCT PCT 15.50 15.00 0.14516
13 ARGININE PCT 0.96
14 LYSINE PCT 0.65 0.66
15 METHIONINE PCT 0.31 0.31
16 METH & CYSTIN PCT PCT 0.55 0.55 0.88474
17 TRYPTOPHANE PCT 0.17
26 CRUDE FAT PCT 3.74
27 CRUDE FIBER PCT 3.48
28 DRY MATTER PCT 76.69
30 CALCIUM PCT 4.20 4.20 4.30 0.00509
31 PHOSPHORUS-AV PCT 0.40 0.40 0.29127
32 PHOSPHORUS-TO PCT PCT 0.61
34 SODIUM PCT 0.24
53 CHOLINE PCT 421.67
120 NUTRIENT FACTOR 1.25 1.00
Chapter 4: Entering Nutrient Values that are not Based on

Weight
This chapter provides hints on avoiding the Weight Factor and Stored Formulas used as ingredients.
When you want to enter a nutrient value that is not based on weight, such as UIP, as a percent of
Crude Protein and then use restrictions on that nutrient in a formula; certain steps must be followed
to avoid errors induced by factoring all values based on weight.
In the example below, the formula contains one pound of each ingredient.
NOTE: The original table values for UIP as a percent of Crude Protein for each ingredient must be
entered in nutrient 101. In the formula specification UIP as a percent of crude protein will
appear as nutrient 104.
NUT# TYPE DESCRIPTION CORN SOY FORMULA SPEC STORED FORMULA

AS INGREDIENT
10 % CRUDE PROTEIN 8.7 48.5 28.6 28.6
101 % UIP% OF CP 60.0 20.0
102 % UIP% OF DM 5.22 9.7 7.6 7.6
Global Equation (1): If N110=0 then N102=N10*N101/100!
103 % N102*100! 522.0 970.0
104 Ratio N103/N10 60.0 20.0 26.08 26.08
(1) Nutrient 110 is used as a flag to determine whether the ingredient was created from a stored
formula. A value of 0 indicates the ingredient was not created from a stored formula and a value of 1
indicates the ingredient was created from a stored formula. The Global Equation only calculates when
the ingredient is not created from a stored formula.
In Foundation Utilities click the File menu, select Edit the Database Configuration and click on the
Premix tab. Set the Nutrient for the Premix flag used in the Global Equation.
In the above table, the asterisk (*) indicates the values are suppressed by the species code.
N101 – This is correct for the ingredient, but when averaged by weight it yields misleading
data at the formula level. This nutrient is suppressed when a formula is stored as an
ingredient by entering a species code on line 4 of STORE.SYS that does not have this
nutrient tagged.
N102 – UIP as a % of dry matter is a Global Equation based on weight, so it is correct for
ingredients not created from stored formulas. Using a condition on the global
equation to test the flag in N110 prevents calculating this equation when a formula
is stored as an ingredient.
N103 – A Global Equation is used to provide an intermediate value that allows scaling the
end result. This nutrient is suppressed when a formula is stored as an ingredient by
entering a species code on line 4 of STORE.SYS that does not have this nutrient
tagged.
N104 – This is a Ratio used to calculate the UIP % CP for the formula and ingredients using
the scaled value of N103. This nutrient provides a way for the formula to be
optimized on UIP % CP by placing restrictions on nutrient 104. N104 and N101 have
the same value.
Chapter 5: Import/Export File

This chapter provides the formatting information for the Import/Export file.
File Revision July 31, 2003
Import/Export file format
'This file contains the formatting information for the Import Export Program
'Record Identification Codes (RecId$)

' PL = Plant Definition Header Record
' Y5 = Plant Name (DBCS Systems)
' P1 = Default Price Threshold Record
' P2 = Range Price Threshold Record (1-10)
' EP = End of Plant Definition Marker
' V1 = Verification by Species Header
' V2 = Verification by species Record
' V3 = End of Verification by species Record
' NU = Nutrient Record

' Y6 = Long Name (DBCS Systems)
' Y7 = Short Name (DBCS Systems)
' Y8 = Abbreviated Name (DBCS Systems)
' SP = Species Record

' SD = Species Name Record
' BI = Base Ingredient Header Record.

' OI = OverLay Ingredient Header Record.
' IN = Ingredient Nutrient Value. (Multiple Occurrences per Ing)
' Y4 = Ingredient name (DBCS Systems)

' EI = End of Ingredient Marker. (Single Occurrence per Ing)
' GD = Global Equation Header Record

' GE = Global Equation Record
' GF = Equation Comment (Must immediately follow the GE record)
' GG = End of Global Equations
' ID = Ingredient Equation Header Record

' IE = Ingredient Equation Record
' IF = Ingredient Comment (Must immediately follow the IE record)
' IG = End of Ingredient Equations
' BS = Base Formula Spec Header Record. (Single Occurrence per Spec)
' OS = Overlay Formula Spec Header Record. (Single Occurrence per Spec)
' Y2 = Formula spec name (DBCS Systems)
' SI = Formula Spec Ingredient Restriction Record. (Multiple Occurrences per Spec)
' SN = Formula Spec Nutrient Restriction Record. (Multiple Occurrences per Spec)
' CN = Ingredient Combinations Minimum Percents Record. (Single Occurrence per Spec)
' CM = Ingredient Combinations Maximum Percents Record. (Single Occurrence per Spec)
' CF = Ingredient Combinations Fixed Percents Record. (Single Occurrence per Spec)
' CC = Ingredient Combinations Coefficient Record. (Multiple Occurrences per Spec)
' ST = Price Threshold Record (Multiple Occurrences per Spec)
' FC = Formula Comment Record up to 64 characters long
' Y1 = Formula Comment Record up to 64 characters long (DBCS Systems)
' SW = Formula Swing Record Header

' SR = Formula Swing Low/High Values Record
' VR = Formula Verification Header
' VF = Formula Verification Min/Max Record
' ES = End of Formula Spec Marker. (Single Occurrence per Spec)
'
' FS = Stored Formula Header Record.
' FI = Stored Formula Ingredient Amount records. (Multiple Occurrences per Spec)
' FN = Stored Formula Nutrient Values (Multiple Occurrences per Spec)
' FC = Formula Comment Record up to 64 characters long

' Y1 = Formula Comment Record up to 64 characters long (DBCS Systems)
' Y3 = Stored formula name (DBCS Systems)
' (Only Non-Zero Values Sent)
' EF = End of Stored Formula Marker.
'
' IP = Ingredient Price/Stock Status Records. ( Note Price is per 100 )
'
' M0 = Stored Formula Margin Header.
' C0 = Stored Formula Margin config data record.
' D0 = Stored Formula Margin Data record.

' E0 = End of Stored Formula Margin Marker.
'
' M1 = Formula Spec Margin Header.
' C1 = Formula Spec Margin config data record.
' D1 = Formula Spec Margin Data record.
' E1 = End of Formula Spec Margin Marker.
'
' M2 = Mill Mix Margin Header.
' C2 = Mill Mix Margin config data record.
' D2 = Mill Mix Margin Data record.
' E2 = End of Mill Mix Margin Marker.
'
' M3 = Tag Margin Header.
' C3 = Tag Margin config data record.

' D3 = Tag Margin Data record.
' E3 = End of Tag Margin Marker.
'
' M4 = Premix Quoting Margin Header.
' C4 = Premix Quoting Margin config data record.
' D4 = Premix Quoting Margin Data record.
' E4 = End of Premix Quoting Margin Marker.
'
' M5 = Premix Recursive Price Margin Header.
' C5 = Premix Recursive Price Margin config data record.
' D5 = Premix Recursive Price Margin Data record.
' E5 = End of Premix Recursive Price Margin Marker.

'
' LH = List File Header Record
' LF = List File Formula Record
' LE = End of List File
'
' NC = Ingredient name, Premix code
' UI = User ID
'
' TI = Tag Ingredient Definition
'
' TF = Tag Formula Definition
'
' TS = Tag Statement Header

' TT = Tag Statement Text
' TE = End Tag Statement
'
' DI = Delete Ingredient
'
' DS = Delete Formula Spec
'
' DF = Delete Stored Formula
'
TYPE IngredientHead
RecId AS STRING * 2 'BI=Base Ing, OI=Overlay Ing.
IPlant AS STRING * 5 '"bas " for Base Ings, Plant Code for Overlay Ings.
ICode AS STRING * 8 ' Ingredient Code
IName AS STRING * 36 ' Ingredient Name
OvrOnly AS STRING * 1 'Y or N. Only used when RecId$="OI"
Rf AS STRING * 9 'Format ####.#### Rounding Factor
ProdMin AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Production Minimum
NumNuts AS STRING * 3 'Format ### Number of Nutrients

PreMix AS STRING * 8 'Premix Formula Code
IDate AS STRING * 8 'Store Date YYYYMMDD
Iver AS STRING * 3 'Version ###
InclFlg AS STRING * 1 'Ingredient Marked as Include Y/N
END TYPE
TYPE IngredientNC
RecId AS STRING * 2 'NC=Import ingredient name, premix code
IPlant AS STRING * 5 '"bas " for Base Ings, Plant Code for Overlay Ings.
IName AS STRING * 36 ' Ingredient Name

PreMix AS STRING * 8 'Premix Formula Code
END TYPE
'TYPE IngredientBP ' Update nutrients only Windows import/export only

' RecId AS STRING * 2 'BP=Base Ing, OP=Overlay Ing.
' IPlant AS STRING * 5 '"bas " for Base Ings, Plant Code for Overlay Ings.
' ICode AS STRING * 8 ' Ingredient Code
'END TYPE
TYPE NutrientValues
RecId AS STRING * 2 'IN
NutNo AS STRING * 3 'Format ### Nutrient Number

NutVal AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Value
Mean AS STRING * 15 'Format #######.####### (Stochasics)
Varience AS STRING * 15 'Format #######.####### (Stochasics)
END TYPE
TYPE FormSpecHead
RecId AS STRING * 2 'BS=Base Spec, OS=Overlay Spec.
PltCde AS STRING * 5 '"bas " for Base Spec, Plant Code for Overlay Specs.
FormCde AS STRING * 8 ' Formula Code
FormDsc AS STRING * 36 ' Description

OvrOnly AS STRING * 1 'Y or N. Only used when RecId$="OS"
PctOrAct AS STRING * 4 'Format #.## 1=Ing Restrictions on Actual Basis, .01=Ing Restrictions on Percent Basis
BtchSze AS STRING * 8 'Format #####.## Batch Size
SpCde AS STRING * 2 'Format ## Species Code
NASpVer AS STRING * 2 'Format ## Not Used
SecLevel AS STRING * 4 'Format #### Not Used
NumIngs AS STRING * 3 'Format ### Number of Ingredients

NumNuts AS STRING * 3 'Format ### Number of Nutrients
HasCmbs AS STRING * 1 'Y or N 'Has Ingredient Combinations Y or N
NumCmbs AS STRING * 3 'Format ### 'Number of Coefficient records for the combination.
SpecDate AS STRING * 8 'Format YYYYMMDD
SpVer AS STRING * 3 'Format ###
Partial AS STRING * 1 'Import Only Y-Partial Import N or blank-full import
'Will keep existing ings, combos, or nuts unless sent.
'Example: Send 0 for number of nutrients, and ings/combos will be replaced. Nuts will
'stay the same. Verification,Swing,Comments,Thresholds and confidence will NOT be
'imported even if sent If combos are sent, then ingredients must be sent.
'Overlays Only is ignored. Formula must exist or it will be skipped.
END TYPE
TYPE NutrientRest
RecId AS STRING * 2 'SN

NutMin AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Minimum
NutMax AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Maximum
ConfMin AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Confidence Minimum (Stochastics)
ConfMax AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Confidence Maximum (Stochastics)
END TYPE
TYPE IngredientRest
RecId AS STRING * 2 'SI
IngMin AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Minimum

IngMax AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Maximum
END TYPE
TYPE IngComboGrp
RecId AS STRING * 2 'CN=Min Percents, CM=Max Percents, CF=Fixed Percents
Pcts(1 TO MaxCoeffColumns) AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Array of Percents.
END TYPE
TYPE IngComboCoeff
RecId AS STRING * 2 'CC
ICode AS STRING * 8
Coeffs(1 TO MaxCoeffColumns) AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Array of Coefficents.
END TYPE
TYPE PThreshFormula
RecId AS STRING * 2 'ST
PTYpe AS STRING * 1 '0-Formula Cost 1-Extended Difference
Low AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Low Threshold
High AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### High Threshold
OutLow AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Outer Low Threshold
OutHigh AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Outer High Threshold
END TYPE
TYPE StorFormHead
RecId AS STRING * 2 'FS
PltCde AS STRING * 5 ' Plant Code
FormDsc AS STRING * 36 ' Formula Description
SFDate AS STRING * 8 'Format YYYYMMDD Stored Date
SFCost AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Stored Cost
OldSpVer AS STRING * 2 'Format ## Version MOD 100

LCount AS STRING * 5 'Format ##### Least Cost Counter
SecLevel AS STRING * 5 'Format ##### Not Used
SpVer AS STRING * 5 'Format ##### Version Number
DefNut AS STRING * 1 '0-Calculated Nutrients 1-Pre-Defined Nutrients
END TYPE
TYPE VirtualStorFormHead
RecId AS STRING * 2 'VS
PltCde AS STRING * 5 ' Plant Code
FormDsc AS STRING * 60 ' Formula Description
BaseForm AS STRING * 8 ' Base Formula Code (Tags)
SFCost AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Stored Cost
SpVer AS STRING * 5 'Format ##### Version Number
DefNut AS STRING * 1 '0-Calculated Nutrients 1-Pre-Defined Nutrients
END TYPE
TYPE StorFormAmount
RecId AS STRING * 2 'FI
Amount AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Ingredient Amount

BatchCde AS STRING * 8 ' Batcher Code ( Will Not Import )
GrpNo AS STRING * 5 ' Group Number ( Will Not Import )
BinNo AS STRING * 8 ' Bin Number ( Will Not Import )
END TYPE
TYPE StorFormNuts
RecId AS STRING * 2 'FN
Amount AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Nutrient Amount
Units AS STRING * 8 'Nutrient Units Nutrient Units
NutName AS STRING * 20 'Nutrient Long Name Nutrient Name

END TYPE
TYPE PriceRec
RecId AS STRING * 2 'IP ( Note that prices are transferred as
PltCode AS STRING * 5 ' price per 100 ) Plant Code
CurPrice AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### (1E+30 means not Transferred)
OldPrice AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### (1E+30 means not Transferred)
OutOfStock AS STRING * 1 'Format 0, 1, or 2 (0-In Stock 1-O/S 2 means not transferred)
AddOnBasePrice AS STRING * 12
END TYPE
TYPE MarginHeader
RecId AS STRING * 2 'Mn (where n = a digit between 0 and 9)
PltCode AS STRING * 5 'Plant Code
FCode AS STRING * 8 'Formula Code (M0)
NumFlds AS STRING * 4 'Format #### (Total number of Margin Configuration fields)
NumCRecs AS STRING * 1 'Format #### (Number of "Cn" configuration records)
NumDRecs AS STRING * 3 'Format #### (Number of "Dn" Data records.)
END TYPE
TYPE ConfigData
FldType AS STRING * 1 'Format #. (Type of Field: 0=String, 1=Integer, 2=Real)
FldWidth AS STRING * 4 'Format #### (Width of field in MARGIN.DAT data block)
END TYPE
TYPE MarginConfig
RecId AS STRING * 2 'Cn (where n = a digit between 0 and 9)
CData(1 TO 50) AS ConfigData 'Margin Configuration Data.
END TYPE
TYPE MarginData
RecId AS STRING * 2 'Dn (where n = a digit between 0 and 9)
MData AS STRING * 253 'As many Margin Data Fields as will fit in the available space.
END TYPE 'Field types are defined in the Configuration record ("Cn").]
'String Types get exported as they are. (width defined in configuration data)
'Integer types are exported using Format #####
'Float types are exported using Format #######.#######
TYPE SwingHead
RecId AS STRING * 2 ' SW

NumSwingIngs AS STRING * 4 ' Number of Swing Ingredients
END TYPE
TYPE SwingRec
RecId AS STRING * 2 ' SR
IngCode AS STRING * 8 ' Ingredient Code
LoSwing AS STRING * 12 ' Low Swing Value, Format #######.####
HiSwing AS STRING * 12 ' High Swing Value, Format #######.####
END TYPE
TYPE VerifyHead
RecId AS STRING * 2 ' VR
NumVerifyNuts AS STRING * 4 ' Number of Verification Nutrients
END TYPE
TYPE VerifyRec
RecId AS STRING * 2 ' VF
NutNo AS STRING * 3 ' Nutrient Number
MinDev AS STRING * 12 ' Minimum Deviation, Format #######.####
MaxDev AS STRING * 12 ' Maximum Deviation, Format #######.####
AbsMin AS STRING * 12 ' Absolute Minimum, Format #######.####
AbsMax AS STRING * 12 ' Absolute Maximum, Format #######.####
DevAMin AS STRING * 12 ' Deviation Above Min, Format #######.####
END TYPE
' *******************
TYPE PlantDef
RecId AS STRING * 2 'PL
Code AS STRING * 5 'Plant Code
Name AS STRING * 30 'Plant Name
SpecFlg AS STRING * 1 'Y = Plant has specs N/BLANK= Plant does not have specs (plant management should
always be Y)
AltPlant AS STRING * 5 'Alternate Plant
END TYPE
TYPE PlantDefPThresh
RecId AS STRING * 2 'P1
END TYPE
TYPE PlantDefRangePThresh
RecId AS STRING * 2 'P2
Seq AS STRING * 2 '01-10
LoRange AS STRING * 8 'Low Range Code
HiRange AS STRING * 8 'High Range Code
END TYPE
TYPE Nutrient
RecId AS STRING * 2 'NU
LName AS STRING * 20 'Long Name
SName AS STRING * 10 'Short Name
AName AS STRING * 3 'Abbreviated Name
Unit AS STRING * 8 'Unit
DspDec AS STRING * 2 'Format ## Display Decimals
NType AS STRING * 1 'Nutrient Type A=Actual P=Percent I=Inverse R=Ratio
Nut1 AS STRING * 3 'Format ### Numerator for ratios only
Nut2 AS STRING * 3 'Format ### Denominator for ratios only
END TYPE
Type Y6
RecId AS STRING * 2 'Y6
LName AS STRING 'Long Name
END TYPE
Type Y7
LName AS STRING 'Short Name
END TYPE
Type Y8
LName AS STRING 'Abbreviated Name
END TYPE
TYPE Species
RecID AS STRING * 2 'SP
OnOff AS STRING * 50 '0=Off 1=On for each species
END TYPE
TYPE SpeciesNames
RecID AS STRING * 2 'SD
Code AS STRING * 2 'Species Code
Name AS STRING 'Species Name
END TYPE
TYPE SpeciesVerifyHead
RecId AS STRING * 2 'V1
PlantCode AS STRING * 5 'Plant Code
SpCode AS STRING * 2 'Species Code
END TYPE
TYPE SpeciesVerifyRec
RecId AS STRING * 2 'V2
NutNo AS STRING * 3 'Nutrient Number
MinDev AS STRING * 12 'Minimum Deviation, Format #######.####
MaxDev AS STRING * 12 'Maximum Deviation, Format #######.####
AbsMin AS STRING * 12 'Absolute Minimum, Format #######.####
AbsMax AS STRING * 12 'Absolute Maximum, Format #######.####
DevAMin AS STRING * 12 'Deviation Above Min, Format #######.####
END TYPE
TYPE GlobalEquations
RecID AS STRING * 2 'GE
NutNo AS STRING * 3 'Format ### Nutrient to calculate
Nut1 AS STRING * 3 'Format ### Conditional Nutrient 1
Amt1 AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### Conditional Amount 1
Cond AS STRING * 1 'Conditional Flag Y/N
AndOr AS STRING * 1 'And/Or "AO "
Cond1 AS STRING * 2 'Condition 1 <>=
Equ AS STRING * 60 'Equation
END TYPE
TYPE IngredientEquationHeader
RecID AS STRING * 2 'ID
IngCode AS STRING * 8 'Ingredient Code
END TYPE
TYPE IngredientEquations
RecID AS STRING * 2 'IE
NutNo AS STRING * 3 'Format ### Nutrient to calculate
Cond AS STRING * 1 'Conditional Flag Y/N
AndOr AS STRING * 1 'And/Or "AO "
Equ AS STRING * 60 'Equation
END TYPE
The following are not supported by formulation, but used in other modules.
IZ= Ingredient Price/Stock Status Records. (Note Price is per 100 and length of ICode increased to 30)
TYPE PriceRecModified 'IP format with ICode increased to 30

RecId AS STRING * 2 'IZ ( Note that prices are transferred as
PltCode AS STRING * 5 ' price per 100 ) Plant Code
CurPrice AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### (1E+30 means not Transferred)
OldPrice AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### (1E+30 means not Transferred)
InStock AS STRING * 1 'Format 0, 1, or 2 (2 means not transferred)
AddOnBasePrice AS STRING * 12
END TYPE
Below are the additions to the XF1 file that are necessary for the Feeding Plan Import into FMM.
' GS = Group Header

' GP = Group Phase Feeding
' EG = End of Group Marker
TYPE GroupHeader
RecId AS STRING * 2 'GS=Group Header
CustNum AS STRING * 15 'Customer Number
GroupCode AS STRING * 15 'Group Code
GroupName AS STRING * 30 'Group Name
FarmLoc AS STRING * 15 'Farm Location
FarmName AS STRING * 30 'Farm Location Name
NumHead AS STRIN * 6 'Number of Head Format ######
StDate AS STRING * 8 'Start Date YYYYMMDD
EndDate AS STRING * 8 'End Date YYYYMMDD
StWgt AS STRING * 12 'Start Weight Format ######.#####
StCost AS STRING * 12 'Start Cost Format ######.#####
END TYPE
TYPE PhaseFeeding
RecId AS STRING * 2 'GP=Group Phase Feeding
FormCode AS STRING * 30 'Formula Code
FormName AS STRING * 30 'Formula Name
StDay AS STRING * 3 'Start Day Format ###
EndDay AS STRING * 3 'End Day Format ###
ADC AS STRING *12 'Average Daily Consumption Format ######.#####
AnStWgt AS STRIN * 12 'Animal Start Weight Format ######.#####
AnEndWgt AS STRING * 12 'Animal End Weight Format ######.#####
END TYPE
' GM = Group Movement
Type GroupMovement
MoveID AS STRING * 2 'GM
CustNum AS STRING * 15 'Customer Number
GroupCode AS STRING * 15 'Group Code
MoveDay AS STRING * 3 'Movement Day Format ###
MoveDate AS STRING * 8 'End Date YYYYMMDD
MoveType AS STRING * 1 'Movement Type 1= In, 2= Death, 3= Sale, 4= Out, 5= + Adjustment, 6=
-Adjustment
MoveAmt AS STRING * 12 'Movement Amount Format ############
MoveConf AS STRING * 1 'Movement Confirmed 0=False, 1=True
END TYPE
'=======================================================================
'Added By Dave for Additional Import/Export items - June 2004
'=======================================================================
'New Codes
' IH = Ingredient Price Add-On Header Record. ( Note Price is per 100 )
' IA = Ingredient Price Add-On Detail Record.
' PH = Plant to Plant Price Add-On Header Record.
' PA = Plant to Plant Price Add-On Detail Record.
' EA = End of Price Add-On Marker.
'
' AD = Price Add-On Descriptor Header Record. ( Used for both Ingredients and Plants )
' DL = Price Add-On Descriptor Detail Record. (Non-DBCS Systems)
' Y9 = Price Add-On Descriptor Detail Record. (DBCS Systems)
' ED = End of Price Add-On Descriptor Marker.
'
' MG = Mill Mix Group Header Record.

' MD = Mill Mix Group Detail Record.
' Y2 = Mill Mix Group Name on DBCS systems
' EM = End of Mill Mix Group Record.
'
' MI = Mill Mix Ingredient Record.
'
' MC = Mill Mix Comment Header Record (Associated with Stored Formula)
' CL = Mill Mix Comment Line Record (Non-DBCS systems only)
' Y1 = Mill Mix Comment Line Record (DBCS systems only)
' EC = End of Mill Mix Comment Record.
'
' IL = Ingredient Linking Header Record. (Start Marker only. No Data)
' FL = Formula Linking Header Record. (Start Marker only. No Data)
' LD = Linking Detail Record for both Ingredients and Formulas
' EL = End Marker for Ingredient and Formula Linking Records.
'
'=======================================================================
'New Records
TYPE IngAddOnHdr
RecId AS STRING * 2 'IH ( Note that prices are transferred as price per 100 )
ICode AS STRING * 8 'Ingredient Code
CurrBasePrice AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### (1E+30 means not Transferred)
PrevBasePrice AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.#### (1E+30 means not Transferred)
OutOfStock AS STRING * 1 'Format 0, 1, or 2 (0-In Stock 1-O/S 2 means not transferred)
END TYPE
TYPE IngAddOnDtl
RecId AS STRING * 2 'IA
AddOnType AS STRING * 1 'D=Dollar Value, P=Percentage Value, S=Shrink Value
AddOnIndex AS STRING * 2 'Index (1 to 10) of this value in the array specified by AddOnType
Value AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.####
END TYPE
TYPE PlantAddOnHdr
RecId AS STRING * 2 'PH
FrPlant AS STRING * 5 'FROM Plant Code
ToPlant AS STRING * 5 'TO Plant Code
END TYPE
TYPE PlantAddOnDtl
RecId AS STRING * 2 'PA
Value AS STRING * 12 'Format #######.####
END TYPE
TYPE AddOnDescriptorHdr
RecId AS STRING * 2 'AD
DescripType AS STRING * 1 'I=Ingredient Descriptors, P=Plant to Plant Descriptors
END TYPE
TYPE AddOnDescriptorDtl
RecId AS STRING * 2 'DL (Non-DBCS systems only)
DescripText AS STRING * 120'Actual Descriptor text.
END TYPE
TYPE AddOnDescriptorDtlDBCS
RecId AS STRING * 2 'Y9 (DBCS systems only)
DescripText AS STRING 'Actual Descriptor text. Variable length depending on DBCS encoding.
END TYPE
TYPE MillMixIngredient
RecId AS STRING * 2 'MI
IngCode AS STRING * 8 'Ingredient Code
IngCode2 AS STRING * 8 'New Ingredient Code
BinNo AS STRING * 8 'Bin Number
BinNo2 AS STRING * 8 'New Bin Number
DefBin AS STRING * 8 'Default Bin
BatchCode AS STRING * 8 'Batch Code
AmtType AS STRING * 1 'Amount Type. 1=Actual, 2=Multiple, 3=Threshold
GrpNo AS STRING * 3 'Group Number
GrpNo2 AS STRING * 3 'New Group Number
DefGrp AS STRING * 3 'Default Group Number
SplitIng AS STRING * 1 '1=Split Ingredient, 0=Do not Split Ingredient
Amount AS STRING * 12 'Amount to split out. (Format #######.####)
END TYPE
TYPE MillMixGroupHdr
RecId AS STRING * 2 'MG
BatchWt_1 AS STRING * 12 'Batch Weight #1. (Format #######.####)
END TYPE
TYPE MillMixGroupDtl
RecId AS STRING * 2 'MD
GrpName AS STRING * 12 'Group Name (Non-DBCS systems)
GrpAccum AS STRING * 1 'Group Accumulate Flag. 1=Accumulate, 0=Do Not Accumulate
GrpDblSpc AS STRING * 1 'Group Double Space Flag. 1=Double Space, 0=Do Not Double Space
DecimalsA AS STRING * 2 'Number of decimal places for Amounts.
DecimalsP AS STRING * 2 'Number of decimal places for Percentages.
GrpSepPge AS STRING * 1 'Print on Separate Page. 1=Yes, 0=No
END TYPE
TYPE MillMixGroupNameDBCS
RecId AS STRING * 2 'Y2 (Only used on DBCS systems)
'(This record is interspersed with the "MillMixGroupDtl" records.
' It will not conflict with it's other use as the stored formula DBCS name)
GrpName AS STRING 'Group Name. Variable length depending on DBCS encoding.
END TYPE
TYPE MillMixCommentHdr
RecId AS STRING * 2 'MC
StorCode AS STRING * 8 'Stored Formula Code
Comment AS STRING * 64 '64 byte chunk of the comment.
END TYPE
TYPE MillMixCommentDtl '(Up to 15 of these records per comment)

RecId AS STRING * 2 'CL (Non-DBCS systems only)
Comment AS STRING * 64 '64 byte line of the comment.
END TYPE
TYPE MillMixCommentDBCS '(Up to 15 of these records per comment)

RecId AS STRING * 2 'Y1 (DBCS systems only)
Comment AS STRING 'Line of the comment. Variable length depending on DBCS encoding.
END TYPE
TYPE LinkingDetailRecord 'Used for both Ingredient and Formula Linking.

RecId AS STRING * 2 'LD
FrPlant AS STRING * 5 'FROM Plant Code
FrCode AS STRING * 8 'FROM Code (Ingredient or Formula)
ToPlant AS STRING * 5 'TO Plant Code
ToCode AS STRING * 8 'TO Code (Ingredient or Formula)
CpySpecs AS STRING * 5 'Copy Specifications. (Bit Mapped Integer)
CpySpecs2 AS STRING * 5 'Additional Copy Specifications. (Bit Mapped Integer)
END TYPE
'=======================================================================
'
'Notes:
' The OvrOnly flag in the Ingredient & FormSpec records is used as follows:
' It is ignored for base Ingredients and Formula Specs.

'
' Y = Only the Ingredient or Formula Spec overlay was copied to the Export
' file. The Import routine is expected to just copy this overlay to the
' appropriate Plant.
'
' N = The Combined Base and Overlay records were copied to the Export File.
' The Import routine is expected to check the current base record for
' this item, and generate an overlay record so that the item is an exact
' duplicate of what was transferred.
'
'++++++++++++++++++
' END OF LISTING
'++++++++++++++++++
'
Chapter 6: Startup.ini File
' This is an example of a startup file

' to auto-start the system
[Startup]
' This number corresponds to the database definitions on your machine
' it is optional and only needed if using multiple databases
' If not present, the last used database will be used.
DataPointer=1
' Substitute your user name

UserID=brill
' Substitute your password if any

UserPassword=
[Optimization]
' This is the full path to the MLS file to optimize

MLSSet=c:\temp\many formulas.mls
' This switch tells the program to optimize the MLS file and end.
AutoOptimize=1
' To start optimization using this file:

' brmbw32.exe -s"Startup File.ini"
' Make sure to use paths when needed

' This startup file will be deleted each time it is used.
' You should create the file for each run
Chapter 7: Translation Files
The translation feature ensures that the information being imported/exported is compatible with your
system. If the sending and receiving systems use different codes to represent the same item (i.e., the
same nutrient); then the imported codes must be translated into the receiving system's codes (and
vice versa when exporting).
This translation process occurs through user-defined ASCII files that contain a list of codes to
translate. Translation files can be created using either of the following methods:
Notepad/Wordpad - If you have just a few codes that need to be translated, you can create
the ASCII files in a simple text editor such as Notepad or Wordpad by referring to the following
information and the ―File Format‖ section.
Translation tables – If you have several codes that need to be translated, you may want to
consider setting up translation tables to save time. Refer to the ―Building Translation Tables‖
section for additional information.
Once created, these files must be placed in your Brill data directory.
Tip: If you do not know the location of your Brill data directory, you can verify its location by completing the
following steps. Log in to FMS Foundation Utilities. Click the File menu and select Add/Remove
Databases. The Add/Remove Databases window appears, and the location of your Brill data directory is
displayed.
There are separate files for each type of data to be translated (nutrient codes, ingredient codes,
formula codes, plant codes and species codes), and each file has its own file extension:
nutrients: XTN
ingredients: XTI
formulas: XTF
plants: XTP
species: XTS
NOTES:
If a set of files of files are used together in one import operation, they must have the same
filename. For example, to translate a set of nutrients, ingredients and formulas together, you
would create the following files with the filename XLATE:
o nutrients: xlate.xtn
o ingredients: xlate.xti
o formulas: xlate.xtf
o plants: xlate.xtp
o species: xlate.xts
The import program uses this translation filename, XLATE, during an import operation. It
takes this filename and looks for any files with that name and extension xtn, xti, xtf, xtp or
xts. That way it knows exactly what codes to translate.
For each file, you must know the appropriate codes for both the old and the new systems.
The translation files must be created before the export files are created. The system requests
the name of the translation files (if any) when the export files are created.
Translation files cannot be encrypted.
File Format
Each file must be written in a special format that the import program can recognize.
Nutrients
In a nutrient translation file, extension xtn, use the following format:
old nutrient code,new nutrient code,conversion factor
Each piece of data must be separated from the others by a comma, with no spaces between.
There is one nutrient per line.
The conversion factor is any factor to translate the nutrients from one set of units to another
(i.e., from IU/LB to PCT). If the units are the same, then the second comma and the
conversion factor may be omitted.
Example (importing 5 nutrient codes):
Old System New System Conversion Factor
30 25 0.5000
25 30 None
10 50 100
16 20 None
50 27 None
The translation file would look like this:

30,25,0.5000
25,30
10,50,100
16,20
50,27
Ingredients
In an ingredient translation file, extension xti, use the following format:
old ingredient code,new ingredient code
Each piece of data must be separated by a comma, with no spaces between. There is one
ingredient per line.
Example (importing 3 ingredient codes):
Old System New System
120 116
112 220
116 112

120,116
112,220
116,112
Formulas
In a formula translation file, extension xtf, use the following format:
old formula code,new formula code
formula per line.
Example (importing 3 formula codes):
25A 15
8080 200
725 250

25A,15
8080,200
725,250
Plants
In a formula translation file, extension xtp, use the following format:
old plant code,new plant code
plant per line.
Example (importing 3 plant codes):
001 FWA
002 MSP
003 DSM

001,FWA
002,MSP
003,DSM
Species
In a formula translation file, extension xts, use the following format:
old species code,new plant code
species per line.
Example (importing 3 formula codes):
1 22
2 56
3 31

1,22
2,56
3.31
Building Translation Tables

If you have several codes that need to be translated, you may want to consider setting up
translation tables to save time and help ensure your data is accurate. The translation tables
ensure that codes in one system are translated to match the codes in the Brill Formulation system.
The translation tables can be used to translate nutrient codes, ingredient codes, formula codes,
plant codes and species codes.
The easiest way to develop the translation tables is to use Brill Formulation reports, and then
transfer the data in the report to Microsoft Excel. (This is a quick start to building the translation
table since this is the information from the system exporting the data.)
Transferring Report Data to Excel

Using a properly configured report template, you can easily generate a report of Brill Formulation
data that can be easily transferred to Excel by completing the following steps:
1. Preview a report in Brill Formulation as usual. (For example, to display the Ingredient report,
open Brill Formulation Maintenance, click the Reports menu, select Ingredient Report, and
then display the report making sure that the View Report on the Screen option is checked.)
2. On the preview window, click to copy the text (so it can later be pasted into Excel – see
picture below).
Click this icon to

―Copy Text in the
Report to the
clipboard‖.
3. Open Microsoft Excel. Then, click the Edit menu and select Paste. The data is pasted to Excel
in essentially the same format as seen on the preview report screen. The following sample
table shows the beginning of a translation table in Excel.
Column A: Column B: Column C:
112 Corn
174 SOY MEAL 49%
175 CANOLA
Code for the Matching code for

system the system
exporting the importing the data
data -- old code -- new code
4. Once the data has been transferred to Excel, manually enter the codes for the data in the
receiving system into Column C (see example below).
Column A: Column B: Column C:
112 Corn 10010
174 SOY MEAL 49% 40025
175 CANOLA 40135
5. When all data has been entered into the Excel spreadsheet and verified, convert the file to an
ASCII file. To do that, you‘ll need to delete the column with the descriptive name first. Then,
save the file as a CSV (comma delimited) file.
The CSV file must then be renamed to change the filename extension as follows:
Ingredient translation - .XTI
Formula translation - .XTF
Nutrient translation - .XTN

Species translation - .XTS
Plant translation - .XTP
When this data in the Excel file is saved as a CSV file the data in the example above would
look like this.
112,10010
174,40025
175,40135
The general format of the actual translation table is:
oldcode,newcode
This format applies to all translation tables.
If the nutrient units are different between the exporting and importing Brill systems the
translation file will need a conversion factor. The format for the Nutrient translation table in
this scenario is:
oldcode,newcode,conversion
NOTES:
A separate Excel file will be used for each translation table being created.
If multiple types of codes are being translated in the same time, the first part of the file name
must be the same for all files. For example, when translating Ingredient Codes and Formula
Codes the files might be named this way:
o Ingredient codes – Translate.XTI
o Formula codes – Translate.XTF
Translation may be done during either the export or the import; however, you must decide when
the translation will be done (during the export or during the import). It is very important that
the translation is not done during both processes; this will result in corrupt data.
When exporting multiple pieces of data, all the data can be written to one (1) export file.
Ingredients and Formulas can be exported and written to a single file, but it is important that
the data be exported in the proper sequence. Exporting the data to a single file simplifies the
import process. Contact a Brill Formulation customer support specialist to discuss the
export/import project to determine the correct data export sequence.
Index
Building Translation Tables ....................... 266
*
* Column ............................................... 147 C
Change Stock Status
0 Multi-Blend .......................................... 181
–0 ......................................................... 147 Professional Nutritionist ........................ 147
Clear Premix Flag ......................................92
A Close Set
Multi-Blend .......................................... 189
Activating Brill Formulation ...................... 225
Professional Nutritionist ........................ 156
Add a Row
Colors .................................................... 223
Multi-Blend ......................................... 179
Combine Formula Specs Into New Formula . 152
Conditions (Ingredient Equations) ...............38
Add Comments
Configuration Report ............................... 227
Multi-Blend ......................................... 183
Control File ................................ 99, 102, 103
Copy Menu ...............................................56
Add Ingredients ...................................... 171
Cost ....................................... 116, 201, 211
Add ingredients to ingredient groups ......... 191
Currencies .............................................. 118
Add Nutrients ......................................... 172
Current Plant Field...................................... 6
Add-On Costs ..................................... 34, 35
Customer Support ................................... 141
Alternate Plant.......................................... 10
Sending an Email ................................. 140
Alternate Plant Field ................................... 8
Submitting Requests ............................ 141
Amount Precision ..................... 116, 201, 211
Announcements, Viewing ......................... 141
D
Archive Comments .................................... 51
Archived Formulas Daily System Back Up .............................. 227
Copying ................................................ 60 Data Set, Changing .................................... 6
Deleting ................................................ 67 Database Configuration ............................ 206
Authorizing Formulas ................................. 50 Databases
Automated Plant Copy ............................. 103 Adding/Changing ................................. 216
Automated Premix Update.......................... 97 Removing............................................ 217
Creating a New Control Rile ..................... 99 Decimal Precision ..................... 116, 201, 211
Deleting a Control File .......................... 103 Default Language File .............................. 233
Printing a Report.................................. 103 Default Options ....................................... 115
Processing a File .................................. 102 Default Plant........................................... 206
Viewing the Log File ............................. 102 Default System Font ........................ 231, 233
Define ingredient groups .......................... 190
B Delete a Row
Multi-Blend .......................................... 179
Base Ingredients ....................................... 25
Changing .............................................. 27
Different Units, Currencies, and Languages 118
Batch Optimization .................................. 163
Disable Ingredient
Create a New Formula Set .................... 160
Multi-Blend .......................................... 180
Modify a Formula Set ........................... 163
Batch Size, Default .................................. 207
Display Ingredient Restrictions .................. 207
Bin Allocation Configuration ...................... 174
Display User Manual Option ...................... 140 Substitute Ingredients .......................... 173
Download Product Updates ....................... 141 Formula Set
Dry Matter Nutrient Number ..................... 207 Batch Optimization ............................... 160
Multi-Blend .......................................... 167
E Formula Specifications ...............................39
Edit Archive Comments .............................. 51 Adding ..................................................39
Edit Ingredient Adding an Include Ingredient ...................91
Multi-Blend ......................................... 180 Adding Ingredients .................................40
Professional Nutritionist ........................ 147 Adding Nutrients ....................................40
Edit Ingredient Combinations ..................... 46 Bulk Change/Replace ..............................84
Multi-Blend ......................................... 183 Copying ................................................59
Professional Nutritionist ........................ 149 Defining Swing.......................................41
Edit Nutrient Deleting ................................................64
Multi-Blend ......................................... 181 Formula Locator Report...........................70
Professional Nutritionist ........................ 147 Formula Specifications Compare Report ....70
Enable Ingredient Formula Specifications Report ..................70
Multi-Blend ......................................... 180 Pellet Creation Record Report ..................70
Professional Nutritionist ........................ 146 Quick Update .........................................84
Equation Order ................................... 37, 39 Formulas
Equation Report ........................................ 69 Compare and Combine............................97
Error Report (Weekly Process) .................. 166 Cost ................................................... 116
Exit ......................................................... 55 Create Verification Record .......................95
Expand Premixes Formula Set report .................................72
Multi-Blend ......................................... 181 Pellet Creation .......................................52
Professional Nutritionist ........................ 148 Price Units .............................................31
Export ................................................... 123 Verification ............................................94
Export Solutions ....................................... 78
G
F Global Equations .......................................37
Factor.......... 20, 116, 200, 201, 211, 212, 213 Global Swing ............................................41
Factor Field .............................................. 31 Groups................................................... 132
Favorites.................................................. 74
File Format, Translation Files .................... 264 H
FMS Web Site ......................................... 141 Help ...................................................... 140
Font ....................................... 202, 231, 233
Fonts ..................................................... 119 I
Force Update ............................................ 93 Import ................................................... 122
Formula Authorizations .............................. 49 Import/Export File ................................... 244
Deleting ................................................ 66 In Stock ................................................. 147
Formula Cost ................................... 201, 211 In Stock Ingredients ..................................32
Formula Cost Per ................ 31, 116, 201, 211 Include Ingredients ...................................90
Formula Listing Window Adding to a Formula Specification ............91
Add Ingredients ................................... 171 Changing ..............................................92
Add Nutrients ...................................... 172 Ingredient Combinations
Bin Allocation Configuration................... 174 Formula Specification Maintenance ...........44
Merge Formulas ................................... 175 Overview ..............................................42
Multi-Price Ingredients.......................... 171 Professional Nutritionist ..........................45
Ingredient Combinations Window ................ 46 M

Ingredient Equations ................................. 38
Maintenance Costs ....................................35
Copying ................................................ 58
Maintenance, Main Window.......................... 6
Deleting ................................................ 64
Make a Premix ........................................ 157
Equation Report ..................................... 69
Mark Ingredient as Include .........................90
Ingredient Factor .................................... 116
Mass Update .............................................83
Ingredient Groups ................................... 189
Maximum restrictions
Minimum and maximum restrictions ....... 192
Ingredient Groups ................................ 192
Ingredient Linking Maintenance ......... 105, 110
Maximum Tolerance ................................ 211
Ingredient Maintenance Window 26, 27, 29, 30
Merge Formulas ...................................... 175
Ingredient Restriction Cost ................ 200, 212
Ingredients
Multi-Blend .......................................... 182
Copy .................................................... 56
Deleting ................................................ 62
Mill Ingredient Report .............................. 136
In Stock................................................ 32
Mill Mix .................................................. 132
Ingredient Analysis Report ...................... 69
Defining Ingredients ............................. 133
Ingredient Overlay Compare Report ......... 69
Edit Mill Comments option ..................... 133
Ingredient Price Comparison Report ......... 70
Mill Mix Report ..................................... 136
Ingredient Price Report ........................... 69
Mill Mix Report
Ingredient Report .................................. 69
Printing ............................................... 138
Linking ............................................... 105
Minimum restrictions
Linking Report ............................... 72, 109
Mark as Include ..................................... 90
Minimum Tolerance ................................. 211
Out of Stock .......................................... 32
Multi-Blend
Price Units ............................................ 31
Add a Row........................................... 179
Prices, copying ...................................... 57
Add Comments .................................... 183
Pricing .................................................. 32
Change Stock Status ............................ 181
Pricing Units ........................................ 207
Close Set ............................................ 189
Quick Update......................................... 83
Creating a Set ..................................... 167
Sort by Amount in Store Formula Report
Option ............................................. 115 Delete a Row ....................................... 179
Special ............................................... 236 Disable Ingredient ................................ 180
Where Used Report ................................ 72 Edit Ingredient ..................................... 180
Edit Ingredient Combinations ................. 183
L Edit Nutrient ........................................ 181
Enable Ingredient ................................. 180
Language ............................................... 202
Expand Premixes ................................. 181
Language Definition Maintenance .............. 119
Merge Specifications ............................. 182
Languages .............................. 118, 120, 202
Optimization Window ............................ 176
License .................................................. 225
Optimize ............................................. 185
Linking Ingredients ................................. 105
Optimize and Verify .............................. 186
Linking Report ........................... 72, 109, 112
Parametric Analysis ...................... 184, 188
Linking Stored Formulas .......................... 109
Save Formula Specification.................... 188
Log File – Auto Premix Update .................. 102
Save Prices ......................................... 183
Log In to Brill formulation .......................... 55
Save Solution ...................................... 189
Log Report ............................................. 113
Store Solution...................................... 187
Multi-Level Overlays ..................................11
Converting ............................................17
Setting Up ............................................ 15 Plant Structure Maintenance Window ............ 8

Multi-Price Ingredients ............................. 171 Plant to Plant Add-On Maintenance ..............35
Plants
N Automated Copy .................................. 103
Nutrient Factor ......................................... 20 Copying ................................................61
Nutrient Maintenance window ..................... 19 Default ............................................... 206
Nutrient Restriction Cost ................... 200, 212 Default Pricing Plant ............................. 207
Nutrient Values (not weight based) ........... 243 Deleting ................................................68
Nutrients ........................................... 19, 21 Formula Specifications Base .................. 207
Nutrient Report...................................... 69 Plant report ...........................................69
Special ............................................... 236 Precision ........................................ 201, 211
Premix ........................................... 157, 212
O Automated Update .................................97
Clear Premix Flag ...................................92
Optimization........................................... 205
Partial ...................................................89
Optimization Window
Save as Ingredient .................................88
Multi-Blend ......................................... 176
Premixes ................................................ 157
Preview Reports ................................ 81, 196
Optimize
Price Maintenance Window .........................32
Price Precision ........................................ 212
Optimize a Batch .................................... 163
Price Units, Changing .................................31
Optimize and Verify
Prices
Copying ................................................57
Out of Stock ........................................... 147
Default Ingredient Pricing Units.............. 207
Out of Stock Ingredients ............................ 32
Deleting ................................................63
Overlay Ingredients............................. 25, 28
Precision ..................................... 116, 201
Adding/Changing ................................... 29
Threshold Maintenance ...........................96
Pricing Ingredients ....................................32
P
Printer Setup ............................................81
Parametric Analysis Product Updates, Downloading .................. 141
Multi-Blend .................................. 184, 188 Production Formulas ..................................47
Professional Nutritionist ................. 150, 155 Production Minimum ............................ 26, 30
Partial Premix ......................................... 158 Professional Nutritionist ........................... 142
Partial Premix Specification ........................ 89 Add a Row........................................... 146
Password ................................................. 55 Add Comments .................................... 149
Pellet Creation .......................................... 52 Change Stock Status ............................ 147
Percent Precision ..................... 116, 201, 212 Close Set ............................................ 156
Place Premix Flag (1) in this Nutrient ......... 212 Delete a Row ....................................... 145
Plant Disable Ingredient ................................ 146
Adding/Changing .................................... 8 Edit Ingredient ..................................... 147
Alternate ............................................... 8 Edit Ingredient Combinations ................. 149
Current .................................................. 6 Edit Nutrient ........................................ 147
Pricing ................................................... 8 Enable Ingredient ................................. 146
Removing ............................................. 10 Expand Premixes ................................. 148
Selecting ............................................... 6 Merge Specifications ............................. 149
Plant Code ............................................... 10 Optimization Window ............................ 144
Plant Maintenance Window .......................... 8 Optimize ............................................. 153
Plant Name .............................................. 10
Optimize and Verify .............................. 153 Screen Font ............................................ 119

Parametric Analysis ....................... 150, 155 Selection Criteria..................................... 192
Save Formula Specification ................... 156 Setting up Ingredient Groups .................... 189
Save Prices ......................................... 150 Setup Groups ......................................... 132
Save Solution ...................................... 156 Shortcut Menu ........................................ 121
Store Solution Window ......................... 154 Shortcuts ............................................... 140
Prompt to Increment Stored Formula Version Shortcuts, Creating ................................. 121
......................................................... 115 SmartLists .......................................... 69, 73
Export Solutions.....................................78
Q Exporting to Excel ..................................79
Quick Update ............................................ 83 Favorites ...............................................74
Search Criteria .......................................76
R Searching for Information .......................75
Range Tab ................................................ 7 Solution Report .........................................96
Ratios ...................................................... 20 Solution Report (Weekly Process) .............. 165
Rebuilding Data Files ............................... 227 Sort Ingredients by Amount...................... 115
Registering Brill Formulation ..................... 226 Species Code Names .................................23
Reports............................................ 68, 194 Species Codes ..........................................22
Automated Premix Update .................... 103 Species Code Report...............................69
Configuration Report ............................ 227 Startup Language ..................... 117, 202, 233
Convert to PDF and Email ............... 83, 198 Startup.ini File ........................................ 262
Error (Weekly Process) ......................... 166 Stock Status ........................................... 147
Linking Report .............................. 109, 112 Store Premix as Ingredient .........................88
Mill Ingredient ..................................... 136 Store Solution
Mill Mix ........................................ 136, 138 Multi-Blend .......................................... 187
Preview ........................................ 81, 196 Professional Nutritionist ........................ 154
Printing ........................................ 80, 195 Stored Formula ................................. 72, 198
Save as PDF File ............................ 83, 197 Stored Formula Authorizations ....................49
Save Text to File .................................. 197 Deleting ................................................66
Save Text To File ................................... 82 Stored Formula Report ............................. 198
Solution (Weekly Process) ..................... 165 Stored Formulas ............................... 47, 168
System Log Report............................... 113 Archive Compare Report .........................71
Reports Toolbar ................................ 68, 194 Bulk Change/Replace ..............................84
Restrictions ............................. 200, 212, 213 Copying ................................................60
Rounding Base Ingredients ................... 26, 30 Deleting ................................................65
Rounding Codes ...................................... 235 Force Update .........................................93
Linking ............................................... 109
S Linking Report ............................... 72, 112
Prompt to Increment Version ................. 115
Save Formula Spec
Quick Update .........................................84
Multi-Blend ......................................... 188
Replace 1 Ingredient with Many ...............86
Report, Sort by Amount ........................ 115
Save Prices
Stored Formula Authorization Report ........71
Multi-Blend ......................................... 183
Stored Formula Report............................71
Verification ............................................94
Save Solution
Substitute Ingredients ............................. 173
Multi-Blend ......................................... 189
Support
Sending an Email ................................. 140 User Manual ........................................... 140

Submitting Requests ............................ 141 User, Changing .........................................55
Swing .................................................... 209 Users
Formula Specification Level ..................... 41 Adding/Changing ......................... 217, 218
Ingredient Level .................................... 41 Removing............................................ 222
System Back Up (Daily) ........................... 227
System Colors ........................................ 223 V
System Definition Maintenance ................. 118 Verification ............................................. 211
System Font, Default ........................ 231, 233 Verification (Formulas)...............................94
System Options ....................... 115, 198, 233 Verification Base Plant ............................. 211
System, Changing ............................... 6, 121 Verification Maintenance ............................95
Verify All Nutrients .................................. 211
T View Report on Screen Option ............ 81, 196
Temporary File Location ........................... 207 Viewing the Latest Announcements ........... 141
Tonnage restrictions Virtual Base Name .....................................10
Transferring Report Data to Excel ............. 266 W
Translation Files...................................... 263 Weekly Process .......................... 93, 163, 164
Translation Tables ................................... 266 Verification ............................................94
Where Used Report ...................................72
U
Update Activation.................................... 226 Z
Update Premix Nutrients by Species Code .. 212 Zero Price Ingredient Option ..................... 115
User ID .................................................... 55 Zero Price Ingredients ...............................32
User ID, Changing ...................................... 6
Documentation Evaluation
We value your input! Please take a minute to let us know how we are doing and what we can do to
improve our documentation.
1. How often do you use this manual? Often Sometimes Rarely
2. Did you find what you were looking for? Yes No
3. Was it easy to find what you were looking for? Yes No
4. If you answered “Sometimes” or “No” in the previous question, please let us know what information
you weren’t able to find:
5. Were the instructions easy to follow? Yes Sometimes No
6. How well did you understand the system

Not at all A bit Thoroughly
before using these tutorials?
7. How well did you understand the system

Not at all A bit Thoroughly
after using these tutorials?
8. How will you be using this manual? (check all that apply)
 Training
 Reference
 Learning new areas of the system
 Other (please specify): _______________________________________________________________________
What can we add to the manual to make it more useful?
Do you have any additional comments?
Please fax this form to Feed Management Systems at 701.280.2668

Attn: Dayna Olson. Thank you for your feedback!

Brill Formulation: Instruction Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Brill Formulation: Instruction Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Brill Formulation®

Copyright © 2000-2009 Feed Management Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Chapter 5: Interfaces ........................................................................................................... 139

Chapter 1: Rebuild Data Files ................................................................................................ 231

Brill Formulation Optimization

Using Brill Maintenance

These fields display the user ID,

You can also use the Range tab to search for a

4. Click . The Search window appears. All

Part 2: Edit Menu

Existing plants are displayed here.

In a ―Plant Management‖ system,

3. Enter information into each of the following fields as necessary:

6. When all additions/changes have been made, click 

Multi-Level Overlays is an optional module of Brill Formulation. If you are

How Multi-Level Overlays Work

Plant 2 overlay compare

Setting up Multi-Level Overlays

Adding a New Plant Under an Existing Plant

Conversion to Multi-Level Overlays

3. Export Species Codes from current base data set.

2. Enter information in each of the following columns as necessary:

3. Click to display nutrients.

b. Click on the nutrient you want to add, and then click .

is reused at some point your ingredients, formula specifications, and stored

Chapter 3: Species Maintenance

Nutrient codes and nutrient names

Species codes are displayed along the top.

Species Code Names

3. When you have finished making changes, click .

Chapter 4: Ingredient Maintenance

Base vs. Overlay

Base Ingredient Maintenance

Creating a New Base Ingredient

4. Enter information into each of the following fields:

go to the next nutrient. When this window is closed (by clicking 

6. When you‘ve finished entering information, click .

Changing an Existing Base Ingredient

go to the next nutrient. When this window is closed (by clicking 

3. When you‘ve finished entering information, click .

Base Plant: This diagram shows one base ingredient

South American Plant: Canadian Plant:

This diagram shows one base ingredient

Creating/Changing an Overlay Ingredient

This window is very

When adding or changing

4. Enter information into each of the following fields:

go to the next nutrient. When this window is closed (by clicking 

6. When you‘ve finished entering information, click .

Chapter 5: Prices and Add-On Cost

Setting Price Units for Formulas

5. Click  to save your changes and return to the main window.

Setting Price Units for Ingredients

3. Click . A new search window appears.

To select all ingredients, click .

Ingredients appear in a list with a

You may use multiple lines of Add-On Costs per ingredient.

Lines 1 through 5 are used for dollar values. For example:

Lines 6 through 10 are used for percentages. For example:

Lines 11 through 15 are used for percentage add-on values.

Plant to Plant Add-On Maintenance

You may use multiple lines of Add-On Costs per plant.

Lines 1 through 5 are used for dollar values. For example: